Course Details 2012-13 FINAL

FACULTY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE

M.St./M.Phil. English Course Details 2012-13 This information should be read in conjunction with the M.St./M.Phil. Handbook

CONTENTS INTRODUCTION TO THE… M.St. in English Literature (by period, and English and American) M.St. in English Language M.Phil. in English (Medieval Studies)

5 7 9

STRAND SPECIFIC COURSE DESCRIPTIONS (A- and Hilary Term B- Courses) M.St. 650-1550/first year M.Phil. (including Michaelmas Term B-Course) M.St. 1550-1700 M.St. 1660-1830 M.St. 1800-1914 M.St. 1900-present M.St. English and American Studies M.St. English Language (including Michaelmas Term B-Course)

10 19 24 30 32 37 38

B-COURSE, POST-1550 - MICHAELMAS TERM Material Texts, 1550-1830 Material texts, 1830-Present Transcription Classes

51 52 55 59

B-Course Hilary Term Optional Seminar - The Work Of Editing

59

C-COURSES - MICHAELMAS TERM You can select your C-Courses from any strand 650-1550 The Age of Alfred Archetypes of the High Middle Ages Devotional Literature Older Scots Literature The Language of Middle English Literature (see under Language)

60 61 62 69

1550-1700 The Life and Death of the Sonnet in the Seventeenth Century: Milton, Donne and others The Sermon & Early Modern English Literary Culture Renaissance Tragicomedy

69 78 79

1660-1830 Women's Poetry 1700-1830 Letters as Literature

82 84

1800-1914 William Wordsworth Aestheticism and Decadence

87 87

2

Class and Gender in the Victorian Novel Henry James in 19th and 20th Century Contexts Money in Victorian Narrative

89 89 90

1900-present Cinema and Modernism Composing and Revising Modernism Drama, 1945-present

91 94 95

English and American Studies Modernist Poetry: Pound and Eliot Philip Roth: Contexts and Impact

96 99

Language The Language of Middle English Literature English Historical Linguistics: Theories and Models of Language Change Dictionaries and Lexicography World Englishes

3

101 103 106 111

C-COURSES - HILARY TERM You can select your C-Courses from any strand 650-1550 Old Norse Literature Beowulf Word and Image in Late Anglo-Saxon Literary Culture: from King Canute to Edward the Confessor After Chaucer Literature, Dissidence and Intellectual History in Late-Medieval England

114 114 114 117 117

1550-1700 Early Modern Underworlds Rewriting Lucretius: Materialism and Poetry in the Seventeenth Century Authors, Miscellaneity and Lyric Poetry

119 121 122

1660-1830 Senses of Humour from Wordsworth to Eliot Romanticism, Regionalism, Place The Fiction of Fantasy, 1660-1785 Samuel Johnson Romantic Life-Writing

124 131 132 134 137

1800-1914 Science, Philosophy, and Popular Fiction 1880-1910 Dickens Romantic Classicism Joseph Conrad and Nineteenth-Century Contexts

140 141 141 142

1900-present Life Writing Late Modernist Poetry in America and Britain Literature and Psychoanalysis

144 146 148

English and American Studies American Literary Studies Now (American Core Course). This is the compulsory course for the MSt English and American students; it is not open to students from other strands. Language English in the Eighteenth Century Sociolinguistics Language and Gender

152

154 158 163

4

INTRODUCTION TO THE M.ST. IN ENGLISH LITERATURE (BY PERIOD, AND ENGLISH AND AMERICAN) The course consists of four components, outlined briefly below; for further detail you should consult the strand-specific descriptions. The M.St./M.Phil. Handbook will be circulated before the beginning of term and will provide further important information needed once you begin your course. A-Course: Literature, Contexts and Approaches (the core course) This will consist of 8 weeks of 2-hour classes, taught by a variety of tutors in Michaelmas Term, and attendance is compulsory. There is no formal assessment, but written work and/or oral presentations may be required. A student-led all-day conference will be held in Trinity Term (usually in the fourth week of term) at which all students will give brief papers on topics arising from their dissertation work, and will receive feedback from the course convenor. Important note: M.St. in English and American Studies The M.St. in English and American Studies is a specialist M.St. degree which provides the opportunity to focus on American literature. Students taking this course do not have their own A-Course in Michaelmas, but follow an A-Course from one of the period-based M.St. strands. Students should select the A-Course that will complement and support their research. The compulsory core course for the M.St. in English and American Studies runs in Hilary Term and counts as a C-Course. This C-Course is not open to students from other strands. In order to qualify for the M.St. you must complete the American core course in Hilary Term and the topic chosen for your dissertation must be either a combined English/ American topic or an American topic. B-Course: Research Skills The B course is very highly recommended for those intending to continue to doctoral study, whether at Oxford or elsewhere, as it provides a thorough foundation in the skills needed to undertake research. The B-Course for the 650-1550 strand is described in the ‗Strand Specific Course Descriptions‘ section of this booklet. Post 1550 and English and American strands: In Michaelmas, the B-Course is divided into two subcourses: pre- and post-1830, which are described in detail later in this booklet. Strand specific classes on manuscript transcription and palaeography are taught in Michaelmas Term; formal assessment of this element of the B-Course takes the form of class tests. This assessment is pass/fail, and while students must pass in order to proceed with the course, their score on the test will not affect their final degree result. Further details about the examination of the B-Course are provided later in this booklet and in the M.St./M.Phil. Handbook. In Hilary students take their strand‘s specific B-Course, which is described in the ‗Strand Specific Course Descriptions‘ section of this booklet. C-Course: Special Options You can select your C-Courses from any strand These will be taught as 2-hour classes in weeks 1-6 of Michaelmas and Hilary Term. Students must choose EITHER: two of these options in each term (if they are not taking the B-Course); or one of these options in each term (if they are taking the B-Course). Candidates for the M.St. and M.Phil. are asked to commit themselves before 14 September 2012 to a first, second, and third choice for their Option(s) for Michaelmas Term. It may be possible to change your Hilary Term options should your interests alter once you have embarked on the programme. 5

The Faculty reserves the right not to run a Special Options course if there are insufficient numbers enrolled or should a tutor become unavailable due to unforeseen circumstances; please bear this in mind when selecting your first, second, and third choice options. Remember that you can select your C-Courses from any strand, depending on your interests and research plans. Assessment In Michaelmas Term candidates will be required to submit an essay of 5,000-7,000 words on a topic related to a special option taken under C in that term. In Hilary Term, candidates will be required to submit 2 essays of 5,000-7,000 words, one on a topic related to one the special option taken under C in that term, and another on a topic related either to an option taken under B (in either term) or to a second special option taken under C in that term. Candidates must gain approval of the topic of their essays by writing to the Chairman of the M.St. Examiners, care of the English Faculty Graduate Office. Details on approval of topics and timing of submission for all components are found in the M.St. /M.Phil. Handbook. Candidates taking the B-Course will be required to pass a test in transcription. Please note: If you wish to change any of your options, approval must be sought from your convenor, the tutor for the course you wish to take, and your college. Requests for option changes for Hilary Term must be submitted by the end of Michaelmas Term week 4, if your request is received after this time you may be liable for a fee. Dissertation Each student will write a 10-11,000 word dissertation on a subject to be defined in consultation with the period convenor, written under the supervision of a specialist in the Faculty, and submitted for examination at the end of Trinity Term.

6

INTRODUCTION TO THE M.ST. IN ENGLISH LANGUAGE The course consists of four components, outlined briefly below; for further detail you should consult the strand-specific descriptions. The M.St./M.Phil. Handbook will be circulated before the beginning of term and will provide further information of importance once you have begun the course. A-Course: Topics in English Language: History, Structure and Use This core course, taught through 6 weekly sessions in each of Michaelmas and Hilary Terms, provides a broad context in which to place the more specific inquiries students will pursue in their chosen optional courses. There is no formal assessment, but written work and/or oral presentations may be required. A student-led all-day conference will be held in Trinity Term (usually in the second week of term) at which all students will give brief papers on topics arising from their dissertation work, and will receive feedback from the course convenor. B-Course: Research Skills The B-Course is taught in Michaelmas and Hilary Terms, and is divided into two major parts: ‗Fundamentals of English‘, a class which is mainly intended for students with little or no background in formal linguistic analysis; and ‗Approaches to Research in English Language‘, a methods course from which all students are required to take a minimum of 12 classes. In Michaelmas Term all students will follow the same 6-week programme; in the first four weeks of Hilary Term they may select either a block of classes oriented to historical research on English or one dealing with contemporary sociolinguistic and discourse-analytic methods. The final two sessions, a workshop on writing and an individual consultation on the assessed assignment, are compulsory for all students. The B-Course is assessed by an assignment applying one approach or an appropriate combination of approaches from those studied to English language data. Students are also required to pass a test of the basic phonetic transcription and grammatical analysis skills covered by the ‗Fundamentals of English‘ class at the end of Michaelmas. This assessment is pass/fail, and while students must pass in order to proceed with the course, their score on the test will not affect their final degree result. C-Course: Special Options You can select your C- Courses from any strand* These will be taught as 2-hour classes in weeks 1-6 of Michaelmas and Hilary Term. Students must choose one of these options in each. Candidates are asked to commit themselves before 14 September 2012 to a first, second, and third choice for their option(s) for Michaelmas Term. It may be possible to change your Hilary Term options should your interests alter once you have embarked on the programme. The Faculty reserves the right not to run a special option course if there are insufficient numbers enrolled or should a tutor become unavailable due to unforeseen circumstances; please bear this in mind when selecting your options and ensure that you make a considered choice with regard to your second and third preferences. Remember that you can select your C- Courses from any strand*, depending on your interests and research plans. * Students will also be able to choose any one option selected from those offered as B courses for the M.St./M.Phil. in General Linguistics and Comparative Philology, subject to the approval of the student‘s own Course Convenor and the tutor for the option. The teaching and assessment of the

7

Linguistics B courses will follow the provisions and requirements as set by the Faculty of Linguistics, Philology and Phonetics (details will be sent separately). Assessment In Michaelmas Term candidates will be required to submit a piece of written work of 5,000-7,000 words on a topic related to one of the special options taken under C in that term. In Hilary Term, candidates will be required to submit the following: 1. A piece of written work of 5,000-7,000 words on a topic related to one of the special options taken under C in that term, 2. A piece of written work of 5,000-7,000 words on a topic related to the B-Course. ‗Written work‘ may consist of either an essay or a project which includes an analysis of linguistic data and/or an evaluation of a particular method of analysis. The three pieces of work submitted by candidates must include one piece of each type. Candidates must gain approval of the topic of their essays by writing to the Chairman of the M.St. Examiners, care of the English Faculty Graduate Office. Details on approval of topics and timing of submission for all components are found in the M.St. /M.Phil. Handbook. Candidates (as part of the B-Course) will be required to pass a test in English Language Analysis by the end of Michaelmas Term to assess their competence in the phonetic transcription and grammatical analysis of English. Please note: If you wish to change any of your options, approval must be sought from your convenor, the tutor for the course you wish to take, and your college. Requests for option changes for Hilary Term must be submitted by the end of Michaelmas Term week 4, if your request is received after this time you may be liable for a fee. Dissertation Each student will write a 10-11,000 word dissertation on a subject to be defined in consultation with the period convenor, written under the supervision of a specialist in the Faculty, and submitted for examination at the end of Trinity Term.

8

INTRODUCTION TO THE M.PHIL. IN ENGLISH (MEDIEVAL STUDIES) In their first year candidates for the M.Phil. in English (Medieval Studies) follow the same course as the M.St. in English (650-1550) students. Provided they achieve a pass mark in the first-year assessments, students may proceed to the second year. In the second year candidates must offer three of the following subjects and a dissertation: 1. The History of the Book in Britain before 1550 (Candidates will be required to transcribe from, and comment on specimens written in English in a 1 hour examination) 2. Old English 3. The Literature of England after the Norman Conquest 4. The Medieval Drama 5. Religious Writing in the Later Middle Ages 6. Medieval Romance 7. Old Norse sagas 8. Old Norse poetry 9. Old Norse special topic (only to be taken by candidates offering either option 7 or 8, or both) 10./11.

One or two of the C course special options as on offer in any strand, as specified by the M.St. English for the year concerned; candidates may not re-take any option for which they have been examined as part of their first year.

12./13./14./15. Relevant options from other courses as specified in the list for the year concerned which will be published by the Graduate Studies Office before the beginning of Michaelmas. Second Year Assessment Students will be required to submit an essay of 5,000-7,000 in Michaelmas Term or Hilary Term (depending on the term in which the course was offered). Students will write a c.15,000 word dissertation on a subject related to their subject of study. Candidates must gain approval of the topic of their essays by writing to the Chairman of the M.St./M.Phil. examiners, care of the English Graduate Studies Office. Each candidate's choice of subjects shall require the approval the Chairman of the M.St./M.Phil. Examiners, care of the English Graduate Studies Office. Details on approval of topics and timing of submission for all components are found in the M.St. /M.Phil. Handbook. Candidates are warned that they must avoid duplicating in their answers to one part of the examination material that they have used in another part of the examination, but the dissertation may incorporate work submitted for the first year dissertation.

9

STRAND-SPECIFIC COURSE DESCRIPTIONS M.ST. IN ENGLISH, 650-1550/FIRST YEAR M.PHIL. Course convenors: Dr Mishtooni Bose, Christ Church: [email protected] Dr Heather O‘Donoghue, Linacre: [email protected] This Outline describes the one-year M.St course, and also the first year of the two-year M.Phil course. You must attend the A course in Michaelmas and Hilary term, the appropriate B courses in Michaelmas and Hilary term (see also below), and your chosen C option courses in Michaelmas and Hilary terms. The A course is not examined, but you will be asked to give a class presentation within it. From the B and C courses you must, in due course, select three topics on which to be assessed. Two at least of these will be from your C Option courses. For all candidates intending to proceed to doctoral study at Oxford the third assessed component must be one of the skills courses offered in B; other candidates may if they wish offer a third course from C, although it is expected that any candidate wishing to proceed to doctoral study, whether at Oxford or elsewhere, would normally take the B course unless s/he has compelling reasons not to do so. Any candidate uncertain on this issue should, if necessary, contact the convenors as a matter of urgency to discuss this matter prior to the commencement of the course. Also compulsory is the dissertation in Section D. A-Course (Dr Mishtooni Bose and Dr Heather O‘Donoghue) Michaelmas Term Programme This M.St ‗A‘ course is designed to give you a general introduction to key works, textual witnesses, concepts, and approaches in the 650-1550 period. The topics will be covered in 2-week sessions, with a primary focus each week on Old or Middle English, as set out below. You will be asked to read in advance some primary texts and secondary works and to think through particular questions and issues. You will be encouraged to suggest supplementary texts for discussion, especially from Old and Middle English. Each week‘s class will normally take the form of some opening remarks by one of the convenors and then one or two round-table discussions, led by a different member of the group. The course will continue in Hilary Term with a focus on approaches to texts. When searching for editions and journal articles in particular, please check SOLO for electronic versions. Weeks 1-2 Anthology or miscellany Week 1: Old English: The Exeter Book of Old English Poetry Facsimile: The Exeter Book of OE Poetry, ed. R.W. Chambers, M. Forster and R. Flower (1933) The Electronic Exeter Anthology of Old English Poetry, ed. Bernard Muir and Nick Kennedy (2006), accessible via SOLO: search under ‗Bernard Muir‘ Editions: [All the texts in the MS are printed, in order, though with sometimes different titles and starting and ending points, in each of the following editions:] The Exeter Book ed. G.P. Krapp and E.K Dobbie, Anglo-Saxon Poetic Records 3 (1936) The Exeter Book, Part I, ed. I. Gollancz, EETS, 104 (1895), Part II, ed. W.S. Mackie, EETS,194 (1934) [with facing translation] The Exeter anthology of Old English poetry, ed. B.J. Muir, 2nd rev. ed. (2000). [With a useful introduction.] See also the electronic edition, above.

10

Translation: Most of the poems are translated, with notes on the others, in S.A.J. Bradley, Anglo-Saxon Poetry (Everyman‘s Library, 1982) Studies R. Gameson, ‗The origin of the Exeter Book of Old English Poetry‘, Anglo-Saxon England, 25 (1996): pay particular attention to the inventory of Latin and Old English books. Carol Braun Pasternack, The Textuality of Old English Poetry (1995) – see especially the chapter on ‗The polyphony of The Wanderer‘ (pp. 33-59), which has implications for our reading of the manuscript as a whole. K. Sisam, ‗The Exeter Book‘, in his Studies in the History of Old English Literature (1953) Riddles: J. Niles, ‗Exeter Book Riddle 74 and the play of the text‘, in Anglo-Saxon England, 27 (1998); Dieter Bitterli, Say What I Am Called: The Old English Riddles of the Exeter Book and the Anglo-Latin Tradition (2009). Elegies: T.A. Shippey, Old English Verse (1972); chapter 3: ‗Wisdom and experience: the Old English elegies‘; or C. Fell, ‗Perceptions of transience‘, in The Cambridge Companion to Old English Literature, ed. M. Godden and M. Lapidge (1991). See also Malcolm Godden, ‗Anglo-Saxons on the Mind‘, in Learning and Literature in Anglo-Saxon England: Studies presented to Peter Clemoes, ed. M. Lapidge and H. Gneuss (Cambridge, 1985), pp. 271-98; reprinted in Old English Literature: critical essays, ed. R. M. Liuzza (New Haven and London, 2002), pp. 284-314; and the recent reappraisal of psychology in the elegies and other texts in Leslie Lockett, Anglo-Saxon Psychologies in the Vernacular and Latin Traditions (2011): see the Introduction in particular. Widsith: John D. Hiles, ‗Widsith and the Anthropology of the Past‘, Philological Quarterly 78 (1999), 171-213. Some technical studies on the origin and history of the MS P. Conner, Anglo-Saxon Exeter (1993), esp. ch. 6. [A maverick book and the conclusions about Exeter and the Exeter Book‘s origins have not been accepted by sensible people, but the arguments are worth reading.] The main focus will be on what this manuscript, and the collection in it, can tell us about the composition, writing and reading of poetry in the Anglo-Saxon period. Week 2: Middle English: The Harley Lyrics Facsimile: N.R. Ker, Facsimile of British Museum MS. Harley 2253, EETS, 255 (1965) Editions Bella Millett has produced an electronic edition of selected lyrics as part of ‗Wessex Parallel Web Texts‘, available at http://www.southampton.ac.uk/~wpwt/harl2253/harley.htm The Harley Lyrics: the Middle English Lyrics of Ms. Harley 2253, ed. G.L. Brook (1956, 4th edn 1968); standard edition of the English poems, though does not have the political lyrics

11

English Lyrics of the XIIIth Century, ed. C. Brown (1932), selections, with notes The Political Songs of England from the Reign of John to that of Edward II, ed. T. Wright, Camden Soc. (1839) includes political lyrics in English from the Harley MS Studies: Studies in the Harley Lyrics (2000), ed. S. Fein, esp. the essays by Corrie, Revard, and Stemmler General: The Whole Book: Cultural Perspectives on the Medieval Miscellany, ed. S.G. Nichols and S. Wenzel (1996); vol. 33 of the Yearbook of English Studies (2003) is devoted to studies of the miscellany/anthology issue in Middle English, and in MS and print. J.A. Burrow, ‗Poems Without Contexts: the Rawlinson Lyrics‘, Essays in Criticism 29 (1979), 6-32; reprinted in J.A. Burrow, Essays in Medieval Literature (1984), available via Oxford Scholarship Online. About a different set of lyrics, but very influential for its discussion of critical stance vis-à-vis anonymous lyrics. N. Watson, ‗The Politics of Middle English Writing‘, in J. Wogan-Browne et al. (eds), The Idea of the Vernacular (1999); on vernacularity. T. Turville-Petre, ‗Three Languages‘, in his England the Nation: Language, Literature, and National Identity, 1290-1340 (1996). Jane Taylor, The Making of Poetry. Late Medieval French Poetic Anthologies (2007) on late-medieval lyric anthologies. J. Hines, Voices in the past: English literature and archaeology (2004), chapter 3. Weeks 3-4 Orality, Writing and Printing Week 3 Old English: Bede and Caedmon Facsimiles The Leningrad Bede : an eighth century manuscript of the Venerable Bede‟s Historia ecclesiastica gentis Anglorum in the Public Library, Leningrad, ed O. Arngart, Early English MSS in Facsimile, 2 (1952) The Moore Bede: an eighth century manuscript of the Venerable Bede's Historia ecclesiastica gentis Anglorum in Cambridge University Library (Kk.5.16), ed P. Hunter Blair, Early English MSS in Facsimile, 9 (1959). The Tanner Bede: the Old English version of Bede‟s Ecclesiastica : Oxford Bodleian Library Tanner 10, ed. J. Bately, Early MSS in Facsimile, 24 (1992). [The Leningrad and Moore Bedes are MSS of the original Latin text, with Caedmon‘s Hymn added in the margin or at the end; the Tanner Bede is the OE translation of Bede with Caedmon‘s Hymn embedded in the text.] Editions Bede‟s ecclesiastical history of the English people, ed. B. Colgrave and R.A.B. Mynors (1969). [Latin text with facing translation.]

12

The Old English Version of Bede‟s Ecclesiastical History of the English People, ed. T.A. Miller, EETS o.s. 95-6 (1890-1). [Includes a facing translation.] Caedmon‟s Hymn: A Multi-Media Edition, ed. Daniel Paul O‘Donnell, Cambridge 2005. [Also contains, on the associated Cd-ROM, facsimiles of the relevant pages from all the MSS.] The chapter of the OE Bede dealing with Caedmon is also in most readers, such as Mitchell and Robinson or Sweet. Translations: of the Latin in Colgrave and Mynors; of the OE in Miller. Of the account of Caedmon in the OE version: in M. Swanton, Anglo-Saxon Prose (anthology, Everyman‘s Library, 1975). Studies George Molyneaux, ‗The Old English Bede: English Ideology or Christian Instruction?‘, English Historical Review 124 (2009), 1289-1323. K. Kiernan, ‗Reading Cædmon‘s Hymn with someone else‘s glosses‘, Representations, 32 (1990), reprinted in Old English Literature, ed. R.M Liuzza (2002) F.P. Magoun, ‗Bede‘s story of Cædman: the case history of an Anglo-Saxon oral singer‘, Speculum, 30 (1955) K. O‘Brien O‘Keeffe, Visible Song (1990), chapter 2. G. Shepherd, ‗The prophetic Caedmon‘, Review of English Studies, 5 (1954) Daniel Paul O‘Donnell, Caedmon‟s Hymn. Approaches to orality Ruth Finnegan, Oral Traditions and the Verbal Arts (1991); Oral Poetry (1992). Finnegan writes well about the concept ‗oral literature‘ and the various stages (composition, transmission, performance) at which a text might be considered ‗oral‘. Brian Stock, The Implications of Literacy: Written Language and Models of Interpretation in the Eleventh and Twelfth Centuries (1987). A seminal work in this field; while it deals with a slightly later period, it has methodological implications for our approach to this material, as does M.T. Clancy, From Memory to Written Record: England 1066-1307. If possible, see Clanchy‘s postscript to the most recent (2012) edition, which appraises current understanding of medieval orality and literacy. Week 4: Middle English: Sir Thomas Malory, Morte Darthur: Winchester MS and 1485 Caxton print (and 1498 De Worde print) Facsimile of the MS: ed. N. Ker, EETS s.s. 4 (1976) Facsimile of Caxton‘s print: Sir Thomas Malory: Le Morte D‟Arthur printed by William Caxton, 1484, intro. P. Needham (1976) The Digital Malory Project is in progress but has some useful information and images of the Winchester MS: http://www.bl.uk/treasures/malory/project.html

13

Editions: The standard edition of Malory‘s Works is by E. Vinaver, 3 vols (1973, rev. P.J.C. Field, 1990). There is also a one-volume Oxford edition by Vinaver (1971). Vinaver works principally from the Winchester MS, but collates with Caxton‘s printed edition where necessary, and indicates Caxton‘s book divisions. There is a two-volume modern spelling Penguin edition by J. Cowen (1969) based on Caxton‘s edition. The Norton Critical Edition by S. H.A. Shepherd (2004) is based on the MS and attempts to reproduce its rubrication; this edition also has very useful extracts from sources and contextual material. Studies: H. Cooper, ‗Opening up the Malory Manuscript‘, in The Malory Debate: Essays on the Texts of Le Morte Darthur (2000), ed. B. Wheeler, R. Kindrick, and M.N. Salda; (other essays in this collection are well worth reading) D. T. Hanks, ‗Textual Harassment: Caxton, de Worde, and Malory‘s Morte Darthur‘, in Re-viewing Le Morte Darthur, ed. K.S. Whetter and R.L. Radulescu (2005) A starting-point for general study of Malory is A Companion to Malory, ed. E.A. Archibald and A.S.G. Edwards (1996) Weeks 5-6 ‗Authorship‘ and text revision Week 5 Old English: Wulfstan, Sermo ad Anglos Facsimile: A Wulfstan MS ed. H. Loyn, EEMF, 17 (1971). (Containing the Nero or I version of the sermon.) Editions Wulfstan: Sermo Lupi ad Anglos, ed. D. Whitelock (a conflated version) The Homilies of Wulfstan ed. D. Bethurum (1957). Contains the 3 versions of the Sermo ad Anglos, as homily 20 Translated in M. Swanton, Anglo-Saxon Prose, and in English Historical Documents, ed. D. Whitelock, vol I ((2nd edn, 1979) Studies S. Dien, ‗Sermo Lupi ad Anglos: the order and date of the three versions‘, Neuphilogische Mitteilungen, 64 (1975) M. Godden, ‗Apocalypse and invasion in late Anglo-Saxon England‘, in From Anglo-Saxon to Early Middle English: studies presented to E.G. Stanley, ed. M. Godden, D. Gray and T. Hoad (1994). S. Hollis, ‗The Thematic Structure of the Sermo Lupi‟, ASE, 6 (1977) Wulfstan, Archbishop of York : the proceedings of the second Alcuin conference, ed. M. Townend (2004) Week 6: Middle English: Ancrene Wisse Facsimile: A.I. Doyle (ed.), The Vernon Manuscript (Bodleian, Eng. poet. a. 1) (1987). A digital facsimile is in progress ed. Wendy Scase: www.medievalenglish.bham.ac.uk/vernon/ 14

For a facsimile of the closely-related Bodley 34, containing Katherine Group texts, see N.R. Ker, Facsimile of MS. Bodley 34 EETS OS 247 (1960) Editions Edition based on CCCC 402 with variants from other mss: B. Millett, ed., Ancrene Wisse EETS OS 325 (2005) and OS 326 (2006). EETS separate (diplomatic) editions nos 216, 219, 225, 229, 232, 249, 252, 267, 310. Parts 6 and 7 ed. G. Shepherd (rev.1985). Parts 7 and 8 ed. and with translation by B. Millett and J. Wogan-Browne in Medieval English Prose for Women (1990). Also Ancrene Wisse, ed. R. Hasenfratz, TEAMS (2000) Translations: The most strongly recommended is that by Bella Millett, Ancrene Wisse: guide for anchoresses (Exeter: Exeter University Press, 2009). There are older translations by M. Salu (1955, rev. ed. 1990); A. Savage and N. Watson (1991, in Anchoritic Spirituality, Ancrene Wisse and Associated Works, and H. White (1993) Studies C. Cannon, ch. 5, ‗The Place of the Self: Ancrene Wisse and the Katherine-group‘, in his The Grounds of English Literature (2004) A.S.G. Edwards, ‗The Middle English Manuscripts and Early Readers of Ancrene Wisse‘ in A Companion to Ancrene Wisse, ed. Y. Wada (2003) B. Millett, ‗Mouvance and the Medieval Author: Re-editing Ancrene Wisse‘, in Late-Medieval Religious Texts and their Transmission, ed. A.J. Minnis (1991) Hilary Term Programme This course is intended to provide a general introduction to more theoretical issues in textual analysis, with attention to particular circumstances arising in relation to medieval texts. It is a core component of the M.St./M.Phil. programmes for the medieval period. Meetings are to be held in weeks 1-6 of Hilary term. Please note: the texts listed are merely starting points. You are asked to bring to each seminar short examples from your own reading to share with the group. Week 1: Transmission and Reception Themes: the vicissitudes of the material text; to what extent does a text dictate or control its own reception?; the roles of scribes, scriptoria, printshops, lending protocols, and other terms and modes of circulation. Texts: a compilation to be circulated in advance to include excerpts from Aelfric, Chaucer's poem to Adam, Scriveyn, the last chapter of the Book of Margery Kempe, the palinode from Troilus, and the Revelation of the One Hundred Pater Nosters.Also worth thinking about here is the famous line that Beowulf and Exodus share, ‗enge anpaðas, uncuðe gelad‘. Basic studies: Ananya Jahanara Kabir, ‗Anglo-Saxon Textual Attitudes‘, in The Cambridge History of Literary Criticism 2.The Middle Ages, ed. Alastair Minnis and Ian Johnson (Cambridge, 2005), pp. 310-323. Andrew Taylor, Scribes, Patrons, and Books; The Idea of the Vernacular, and the chapter on Miscellanies from Griffiths and Pearsall, Book Production and Publishing in Britain.

15

Week 2: Authorship Revisited A taxonomy of medieval possibilities: translation, compilation, authorship. What purposes are served by authorial attribution? When does the idea of a vernacular author become thinkable? What about making and other alternative models? Texts: Ælfric, prefaces [Wilcox (1994), passim]; poems of Cynewulf; Piers, C.5.1-104; House of Fame, 11. 1451-1512. Basic studies: Richard Gameson, The Scribe Speaks? Colophons in Early English manuscripts. H.M. Chadwick memorial lectures, 12. Cambridge: Dept. of Anglo Saxon Norse and Celtic Univ. of Cambridge, 2002. A.J. Minnis, Medieval Theory of Authorship (1984), esp. pp. 190-210; Rita Copeland, Rhetoric, Hermeneutics, and Translation in the Middle Ages, esp. pp. 179-220; R. Hanna, essay on ‗Will's Work‘ from Written Work, eds. Justice and Kerby-Fulton; Roland Barthes, ‗The Death of the Author‘ and ‗From Work to Text,‘ frequently reprinted, esp. in Barthes, Image,Music,Text. Week 3: Publics and Audiences Prologues and intended audiences. The audience as participant in the creation/ meaning of the work. Texts: Wulfstan (again); Trevisa, ‗Dialogue between the Lord and the Clerk on Translation‘; excerpt from Speculum Vitae - both from Wogan-Browne, et al, The Idea of the Vernacular, pp. 130-38, 33637. Basic studies: Roy M. Liuzza,. "Who Read the Gospels in Old English?" Words and Works: Studies in Medieval English Language and Literature in Honour of Fred C. Robinson. Eds. Peter S. Baker and Nicholas Howe: U of Toronto P, Toronto, ON, 1998. 3-24.; H.R. Jauss, ‗Literary History as a Challenge to Literary Theory‘ (Toward an Aesthetic of Reception, pp. 19-32); Wogan-Browne et al, ‗Readers/Audiences /Texts‘, in The Idea of the Vernacular, pp.109-125. Week 4: Genres Does genre offer a compositional horizon? An interpretative horizon? Is a text always to be believed when it specifies its genre? How do we proceed when it fails to do so? Does genre-study constitute a retrograde escape from history or an invaluable analytical tool? What is the relation of genre-study to the study of discourse? What are the respective advantages of the two emphases? Texts: Judgement Day II; Sir Orfeo; Chaucer's ‗Second Nun's Tale‘; Boccaccio, Decameron, second story, fourth day; oral and written generic markers in sermons in Old English and Middle English Basic studies: Katherine O'Brien O'Keeffe, Visible Song: Transitional Literacy in Old English Verse. Cambridge Studies in Anglo-Saxon England; 4. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1990; H.R. Jauss, ‗Literary History as Challenge‘; Fredric Jameson, ‗Magical Narratives‘, in The Political Unconscious; Foucault, Résumé des cours, pp. 9-11. Week 5: History and the text How texts affiliate themselves with each other, with audiences, and with history external to the text. Topicality vs. other forms of affiliation. What is, or might be, historical about a conventional text? Texts: Beowulf; Anglo-Saxon Chronicle; Pearl, 11. 1-60; Chaucer, ‗Lak of Stedfastnesse‘. Basic studies: J.G.A. Pocock, ‗Texts as Events,‘ in The Politics of Discourse, ed. Zwicker and Sharpe (Berkeley, 1987), 21-34; Kevin Kiernan, Beowulf and the Beowulf Manuscript. New Brunswick, N.J: Rutgers University Press, 1981; J.E. Cross, Saga-Book, 16 (1965), 283-314; P. Strohm, ‗The Textual Environment of Chaucer's Lak‘ in Hochon's Arrow, 57-74; Helen Barr, ‗Pearl, or The Jeweller's Tale‘, MAE, 69 (2000), 59-79, reprinted in her Socioliterary Practice.

16

Week 6: Literary Language Texts will include Beowulf, lines 1-52, The Prologue to the Monk‘s Tale, The Squire‘s Tale lines 89173, Sir Gawain and the Green Knight lines 250-365. Basic studies: Daniel Donoghue, ‗Language matters‘, Andy Orchard, ‗Oral tradition‘, in O'Brien O'Keeffe, Reading OE Texts (1997); G. A. Lester, The Language of Old and Middle English poetry (1996), chapters 3-5; Bjork and Niles, A Beowulf Handbook, Chapters 4, 5 and 6 (Prosody; Diction, Variation and the Formula; and Rhetoric and Style); Malcolm Godden, ‗Literary Language‘ in R.M. Hogg, The Cambridge History of the English Language Volume I (Cambridge, 1992), pp. 490-535; N.F. Blake, ‗The Literary Language‘ in N.F. Blake (ed.), The Cambridge History of the English Language Volume II (Cambridge, 1992), pp. 500-41; David Burnley, The Language of Chaucer (London, 1989), chapters 7 and 8. B-Course: Palaeography and Textual Criticism (Editing and Theories of Text) This course is intended to develop the scholarly skills essential for work in the medieval period. Candidates intending to apply for permission to proceed to doctoral work are required to attend this course, and to be assessed on it. M.Phil. candidates will also find this course a valuable training in basic research methodologies and disciplines, and we would encourage all students to attend these classes. Course in Transcription, Palaeography, Codicology and the History of the Book This course will be taught by Prof. Daniel Wakelin. The classes on palaeography, codicology and the history of the book will meet twice weekly across Michaelmas and Hilary terms; the class on transcription will meet once weekly from week 5 of Michaelmas term and on through Hilary term. The course will culminate in a submitted essay and an examination in transcription and palaeography. There is no set book to buy; however, many students find Jane Roberts, A Guide to Scripts Used in English Writings up to 1500 (London, Toronto, 2005), to be useful for private study in transcription and palaeography, and as a reference book thereafter. The course will not assume prior knowledge of manuscript studies. Instead, the essential preliminary work is to ensure that you are very familiar with reading works in Old English and Middle English, including early Middle English, in the original languages. You need some familiarity with the grammar, vocabulary and history of these languages, and experience of the ‗feel‘ of these languages and works written in them, as a preliminary to transcribing manuscripts in them. If you have not already done these things, you must: master some essential Old English grammar and vocabulary; read a history of the various transitions from Old to Early Modern English; and browse widely in works, or at least in anthologies of extracts of works, in the original languages. Students are welcome to e-mail Prof. Wakelin on [email protected] for suggestions to suit their level of previous experience. Course in Textual Criticism (Editing and Theories of Text) Michaelmas Term Week 4: Vincent Gillespie, Overview Week 5: Daniel Wakelin, Critical Texts, Variance, Accuracy and Error Week 6: Nick Perkins, Cruces and Editorial Problems in Medieval Texts Hilary Term Week 1: Heather O‘Donoghue, Old Norse

17

Week 2: Simon Horobin, Chaucer Week 3: Carl Schmidt Langland Week 4: Sally Mapstone, Older Scots Week 5: Old English (speaker to be confirmed)

18

M.ST. IN ENGLISH LITERATURE, 1550-1700. Convenors: Dr Margaret Kean, St Hilda‘s College: [email protected] Dr John Pitcher, St John‘s College: [email protected] This one-year course offers an introduction to current critical debates and to research resources, with particular attention to the facilities available at Oxford. The boundary dates of 1550-1700 are no more than a rough way of dividing up the general M.St. programme. There is every opportunity to follow up your own previous interests within them, to discover new interests, and to cross the boundaries. It is normally possible to choose options from earlier or later periods within the 1550-1700 area as well as take overlapping options from the medieval or 1660-1830 M.Sts. A-Course (Professor David Norbrook and others) This course examines some key moments in the cultural and political history across our period, showing means of exploring them in depth and ways in which they raise larger themes in current criticism. Naturally no such course can be comprehensive and we recognize that you will have widely varying backgrounds in the period; this course aims to help you to deepen your understanding and to orient you in the resources that will be necessary for your dissertation research. Through a close analysis of the texts‘ language and genre and their contemporary production and reception, we shall show how they helped to shape, rather than just reflecting, their culture and opened up new imaginative spaces. You should try to get as much reading as possible done over the summer, especially of the primary sources; further guidance on the most important secondary reading will be given in the introductory session, details to be circulated later, but feel free to email David Norbrook for advice, [email protected]. Each of you will be asked to present a brief position paper during one of the classes, with the aim of directing part of the discussion. These will be handed in for feedback but will not form part of your course assessment. We shall meet in the week before the class begins to fix presentations for each week. Week 1: 1516/1551: Humanism, Courts, and Reformation (Professor David Norbrook) Thomas More, Utopia. Many modern translations available but the class will look at issues of language, translation and book history with reference to the 1516 Latin edition and the 1551 version by Ralph Robinson, reprinted in Three Early Modern Utopias, ed. Susan Bruce (Oxford University Press, 1999), and the Broadview edition, ed. David Harris Sacks (Boston 1999), also available on EEBO (Early English Books Online). There are parallel-text Latin and English versions: Edward Surtz, S.J., and J. H. Hexter, eds. Utopia, vol. 4 of The Yale Edition of the Complete Works of St. Thomas More (Yale University Press, 1965) and Thomas More, Utopia: Latin Text and English Translation, ed. George M. Logan, Robert M. Adams, and Clarence H. Miller (Cambridge University Press, 1995). David Weil Baker, Divulging Utopia: Radical Humanism in Sixteenth-Century England (Amherst, 1999), ch. 4. Clare Carroll, ‗Humanism and English Literature in the Sixteenth and Seventeenth Centuries‘, in Jill Kraye (ed.), The Cambridge Companion to Renaissance Humanism (Cambridge, 1996), pp. 246-68. Terence Cave (ed.), Thomas More's Utopia in Early Modern Europe: Paratexts and Contexts (Manchester, 2009). Stephen Greenblatt, Renaissance Self-Fashioning from More to Milton (Chicago and London, 1980), chapter 1.

19

Arthur F. Kinney, Humanist Poetics: Thought, Rhetoric, and Fiction in Sixteenth-Century England (Amherst, 1986), ch. 2. Diarmaid MacCulloch, Tudor Church Militant: Edward VI and the Protestant Reformation (London, 2000), chs. 1-2. Quentin Skinner, review of Surtz‘s edition of the Utopia, Past and Present, no. 38 (Dec. 1967), pp. 153168: a classic statement of a new model of intellectual history. Week 2: 1579-80: The Poetics of Fiction (Dr John Pitcher) Sir Philip Sidney, The Countess of Pembroke's Arcadia (the New Arcadia), ed. Victor Skretkowicz (Oxford, 1987); ed. Maurie Evans (Harmondsworth, 1987); the Defence of Poetry, in Sidney‟s The Defence of Poesy and Selected Renaissance Literary Criticism, ed. Gavin Alexander (Penguin, 2004); Miscellaneous Prose of Sir Philip Sidney, ed. Katherine Duncan-Jones and Jan van Dorsten (Oxford, 1973); An apology for poetry, or, The defence of poesy, ed. Geoffrey Shepherd, 3rd edition, ed. R.W. Maslen (Manchester, 2002). Arthur F. Kinney, Humanist Poetics: Thought, Rhetoric, and Fiction in Sixteenth-Century England (Amherst, 1986), ch. 7. Margaret Anne Doody, The True Story of the Novel (London, 1997), chs. 1, 10, 11. Week 3: 1599: Shakespeare‘s Globe (Dr Emma Smith) Shakespeare, Henry V, Julius Caesar James Shapiro, A Year in the Life of William Shakespeare: 1599 (London, 2005). Week 4: 1608-9: private and public theatres: the Blackfriars (Dr Emma Smith) Chapman, Byron's Conspiracy, in The Conspiracy and Tragedy of Charles Duke of Byron, ed. J. M. R Margeson (Manchester, 1988); Shakespeare, Coriolanus. Week 5: 1611: the King James Bible and religious culture (Professor Peter McCullough) Gospel of St. John chapter 1, versions in Geneva Bible, Bishops‘ Bible, King James Version.; John Donne, ‗Show me dear Christ Thy Spouse'; Lancelot Andrewes, Christmas sermon 1611, http://anglicanhistory.org/lact/andrewes/v1/sermon6.html Helen Moore and Julian Reid, Manifold Greatness:The Making of the King James Bible (Oxford, 2011). Peter McCullough (ed.), Lancelot Andrewes: Selected Sermons and Lectures (Oxford University Press, 2005), Introduction. Week 6: 1644: the English Revolution and the public sphere (Professor David Norbrook) John Milton, Areopagitica, in The Complete Prose Works of John Milton, ed. Ernest Sirluck, II (Yale University Press, 1959); introduction should be read. Sharon Achinstein, Milton and the Revolutionary Reader (Princeton, 1994); Bodleian Library ‗Citizen Milton‘ online exhibition, http://www.cems.ox.ac.uk/citizenmilton/ Jürgen Habermas, The Structural Transformation of the Public Sphere: An Inquiry into a Category of Bourgeois Society [1962], trans. Thomas Burger, new ed. (Polity Press, 1992), chs. 1-3.

20

Eric Nelson, ‗―True Liberty‖: Isocrates and Milton‘s Areopagitica‘, Milton Studies, 40 (2001), pp. 201– 21, reprinted in The Greek Tradition in Republican Thought (Cambridge, 2004). Week 7: 1665-7: The poetics of Restoration (Professor David Norbrook) John Dryden, Astraea Redux (1660) and Annus Mirabilis (1667), in Dryden: Selected Poems, ed. Paul Hammond and David Hopkins (London, 2007). Andrew Marvell, ‗Last Instructions to a Painter‘ (1667), The Poems of Andrew Marvell in, ed. Nigel Smith (London, 2003) or George de F. Lord (ed.), Poems on Affairs of State, vol. 1 (1660-1678) (New Haven and London, 1963). John Milton, Paradise Lost (you should of course know this poem but class will focus on proems to books 1, 3, 7, 9). Edmund Waller, Instructions to a Painter (1665), in George de F. Lord (ed.), Poems on Affairs of State, vol. 1 (1660-1678) (New Haven and London, 1963) . George Wither, Sighs for the Pitchers (1666), in Miscellaneous Works of George Wither, 6 vols. (Manchester, 1872-78; rptd New York, 1967), vol. 3. Blair Hoxby, Mammon's Music : Literature and Economics in the Age of Milton (New Haven, 2002), chs. 4-5. Michael McKeon, Politics and Poetry in Restoration England : the Case of Dryden's „Annus Mirabilis‟ (Cambridge, Mass., 1975). Week 8: 1688: Fiction, Globalization, and Glorious Revolution (Professor David Norbrook) Aphra Behn, Oroonoko. Richard Kroll, ‗―Tales of Love and Gallantry‖: The Politics of Oroonoko‘, Huntington Library Quarterly, 67 (2004): 573–605. Laura J. Rosenthal, ‗Oroonoko: reception, ideology, and narrative strategy‘, in Derek Hughes and Janet Todd (ed.), The Cambridge Companion to Aphra Behn (Cambridge University Press, 2004), pp. 15165. Studying at Oxford Studying the early modern period in Oxford has the additional excitement that the institution and its architecture and libraries are part of the subject. Your college may well have a library with a significant collection of early modern materials. From its refoundation in the seventeenth century the Bodleian Library aimed to build up a comprehensive collection ranging beyond Western European languages to Hebrew, Arabic, Persian and other languages. The Ashmolean Museum, founded in 1683, has been developed in its latest rebuilding as a fascinating collection on cross-cultural exchanges, while its original building, the world‘s oldest surviving purpose-built museum building, is now a Museum of the History of Science. For help in decoding the architecture see Geoffrey Tyack, Oxford: An Architectural Guide (Oxford University Press, 1998). Take some time to look at the portraits in the frieze of the Bodleian‘s Upper Reading Room, a conspectus of the early modern intellectual world: see M. R. A. Bullard, ‗Talking Heads: The Bodleian Frieze, its Inspiration, Sources, Designer and Significance‘, Bodleian Library Record, 14:6 (April, 1994), pp. 461-500. For more on this subject see the ‗Research Resources‘ and ‗Resources in Oxford‘ sections of the Centre for Early Modern Studies website (www.cems.ox.ac.uk); and for a walking tour of early science in Oxford, see http://www.mhs.ox.ac.uk/features/walk/. 21

The relevant volumes of the standard history of the university, T.H. Aston (gen.ed.), The History of the University of Oxford (Oxford University Press, 1984- ), 3: The Collegiate University, ed. James McConica, and 4: Seventeenth-Century Oxford, ed. Nicholas Tyacke, are massive and hard to digest. But it is worth consulting Mordechai Feingold‘s essay on ‗The Humanities‘, on pp. 211-357 of vol. 4. Notes on further reading The New Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature, gen. ed. George Watson, vols. 1 (1600-1660) and 2 (1660-1800) (Cambridge University Press, 1974, 1971) is still an invaluable resource for research in depth; coverage of secondary materials is inevitably dated but it can be good to have a longer timescale. For the period‘s history, useful works include Susan Brigden, New Worlds, Lost Worlds: the Rule of the Tudors, 1485-1603 (London, 2000) and Christopher Hill, The Century of Revolution, 1603-1714 (2nd edn., London, 1980), which is dated but crams a lot in. C. S. Lewis, English Literature in the Sixteenth Century: Excluding Drama (Oxford, 1954), ch. 1, ‗New Learning and New Ignorance‘, is still worth reading as a polemical introduction to the period. On language, see Manfred Gorlach, Introduction to Early Modern English (Cambridge, 1991). Innumerable Companions and Handbooks are available. There is a useful amount of historical contextualization in David Loewenstein and Janel Mueller (ed.), The Cambridge History of Early Modern English Literature (Cambridge University Press, 2002). But you are encouraged to focus on primary texts and individual research into their contexts; in each class we shall explore particular online and printed resources, with the aim of helping to focus your dissertation research. Hilary Term B-Course Writing, Reading, and Editing Early Modern Texts (Dr Hugh Gazzard and Dr Kathryn Murphy) This course continues the work begun in your general bibliography course in Michaelmas Term by focussing on the specific circumstances of the production, use, and circulation of texts and books, in print and manuscript, in the early modern period, and the particular challenges these pose to the modern scholar and editor. We will meet in 10th week, Michaelmas Term, for c.30 minutes, to outline the term ahead and what work is expected over the Christmas vacation. No preparation will be necessary for this meeting. Your B-Course will be assessed by an essay, due in 10th week of Hilary Term, in which you will be expected to produce either an edition of an early modern text, or a bibliographical essay on a focussed topic, chosen with our help. Although there is no necessity to submit your title until 6th week of Hilary Term, the earlier you clarify your ideas, the more time you will have to develop them, and it is worth thinking about this during Michaelmas Term. Your course tutors will help you develop your essay topic in the early weeks of Hilary Term. You will be expected to read 100-150 pages of specified material for each class, which will form the basis of discussion in the first hour. Each student will be expected to deliver a short (10 minute) presentation, on the subject of their own B-course essay, during the course of the term; these presentations, and a Q&A session following them, will take up the second hour. Week 1: Editing early modern texts: manuscript Week 2: Editing early modern texts: print The first two weeks of the course aim to introduce issues and problems in editing early modern texts, in manuscript and print. We will address both the theory and the practice of editing (copy-texts; 22

modernization; varieties of transcription; variant readings and revision; anonymity, authorship, and attribution; multiple hands; editing play-texts; print vs. electronic editions; apparatus; history of textual scholarship). Oxford is particularly rich in scholars engaged in editing (current projects include works by John Heywood, John Donne, Francis Bacon, James Shirley, Thomas Browne, John Milton, Lucy Hutchinson, and John Aubrey), and each week will introduce case studies which illuminate problematic aspects of editing. Week 3: Manuscript circulation and scribal publication In our period, the fact that a work remained in manuscript did not mean that it was private or unpublished. This class will explore what is called, in the title of a crucial work on the subject, ‗the culture and commerce‘ of the making and exchanging of manuscripts in the period: the mechanics of manuscript production, reproduction, and circulation; the social contexts, coteries, and ‗scribal communities‘ necessary for and established by the circulation of manuscripts; the purposes—personal, political, literary, and scientific—which such practices served. Week 4: Authors, printers, and booksellers Who wrote? Modes of authorship, popular through to elite. The ‗profession of dramatist‘. Patronage and the dedication. Organization of book production and the retail trade. ‗Title‘ and intellectual property. Week 5: Censorship and licensing Agencies of press censorship and licensing: the Stationers‘ Company, the Church and Licensers. Provision for pre-publication censorship, and post-publication suppression. Censorship of the drama. Week 6: Readers and reading practices Who read, and how? Literacy rates and types. Orality and literacy. Reading purposes and practices. Reading traces: collection, annotation, copying and commonplace books.

23

M.ST. IN ENGLISH LITERATURE, 1660-1830 Convenors: Dr Matthew Bevis, Keble College: [email protected] Dr Christine Gerrard, Lady Margaret Hall: [email protected] We look forward to meeting you in October. In Michaelmas Term, you will take the 8-week core Acourse under the supervision of the programme convenors. You will be taking two further courses in the first term, so you should read as much as possible before you arrive. Unless designated supplementary, the readings listed below are required. We also recommend that you purchase two anthologies and read around in them as much as possible: Eighteenth-Century Poetry: An Annotated Anthology, eds. David Fairer and Christine Gerrard (2nd edn, 2003), and Romanticism: An Anthology, ed. Duncan Wu (3rd edn, 2006). A-Course This course seeks to examine literature, literary criticism, and scholarship in the period. We will consider arguments and assertions about writing and authors, as they were rehearsed from the late seventeenth to the early nineteenth century and as they have been described, summarized, and reconceived in critical studies of more recent years. We will be discussing the status and reach of English literature across the whole period 1660-1830, and all classes will encourage close attention to literary styles, forms and genres. Michaelmas Term Week 1: Civility, circulation and self-interest Joseph Addison on The Royal Exchange, Spectator number 69 (in Erin Mackie, ed., The Commerce of Everyday Life: Selections from the Tatler and The Spectator (1998), pp. 203-6) Jonathan Swift, ‗A Description of a City Shower‘ in The Essential Writings of Jonathan Swift (Norton Critical Edition), ed. Claude Rawson and Ian Higgins (2009) Joseph Addison, ‗The History of a Shilling‘, Tatler number 249 (in Mackie, ed., The Commerce of Everyday Life (1998) pp.183-8) Bernard Mandeville, The Fable of the Bees 1714, 1723 (Liberty Press, Indianapolis, 1988) Recommended supplementary reading Colin Nicholson, Writing and the Rise of Finance (2004); Lawrence Klein, ‗Coffee-house civility, 1660–1714: an aspect of post-courtly culture in England‘, Huntington Library Quarterly, 59:1, (1997), 30–51; Eve Tavor Bannet, ‗―Secret History‖: Or, Talebearing Inside and Outside the Secretorie‘, Huntington Library Quarterly, 68:1-2, (2005), 375-96; reprinted in The Uses of History in EarlyModern England, ed. by Paulina Kewes (San Marino: Huntingdon Library, 2006) Week 2: Satire and Authorship Jonathan Swift, ‗A Beautiful Young Nymph Going to Bed‘ (1734), ‗To A Lady, who desired the Author to write some Verses upon her in the Heroic Style‘ (1733), and ‗Verses on the Death of Dr Swift‘ (1739), in The Essential Writings of Jonathan Swift (Norton Critical Edition), ed. Claude Rawson and Ian Higgins (2009) Alexander Pope, ‗Epistle to Miss Blount‘, and An Epistle to Dr. Arbuthnot (1735), in John Butt, ed., The Poems of Alexander Pope: A One-Volume Edition of the Twickenham Pope (1965 and reprinted)

24

Recommended supplementary reading Ian Jack, Augustan Satire: Intention and Idiom in English Poetry (1952); Dustin Griffin, Satire: A Critical Reintroduction (1994) and Swift and Pope: Satirists in Dialogue (2010); Joseph M. Levine, Between Ancients and Moderns: Baroque Culture in Restoration England (1999); Claude Rawson, ‗Swift‘, in The Cambridge History of English Poetry, ed. Michael O‘Neill (2010); Catherine Ingrassia, Authorship, Commerce and Gender in Early Eighteenth-Century England: A Culture of Paper Credit (1998); Pat Rogers, Hacks and Dunces: Pope, Swift, and Grub Street (1980); Pat Rogers, ‗A Drama of Mixed Feelings: the Epistle to Arbuthnot‘, in Essays on Pope (1993); Helen Deutsch, ‗Pope, Self, and World‘, in The Cambridge Companion to Alexander Pope, ed. Pat Rogers (2007); Brean Hammond, The Rise of Professional Imaginative Writing in England, 1670-1740: Hackney for Bread (1997) Week 3: Literary Loneliness Ann Finch, ‗A Nocturnal Reverie‘ (1713), in Eighteenth-Century Poetry: An Annotated Anthology ed. Fairer and Gerrard Thomas Parnell, ‗A Night-Piece on Death‘ (1722). Eighteenth-Century Poetry: An Annotated Anthology Thomas Gray, Elegy Written in a Country Churchyard (1751), in The Poems of Gray, Collins and Goldsmith, ed. Roger Lonsdale (Longman, 1969) Anna Laeititia Barbauld, ‗A Summer Evening‘s Meditation‘ (1773), in Eighteenth-Century Poetry: An Annotated Anthology Recommended supplementary reading William Empson, Some Versions of Pastoral (Hogarth Press, 1986 and reprinted), ch. 1: ‗Proletarian Literature‘; Vincent Newey, ‗The Selving of Thomas Gray‘, Paul Williamson, ‗Gray‘s Elegy and the Logic of Expression‘, and Richard Terry, ‗Gray and Poetic Diction‘, in Thomas Gray: Contemporary Essays, eds. W. B. Hutchings and William Ruddick (1993); John Sitter, Literary Loneliness in MidEighteenth-Century England (1982); Christopher Miller, The Invention of Evening (2006); Marshall Brown, Preromanticism (1991), chapter 3; David Fairer, English Poetry of the Eighteenth Century (Longman, 2003), chapter 6 Week 4: The Essay Joseph Addison, The Spectator numbers 1 and 10 (1711) David Hume, ‗Of Essay-Writing‘ (1742) Samuel Johnson, The Rambler numbers 2 and 23 (1750) William Hazlitt, ‗On Reading Old Books‘ in The Plain Speaker (1821), ‗On Familiar Style‘, in Table Talk (1821-22), ‗The Letter-Bell‘, in The Monthly Magazine (1831) Charles Lamb, ‗Imperfect Sympathies‘, ‗The Old and the New Schoolmaster‘, and ‗Detached Thoughts on Books and Reading‘ in Essays of Elia (1823) Recommended supplementary reading Erin Mackie, ed., introduction to The Commerce of Everyday Life: Selections from the Tatler and The Spectator (1998); Denise Gigante, ed., The Great Age of the English Essay (2008); W. K. Wimsatt, The Prose Style of Samuel Johnson (1941); David Womersley, ed., introduction to Samuel Johnson: Selected Essays (2003); Thomas McFarland, Romantic Cruxes: The English Essayists and the Spirit of the Age (1987); David Bromwich, Hazlitt: The Mind of a Critic (1983); Tom Paulin, The Day-Star of Liberty: William Hazlitt‟s Radical Style (1998); Adam Phillips, ed., introduction to Charles Lamb: Selected Prose (1985); Carl H. Klaus, The Made-up Self: Impersonation in the Personal Essay (2010); David Russell, ‗―Our Debt to Lamb‖: The Romantic Essay and the Emergence of Tact‘, ELH, 79 (2012), 179-209.

25

Week 5: Oddity and Longevity: Laurence Sterne The Life and Opinions of Tristram Shandy, Gentleman (1759-67) - NB: use the Penguin Classics edition, ed. Melvyn New and Joan New (2003) Recommended supplementary reading Tom Keymer, Sterne, the Moderns, and the Novel (2002); Ian Campbell Ross, Laurence Sterne: A Life (2001); David A. Brewer, The Afterlife of Character, 1726-1825 (2005), ch. 5; John Mullan, Sentiment and Sociability: The Language of Feeling in the Eighteenth Century, ch. 4 (1988); Fred Parker, Scepticism and Literature: An Essay on Pope, Hume, Sterne and Johnson (2003); Melvyn New, ed., Tristram Shandy: Contemporary Critical Essays (1992); Thomas Keymer, ed., Laurence Sterne‟s Tristram Shandy: A Casebook (2006); Thomas Keymer, ‗Sterne and Romantic Autobiography‘, in The Cambridge Companion to English Literature 1740-1830 (2004) Week 6: Composing Yourself William Wordsworth, The Prelude (1805 text) Recommended supplementary reading William Hazlitt, ‗William Wordsworth‘ in The Spirit of the Age (1825); Christopher Ricks, two essays on Wordsworth in The Force of Poetry (1995); Stephen Gill, ed., William Wordsworth‟s Prelude: A Casebook (2006); Stephen Gill, Wordsworth‟s Revisitings (2011), chapters 3 and 4; David Bromwich, Disowned By Memory: Wordsworth‟s Poetry of the 1790s (2000); William Empson, ‗Sense in the Prelude‘ in The Structure of Complex Words (1953); Paul Fry, Wordsworth and the Poetry of What We Are (2008) Week 7: Visionaries and Sceptics Thomas Love Peacock, Nightmare Abbey (1818), ed. Lisa Vargo (Broadview Press, 2007) Thomas Love Peacock, ‗Four Ages of Poetry‘ (1819) [in Duncan Wu (ed.), Romanticism: An Anthology (3rd ed., 2006)] P. B. Shelley, ‗Defence of Poetry‘ (1820) [also in Wu (ed.), Romanticism] Recommended supplementary reading William Keach, Shelley‟s Style (1984), chapter 1; Marilyn Butler, Peacock Displayed: A Satirist in his Context (1969); Gary Dyer, British Satire and the Politics of Style 1789-1832 (1997), chapter 4; Lorna Sage, ed., Peacock: The Satirical Novels, A Casebook (1976); Carl Dawson, His Fine Wit: A Study of Thomas Love Peacock (1970); David Bromwich, ed., Romantic Critical Essays (1987); Steven Jones, Satire and Romanticism (2000); Appendices A, B, C and D in Vargo‘s Broadview edition of Nightmare Abbey. Week 8: Heroism, Mock-Heroic, Mock-Epic Alexander Pope, The Rape of The Lock (1714) George Gordon, Lord Byron, Don Juan, Cantos I & II (1821) – in e.g. Wu, ed., Romanticism Recommended supplementary reading David Fairer, English Poetry of the Eighteenth Century (2002), ch. 3; Richard Terry, Mock-Heroic from Butler to Cowper: An English Genre and Discourse (2005); Claude Rawson, Satire and Sentiment 1660-1830 (2000), chs. 3-5; Ritchie Robertson, Mock-Epic Poetry from Pope to Heine (2009); Jerome McGann, Don Juan in Context (1976); Anne Barton, Byron: Don Juan (1992); Jane Stabler, Byron, Poetics and History (2002); W. H. Auden, ‗Don Juan‘, in The Dyer‟s Hand (1968)

26

General reading and useful reference works M. H. Abrams, The Mirror and the Lamp: Romantic Theory and the Critical Tradition (1953) Walter Jackson Bate, From Classic to Romantic: Premises of Taste in Eighteenth-Century England (1946) Marilyn Butler, Romantics, Rebels and Reactionaries: English Literature and Its Background 17601830 (1981) William Doyle, The French Revolution: A Very Short Introduction (2001) David Fairer, English Poetry of the Eighteenth Century (2003) Christine Gerrard (ed.), A Companion to Eighteenth-Century Poetry (Blackwell, 2006). Marilyn Gaull, English Romanticism: The Human Context (1988) Paul Langford, A Polite and Commercial People: England 1727-83 (Oxford University Press, 1989) Iain McCalman, ed., An Oxford Companion to the Romantic Age: British Culture 1776-1832 (1999) Seamus Perry, Coleridge and The Uses of Division (1999) Claude Rawson, Satire and Sentiment, 1660-1830: Stress Points in the English Augustan Tradition (2000) James Sambrook, The Eighteenth Century: The Intellectual and Cultural Context (1993) W. A. Speck, Literature and Society in Eighteenth-Century England: Ideology, Politics and Culture, 1680-1820 (1998) David Womersley ed., A Companion to Literature from Milton to Blake (Blackwell, 2000) Duncan Wu., ed., A Companion to Romanticism (1999) Hilary Term B Course (Dr Nicholas Halmi) Week 1: Printed ephemera and miscellanies Graham Hudson, The Design and Printing of Ephemera in Britain and America 1720– 1920, (London: British Library) Samuel Johnson, ‗An account of this undertaking‘, in Proposals for printing, by subscription, The Harleian miscellany: or, a collection of scarce, curious, and entertaining tracts and pamphlets found in the late Earl of Oxford's library. Interspersed with historical, political, and critical notes. (London, 1743); ‗An Account of the Harleian Library‘ in Proposals for printing by subscription the two first volumes of Bibliotheca Harleiana, (London: 1742); and ‗Introduction‘ to The Harleian miscellany, (London: Printed for T. Osborne 1744-1746), (also known as ‗An essay on the origin and importance of small tracts and fugitive pieces‘) [all reprinted in Samuel Johnson: The Major Works (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2008)] John Johnson Collection (Bodleian): johnjohnson.chadwyck.co.uk/home.do Evian Collection of theatrical ephemera (BL): www.bl.uk/catalogues/evanion/ Bodleian Broadside Ballads: www.bodley.ox.ac.uk/ballads/ Digital Miscellanies Index: digitalmiscellaniesindex.blogspot.com

27

Philip Connell, ‗Bibliomania: Book Collecting, Cultural Politics, and the Rise of Literary Heritage in Romantic Britain‘, Representations, 71 (2000), 24–47 Week 2: Eighteenth-century collecting and editing from oral sources Joseph Addison, The Spectator nos. 70 (21 May 1711) and 85 (7 June 1711) James Macpherson, ‗A Dissertation Concerning the Antiquity, &c. of the Poems of Ossian the Son of Fingal‘, in The Works of Ossian, The Son of Fingal, translated from the Gaelic by James Macpherson, 2 vols. (London, 1765) [ECCO, reprinted in The Poems of Ossian and Related Works, ed. Howard Gaskill, with an Introduction by Fiona Stafford (Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press, 1996), 39–52] Thomas Percy, ‗Dedication‘, ‗Preface‘, and ‗An Essay on the Ancient English Minstrels‘, in Reliques of Ancient English Poetry: Consisting of Old Heroic Ballads, Songs, and other Pieces of our earlier Poets, (Chiefly of the Lyric kind.) Together with some few of later Date (London,1765), i, pp. i–xxiii [ECCO] Week 3: Eighteenth-century editing of Shakespeare Alexander Pope, preface to The Works of Shakespear: In Six Volumes, Collated and Corrected by the Former Editions by Mr. Pope, (London, 1723–5), reprinted in David Womersley (ed.), Augustan Critical Writing (London: Penguin, 1997), 265–78 Lewis Theobald, preface to The Works of Shakespeare in seven volumes, (London: Printed for A. Bettesworth and C. Hitch, 1733) reprinted in Womersley, Augustan Critical Writing, 279–302 David Mallet, Of verbal criticism: An epistle to Mr. Pope, (London, 1733), reprinted in Womersley, Augustan Critical Writing 2 Samuel Johnson, Mr. Johnson's preface to his edition of Shakespear's plays. (London, 1765), reprinted in Samuel Johnson: The Major Works (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2008) Simon Jarvis, Scholars and Gentlemen: Shakespearean Textual Criticism and Representations of Scholarly Labour, 1725–1765 (Oxford: Clarendon, 1995) Week 4: Scholarly editing of manuscripts Alexander Pope, ‗An Essay on Criticism‘, in Pastoral Poetry and an Essay on Criticism, ed. E. Audra and Aubrey Williams (London: Methuen, 1961), 195–326 R. M. Schmitz, Pope‟s Essay on Criticism 1709: A Study of the Bodleian Manuscript Text, with Facsimiles, Transcripts, and Variants (St Louis: Washington University Press, 1962) ‗―The Last and Greatest Art‖: Pope‘s Poetical Manuscripts‘: Section V, Part ii of Maynard Mack, Collected in Himself: Essays Critical, Biographical, and Bibliographical on Pope and Some of His Contemporaries (Newark: University of Delaware Press, 1982), 322–47 Percy Bysshe Shelley, ‗Adonais‘ and ‗A Defence of Poetry‘ in Shelley‟s Poetry and Prose, ed. by Donald H. Reiman and Neil Fraistat, 2nd edn (New York: Norton, 2001), 407–27 and 509–35 Donald H. Reiman, Shelley‟s Last Notebook: Bodleian MS. Shelley adds. e. 20 (New York: Garland, 1990), (volume VII of The Bodleian Shelley Manuscripts: A Facsimile Edition, with Full Transcriptions and Scholarly Apparatus), 83–378 Donald H. Reiman, ‗Shelley‘s manuscripts and the web of circumstance‘, in Romantic Revisions, ed. by Robert Brinkley and Keith Hanley (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1992), 227–42 Week 5: Competing models of modern scholarly editing Fredson Bowers, ‗Current Theories of Copy-Text, with an illustration from Dryden‘, Modem Philology, 68 (1950), 19–36; Bowers, ‗Multiple Authority: New Problems and Concepts of Copy-Text‘, The Library, 27 (1972), 81–115

28

G. Thomas Tanselle, ‗Textua1 lnstability and Editorial Idealism‘, Studies in Bibliography, 49 (1996), 1– 60 S. M. Parrish, ‗The Whig Interpretation of Literature‘, Text, 4 (1988), 343–50 Donald Reiman, ‗Versioning: The Presentation of Multiple Texts‘ and ‗The Four Ages of Editing and the English Romantics‘, in Romantic Texts and Contexts (Columbia: U of Missouri Press, 1987), 167– 80, 85–108 Jack Stillinger, "A Practical Theory of Versions," in Coleridge & Textual Instability: The Multiple Versions of Major Poems (Oxford: Oxford UP, 1994), 118–41 J. C. C. Mays, ‗Editing Coleridge in the Historical Present‘, Text, 8 (1995), 217–37 Louis Hay, ‗Genetic Editing, Past and Future: A Few Reflections by a User‘, Text, 3 (1987), 117–33 Week 6: Hypertextual editing Marilyn Deegan and Kathryn Sutherland (eds.), Text Editing, Print and the Digital World (Farnham: Ashgate, 2009) George Landow, Hypertext: The Convergence of Contemporary Theory and Technology (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1992) 3 Edward Vanhoutte, ‗Electronic Textual Editing: Prose Fiction and Modern Manuscripts: Limitations and Possibilities of Text-Encoding for Electronic Editions‘, Text Encoding Initiative Peter Shillingsburg, From Gutenberg to Google: Electronic Representations of Literary Texts (Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 2006) Susan Schreibman, Ray Siemens, and John Unsworth (eds.), A Companion to Digital Humanities (Oxford: Blackwell, 2004), in which see esp. Kenneth Price, ‗Electronic Scholarly Editions‘ [also available online: www.digitalhumanities.org/companionDLS/] Jane Austen‟s Fiction Manuscripts: www.janeausten.ac.uk/index.html The Newton Project: www.newtonproject.sussex.ac.uk Supernumerary class(es) for discussion of course essay projects

29

M.ST. IN ENGLISH LITERATURE, 1800-1914 Convenors: Professor Stephen Gill, Lincoln College: [email protected] Dr Stefano Evangelista, Trinity College: [email protected] A-Course (Professor Stephen Gill and Dr Stefano Evangelista) The seminars will focus on only a few of the following texts, but the expectation will be that you will have read them all, ideally before the term begins, but certainly by its end. Further reading will be assigned for each seminar. In each session, students will be asked to give presentations on the texts in bold. Primary Texts Week 1: Poetic Identities Wordsworth, The Prelude (1805 version), Preface to Lyrical Ballads, ‗Resolution and Independence‘. Keats, ‗Sleep and Poetry‘, The Fall of Hyperion, as many of Keats‘s letters as possible. Shelley, Defence of Poetry. Coleridge, Biographia Literaria. Carlyle, ‗The Hero as Man of Letters‘. Arnold, Preface to Poems (1853). Week 2: Lives in Writing Wordsworth, The Prelude. Shelley, Alastor. Scott, Waverley. Ruskin, ‗The Two Boyhoods‘, from Modern Painters. Elizabeth Gaskell, The Life of Charlotte Brontë. Dickens, Great Expectations. Oscar Wilde, De Profundis. Week 3: Becoming a Heroine Austen, Northanger Abbey, Emma, Persuasion. Eliot, The Mill on the Floss. Thackeray, Vanity Fair. James, The Portrait of a Lady. Hardy, Tess of the D‟Urbervilles. Week 4: The Marriage Plot Austen, Pride and Prejudice. C. Bronte, Jane Eyre. Eliot, Middlemarch. Hardy, The Woodlanders, Jude the Obscure. Wells, Ann Veronica. Wilde, The Importance of Being Earnest. Week 5: Spiritual Quest Wordsworth, Lines . . . Tintern Abbey, Ode: Intimations of Immortality. Coleridge, This Lime Tree Bower My Prison, Hymn in the Vale of Chamounix. Shelley, Mont Blanc. Keats, letter about ‗soulmaking‘, 14 Feb.-3 May 1819. Tennyson, In Memoriam. Arnold, Dover Beach, Stanzas from the Grande Chartreuse, The Scholar Gypsy. Hopkins, Sonnets, The Wreck of the Deutschland. Week 6: National, Transnational, Global Walter Scott, Waverley. Dickens, Bleak House. Gaskell, North and South. Eliot, Daniel Deronda. E.M. Forster, Howards End. Week 7: Past and Present George Eliot, Romola. Ruskin, ‗The Nature of Gothic‘ in The Stones of Venice. Swinburne, ‗Anactoria‘, ‗Hymn to Proserpine‘, ‗The Garden of Proserpine‘, ‗Itylus‘, ‗The Leper‘, (all in Poems and Ballads, First Series). Walter Pater, Marius the Epicurean. William Morris, News from Nowhere.

30

Week 8: Text, Art, Object Wordsworth, ‗Upon the Sight of a Beautiful Picture‘. Keats, ‗On Seeing the Elgin Marbles‘, ‗Ode on a Grecian Urn‘. Shelley, ‗On the Medusa of Leonardo da Vinci in the Uffizi‘. Walter Pater, The Renaissance [especially the ‗Preface‘, ‗Leonardo‘, ‗Botticelli‘]. D.G. Rossetti, Sonnets for Pictures. Hawthorne, The Marble Faun. Henry James, Roderick Hudson. Du Maurier, Trilby. Hilary Term B-Course (Dr Giles Bergel) 1. Ephemera and cheap print (Giles Bergel) 2. The Serial Revolution (Clive Hurst) 3. Surveying the Field: Wordsworth in Print (Stephen Gill) 4. Presenting Print and Its Meanings (Seamus Perry) 5. Dickens' Manuscript Revisions (Daniel Tyler) 6. Reading Practices (Helen Small) Graduates will also make presentations on their essay topics: we will meet in 8th Week of Michaelmas to schedule these and to review the essay guidelines.

31

M.ST. IN ENGLISH LITERATURE, 1900-PRESENT Conveners: Dr Michael Whitworth, Merton College: [email protected] Dr Kirsten Shepherd-Barr, St Catherine‘s: [email protected] A-Coruse: Literature, Contexts, and Approaches, 1900-present (Dr Michael Whitworth and Dr Kirsten Shepherd-Barr) This course will explore significant texts, themes and critical approaches in our period, drawing on Faculty expertise. You should read as much in the bibliography over the summer—certainly the primary literary texts listed in the seminar reading for each week. Each week two or more members of the group will present papers based on the material. The allocation of presenters will be made at the meeting in week 0. Week 1: Models of Modernity (Dr Michael Whitworth and Dr Kirsten Shepherd-Barr) How can we tell the story of literature from 1900 to the present? The nature of the overview will vary according to which authors, which literatures, and which modes of writing. This seminar, without pretending to offer a complete picture, will consider three influential accounts of modernity. Seminar reading Perry Anderson, ‗Modernity and Revolution.‘ New Left Review, 144 (1984), 96-113. Rita Felski, ‗Modernism and Modernity: Engendering Literary History‘, in Lisa Rado, ed., Rereading Modernism (New York: Garland, 1994), 191-208 Friedman, Susan Stanford. ‗Definitional Excursions: The Meanings of Modern/ Modernity/ Modernism‘, Modernism / Modernity, 8 (2001), 493-513 Copies of these texts will be distributed at the meeting in week 0, but if you can obtain them before the start of term, please read them. Week 2: Formalisms vs Historicisms (Dr Susan Jones) Seminar reading Joseph Conrad, Heart of Darkness (1902) Rita Felski, ‗Context Stinks!‘, Context? special issue of New Literary History, 42 (2011), 573-91 Marjorie Levenson, ‗What is New Formalism?‘, PMLA, 122 (2007), 558-69 Herbert F. Tucker, ‗Introduction‘, Context? special issue of New Literary History, 42 (2011), vii-xii Further reading Tzvetan Todorov, ‗Connaissance du vide: Coeur des ténèbres‘, Les Genres du discours (Paris: Seuil, 1978), 161-73 Gérard Genette, Narrative Discourse: An Essay in Method, trans. by Jane E. Lewin (Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press, 1980), 88-121 Paul Ricoeur, Time and Narrative, vol. 1 (Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press, 1984), chapter 1 Peter Brooks, Reading for the Plot: Design and Intention in Narrative (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1984), 238-63 32

Jeremy Hawthorn, Joseph Conrad: Narrative Technique and Ideological Commitment (London: Arnold, 1990), 171-202 Michael Greaney, Conrad, Language, and Narrative (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2002), 57-76 Marianna Torgovnik, Gone Primitive: Savage Intellects, Modern Lives (Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press, 1990), 161-73 Week 3: Modernist Narrative (Ms Jeri Johnson) Seminar reading James Joyce, Ulysses (1922) Virginia Woolf, Mrs Dalloway (1925) Week 4: Literature and Visual Culture (Professor Laura Marcus) Is modern culture a visual culture? If so, whose gaze does it privilege? In this seminar we‘ll discuss some of the classic theoretical texts in visual culture studies in order to interrogate the association of modernity with the visual, the gendering of the gaze, and the impact of technological change. In the presentations and a case study of Woolf‘s To the Lighthouse, we‘ll think about how literary texts are embedded in visual cultures and how they can depict and critique those cultures. Seminar reading Virginia Woolf, To the Lighthouse (1927) Arjun Appadurai, Modernity at Large: Cultural Dimensions of Globalization (Minneapolis, MN: University of Minnesota Press, 1996), chapter one: ‗Here and Now‘ Walter Benjamin, ‗The Work of Art in the Age of Mechanical Reproduction‘, in Illuminations, ed. by Hannah Arendt, trans. by Harry Zone (London: Pimlico, 1999), 211–44 Michel Foucault, ‗The Eye of Power‘, in Power/ Knowledge: Selected Interviews and Other Writings, 1972-1977, ed. by Colin Gordon (Brighton: Harvester Press, 1980), pp. 146-65 W.J.T. Mitchell, ‗Showing Seeing: A Critique of Visual Culture‘, Journal of Visual Culture, 1.2 (2002), 165-81 Laura Mulvey, ‗Visual Pleasure and Narrative Cinema‘, Screen, 16.3 (1975), 6-18 Further reading John Berger, Ways of Seeing (Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1972) Norman Bryson, Michael Ann Holly and Keith Moxey, eds, Visual Culture: Images and Interpretations (Hanover, NH: University Press of New England, 1994) Jonathan Crary, Techniques of the Observer: On Vision and Modernity in the Nineteenth Century (Cambridge, MA: MIT Press) Guy Debord, The Society of the Spectacle (New York: Zone Books, 1994) Hal Foster ed., Vision and Visuality (Seattle, WA: Bay View Press/ Dia Art Foundation, 1988) Martin Jay, Downcast Eyes: The Denigration of Vision in Twentieth-Century French Thought (Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press, 1993) 33

Nicholas Mirzoeff, ed., The Visual Culture Reader, 2nd edn (London: Routledge, 2002) W.J.T. Mitchell, Iconology: Image, Text, Ideology (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1986) Jacqueline Rose, Sexuality in the Field of Vision (London: Verso, 1986) ‗Visual Culture Questionnaire‘, October, 77 (1996), 25-70 Week 5: Theatre and Revolution (Dr Kirsten Shepherd-Barr) This session explores what constitutes a theatrical revolution. We will consider the impact of realism and naturalism in the 1880s and 1890s as important forerunners to theatrical innovations in the twentieth century, asking how these were revolutionary then and and how they are critically understood now. We will take three plays as case studies and look at how the initial responses to them compare with later critical assessments and analyses, for instance in the different perspectives on ‗1956 and all that‘. We will also think about methodological challenges inherent in studying theatrical revolution, such the approach of reconstructing past performances and the need to take full account of the dual nature of theatre as both text and performance. Seminar reading Samuel Beckett, Waiting for Godot (1955) Sarah Kane, Blasted (1995) John Osborne, Look Back in Anger (1956) You will also be given copies of some of the initial reviews of the three plays. Further reading John Russell Taylor, Anger and After: A Guide to the New British Drama (London: Methuen1962), introduction, chapters 1-2 Christopher Innes, Modern British Drama 1890-1990 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1992), pp. 98-112 Graham Saunders, “Love Me or Kill Me”: Sarah Kane and the Theatre of Extremes (Manchester: Manchester University Press, 2002), pp. 1-70 Dan Rebellato, 1956 and All That: The Making of Modern British Drama (London: Routledge, 1999), pp. 1-36, and the rest of book if you have time. For further theatrical context see Michael Billington, State of the Nation (London: Faber, 2007) Week 6: Mapping Poetry Post-1900 (Dr Michael Whitworth) This session seeks to identify the main ways in which critics have attempted to distinguish different kinds of poetry. It attempts to move beyond the division into movements or schools (Imagists, NeoRomantics, The Movement, Martians, etc.) and into other criteria, though inevitably partisan affiliations surface in some of the texts. Seminar reading Ken Edwards, ‗The Two Poetries‘, Angelaki, 5 (2000), 25-37 Edward Larrissy, ‗Things, Description, and Metaphor in Contemporary British and Irish Poetry‘, Yearbook of English Studies, 17 (1987), 218-33.

34

Marjorie Perloff, ‗Pound/Stevens: Whose Era?‘, New Literary History, 13 (1982), 485-506 Michael Roberts, ‗Introduction‘, The Faber Book of Modern Verse (London: Faber, 1936) Further reading T. S. Eliot, ‗Tradition and the Individual Talent‗ (1919), widely anthologized, e.g. Modernism, ed. Lawrence Rainey (Oxford: Blackwell, 2005) Week 7: The Ethics of Reading (Dr Patrick Hayes) This seminar will consider some of the different ways of conceptualising the relationship between literature and ethics that have emerged over the last twenty years as part of the many-sided ‗ethical turn‘ in literary theory. It will explore the relationship between concepts in ethics and practices of reading, and the extent to which it is meaningful to generalise about the category of literature in relation to a philosophical discourse on ethics. Seminar reading J.M. Coetzee, Foe (1986) Charles Alteri, ‗Lyrical Ethics and Literary Experience‘, in Todd F. Davis and Kenneth Womack, eds, Mapping the Ethical Turn: A Reader in Ethics, Culture, and Literary Theory (Charlottesville, VA: University of Virginia Press, 2001) Simon Critchley, ‗The Ethics of Deconstruction: the Argument‘, chapter 1 in The Ethics of Deconstruction: Derrida and Levinas, 2nd edn (West Lafayette, IN: Purdue University Press, 1999) Julia Kristeva, ‗Might Not Universality Be…Our Own Foreignness?‘, chapter 8 in Strangers to Ourselves (1988), trans. by Leon S. Roudiez (New York: Columbia University Press, 1991) Martha C. Nussbaum, ‗Perceptive Equilibrium: Literary Theory and Ethical Theory‘, chapter 6 in Love‟s Knowledge: Essays on Philosophy and Literature (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1990) Richard Rorty, ‗Private Irony and Liberal Hope‘, chapter 4 in Contingency, Irony and Solidarity (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1989) Further reading Charles Altieri, The Particulars of Rapture: An Aesthetics of the Affects (Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press, 2003) Lawrence Buell, ed., Ethics and Literary Study, special issue of PMLA, 114 (1999) Zygmunt Bauman, Postmodern Ethics (Oxford: Blackwell, 1993) Wayne C. Booth, The Company We Keep: An Ethics of Fiction (Berkeley and Los Angeles, University of California Press, 1988) Robert Eaglestone, Ethical Criticism: Reading After Levinas (Edinburgh: University of Edinburgh Press, 1997) Terry Eagleton, The Trouble with Strangers: A Study of Ethics (Oxford: Wiley Blackwell, 2009) Michel Foucault, The Use of Pleasure (1984), trans. by Robert Hurley (London: Penguin, 1985)

35

Marjorie Garber, Beatrice Hanssen,and Rebecca L. Walkowitz, eds, The Turn to Ethics (London: Routledge, 2000) Gerald Graff, Literature Against Itself: Literary Ideas in Modern Society, 2nd edn (Chicago, IL: Dee, 1995) Adam Kirsch, Why Trilling Matters (New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 2011) J. Hillis Miller, The Ethics of Reading (New York: Columbia University Press, 1987) Martha C. Nussbaum, Upheavals of Thought: The Intelligence of the Emotions (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2001) David Parker, Ethics, Theory and the Novel (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1994) Week 8: The Transnational (Dr Ankhi Mukherjee) Seminar reading Salman Rushdie, The Satanic Verses (1988) Further reading Further reading will be provided at the beginning of term. Hilary Term B-Course (Dr Michael Whitworth) This course continues the work you began last term by turning to issues in thinking about issues of bibliography, book history and textual scholarship in twentieth and twenty-first century contexts. It will be taught in two-hour seminars twice a week during the first three weeks of the term. Reading for the seminars will be distributed in advance. In the second half of the seminars, students will deliver short talks on their B course essay. Faith Binckes, ‗Researching Literary Periodicals‘ Giles Bergel, ‗Ephemerality and the Material Text: Remediation and Loss‘ Michael Whitworth, ‗Reading Paratexts‘ Hannah Sullivan, ‗How Texts Come to Be‘ Peter McDonald, ‗Censorship and the Twentieth-Century Book: A Comparative Approach‘ Lloyd Pratt, ‗Constituting Communities: Book History in the United States‘

36

M.ST. IN ENGLISH AND AMERICAN STUDIES Convenors: Professor Ron Bush, St John‘s College: [email protected] Professor Lloyd Pratt, Linacre College: [email protected] There is no set A-Course for michaelmas term because students are expected to fulfill the 'English' side of the course by taking an A-Course in English literature, and students are therefore asked to select the period strand A-Course from those listed above that interests them the most or that they feel would be most relevant for their future research. Likewise if students wish to take a B-Course, they should choose a B-Course from below and the individual course entries. It should also be noted that a number of C-Courses treat materials in both english and american literature, and are in effect to be regarded as cross-listed in both the english and American strands. In Hilary term, the American core C-Course option is compulsory. If students do not wish to take a B-Course option, they should choose 4 C-Course options (one of which must be the Hilary term American core course). They will be examined on 3 of these 4 courses. For studens in the English and American strand, the principal subject of the MSt thesis must be an American writer.

37

M.ST. IN ENGLISH LANGUAGE Convenors: Professor Deborah Cameron, Worcester College: [email protected] Professor Lynda Mugglestone, Pembroke College: [email protected] A-Course: Topics in English Language: History, Structure and Use A note on reading: it is not expected that all the references listed for each session will be read by every student. Priority should be given to references marked as required reading (with asterisks); you are advised to begin your reading preparation before you arrive in Oxford. Fuller lists are provided to enable you to pursue particular interests, both on this A-course (where you may be asked to give a presentation on a specific topic) and for B or C-course assignments to which the readings listed may be relevant. Some Preparatory Reading Suggestions Introductions to the structure, history and sociolinguistics of English Ashby, P, Speech Sounds (Routledge Language Workbooks, 2005) Kuiper, K and WS Allan, An Introduction to English Language: Word, Sound and Sentence (PalgraveMacmillan 2010) Sergeant, P and Swann, J (eds) English in the World: History, Diversity and Change (Routledge 2011) Useful preparation for the Michaelmas core courses McEnery, A., R. Xiao and Y. Tono, Corpus-based Language Studies: An Advanced Resource Book (Routledge, 2005) McMahon, A. Understanding Language Change (Cambridge UP, 1994) Milroy, J and L Milroy, Authority in Language (Routledge 2012) Smith, J. J. An Historical Study of English: Function, Form and Change (Routledge, 1996) Reference: Crystal, D (ed) The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the English Language (CUP, 2003) Michaelmas Term: Topics in the history of English (Professor Simon Horobin and Professor Lynda Mugglestone) Required reading Horobin, S. and J. Smith (2002), An Introduction to Middle English (Edinburgh, EUP) Smith, J. J. (2009), Old English: A Linguistic Introduction (Cambridge: CUP) Also useful Blake, N.F., ed. (1992), The Cambridge History of the English Language Volume II (Cambridge: CUP) [CHEL II] Görlach, M. (1994), The Linguistic History of English (Basingstoke: Palgrave) Hogg, R. (1992), A Grammar of Old English: Phonology (Oxford: Blackwell) Hogg, R, ed. (1992), The Cambridge History of the English Language Volume I (Cambridge: CUP) [CHEL I]

38

Lass, R. (1997), Historical Linguistics and Language Change (Cambridge: CUP) ----- (1994), Old English: A Historical Linguistic Companion (Cambridge: CUP) McMahon, A. (1994), Understanding Language Change (Cambridge: CUP) Momma, H. and M. Matto, eds (2008), A Companion to the History of the English Language (Oxford: Blackwell) Mugglestone, L. ed. (2006), The Oxford History of English (Oxford: OUP) Samuels, M.L. (1972), Linguistic Evolution with special reference to English (Cambridge: CUP) Smith, J. J. (2007), Sound Change and the History of English (Oxford: OUP) Smith, J. J. (1996), An Historical Study of English: Function, Form and Change (London: Routledge) Week 1: Change in Writing Systems The nature of writing systems and the relationship between speech and writing; the origins of the alphabet and its adoption for writing English in the Middle Ages; dialect and standardisation in the history of English spelling. Required reading CHEL vols I and II, ‗Old English Dialects‘ and ‗Middle English Dialectology‘. Cook, V., (2004), The English Writing System (London: Hodder), chapter 1. Scragg, D.G. (1974), A History of English Spelling (Manchester: Manchester UP). Smith, J. J. (1996), An Historical Study of English: Function, Form and Change (London: Routledge), chapter 4. Week 2: Change in the Sound System Theories of sound change; problems of evidence; sound changes in Old and Middle English. Required reading CHEL vols. I and II, ‗Phonology and Morphology‘. McMahon, A. (1994), Understanding Language Change (Cambridge: CUP), chapters 2 and 3. Smith, J. J. (2007), Sound Change and the History of English (Oxford: OUP), chapters 1 and 2. Smith, J. J. (1996), An Historical Study of English: Function, Form and Change (London: Routledge), chapter 5. Week 3: Change in the Lexicon Inheritance, Borrowing, Word Formation, Semantic Change. Required reading CHEL vols. I and II, ‗Semantics and Vocabulary‘. Durkin, P (2009), The Oxford Guide to Etymology (Oxford: OUP) Hughes, G (2000), A History of English Words (Oxford: Blackwell) McMahon, A (1994), Understanding Language Change (Cambridge: CUP), chapter 7.

39

Smith, J. J. (2006), An Historical Study of English: Function, Form and Change (London: Routledge), chapter 6. Week 4: Writing Early Modern English This week will explore the changing identity of English in the early Modern period, looking at aspects of linguistic self-consciousness (spelling reform, lexical purism) as well as identifiable patterns of linguistic change and variation. It will focus, in particular, on the perceived need to translate or rewrite earlier works into an English now seen as markedly different. Such translations through time enable detailed consideration of the nature of early Modern English, and the patterns of both gain and loss in evidence since late ME. You should try and read extensively in at least three of the core text books before you arrive. John Dryden, Fables, Ancient and Modern (London, 1700) Colville, George, The Boke of Boecius. (London, 1556) Benson, L. (ed.) The Riverside Chaucer. Core text books Barber, Charles. (1997) Early Modern English (Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press). Gorlach, Manfred. (1991). Introduction to Early Modern English (Cambridge; Cambridge University Press). Nevalainen, Terttu (2006). An Introduction to Early Modern English. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press. ---- ‗Early Modern English‘, in Mugglestone, L. (ed.) (2012), The Oxford History of English. Lass, Roger (ed). The Cambridge History of the English Language 1476-1776. Vol. 3 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1999) Week 5: Change and anxiety: prescriptive and descriptive approaches This week will focus on the eighteenth century, and in particular on the rise of reference books, a new generic designation which emerges at the close of this period. It will examine the backdrop of anxieties about change, variation, and standardization, looking at language attitudes in contemporary writings on phonology, lexis, grammar, and morphology, via the works of writers such as Jonathan Swift, Thomas Sheridan, Samuel Johnson, and Robert Lowth. You should try and read extensively in the texts marked by * before you arrive. *Tieken Boon von Ostade, Ingrid (2009). An Introduction to Late Modern English (Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press). *Beal, Joan C. (2004). English in Modern Times 1700-1945 (London: Arnold) *Goerlach, Manfred (2001). Eighteenth-Century English (Cambridge; Cambridge University Press) * Hickey, Raymond (2010) (ed.) Eighteenth-Century English Ideology and Change (Cambridge: CUP) Kolb, G. and De Maria, R. (2005). Johnson on the English Language. The Yale Edition of the Works of Samuel Johnson XVIII (New Haven: Yale University Press). Leonard, S. (1962). The Doctrine of Correctness in English Usage, 1700-1800 (New York: Russell and Russell).

40

Tieken-Boon van Ostade, I.M. (2011) The Bishop‟s Grammar. Robert Lowth and the Rise of Prescriptivism (Oxford: OUP). Week 6: Standards and standardization This week will explore the complex nature of modern ‗standard English‘, using a range of approaches, and examining in detail the reality of language practice across a range of registers, both private and public, and in script, print, as well as in electronic discourses. It will focus, in particular, on the evidence of on-going change and variability, and at how we might determine exactly what ‗standard English‘ is. [Works marked with asterisks should be read before the start of the course] *Milroy, J and Milroy, L. (2012). Authority in language: Investigating Standard English (Milton Park: Routledge). * Bex, T. and J. Watts (eds.) (1999) Standard English. The Widening Debate (London: Routledge) Bex, T. (1996). Variety in Written English; Texts in Society, Society in Text (London: Routledge). Crowley, T. (2003) Standard English and the Politics of Language. Honey, J. (1997). Language is Power. The Story of Standard English and its Enemies (London: Faber & Faber). * Baron, N. (2001). Alphabet to Email. How Written English Evolved and Where It‟s Heading (London: Routledge). --- (2008). Always On: Language in an Online and Mobile World (New York: Oxford University Press). *Crystal, D. (2001) Language and the Internet (Cambridge: CUP) --- (2006). The Fight for English: How Language Pundits Ate, Shot and Left (Oxford: OUP). Hilary Term: Topics in the Structure of English (Dr Susanne Wagner) This series of seminars will consider how contemporary conditions affect the structure and use of the English language. Students will be familiarised with the most important debates and broad issues in this area by looking at some exemplary features, all of which illustrate current trends: while there is a strong tendency to reduce contrasts in some systems/areas/speech communities (e.g. through levelling, analogical extension, regularisation etc.), just the opposite is the case in others (glocalisation, issues of identity, group membership). These trends constitute a paradox – or do they? When would they? Key areas to be discussed include the position of English both as a European and world language, the different types of impact globalization has (had), the role of mobility and migration and the contested role of media influence. General/introductory reading *Foulkes, Paul & Gerard Docherty. 1999. Urban Voices. Hodder/Arnold. *Leech, Geoffrey, Marianne Hundt, Christian Mair, and Nicholas Smith. 2009. Change in Contemporary English: A Grammatical Study. Cambridge: Cambridge UP. If you are unfamiliar with typology you may find one of the following useful: Comrie, Bernard. 1989. Language Typology & Linguistic Universals. Chicago UP. Croft, William. 2002. Typology & Universals. 2nd ed. Cambridge UP.

41

Weeks 1-2: Modern English as a European language—the areal-typological perspective In the first seminar, we will adopt a bird‘s eye view on English, using an areal-typological perspective. We will discuss how far English is typical or untypical both more generally, i.e. as a language as such, and more concretely in a (Western) European context. Whorf‘s concept of Standard Average European will figure prominently in this context. We will concentrate on one or two linguistic subsystems (e.g. pronouns, relative clauses) which will also serve as the basis for a more hands-on discussion in week 2. For the second seminar, students will be asked to look at a concrete manifestation of the issues discussed more abstractly in week one. With the help of corpora, students will work on one of the areas identified as particularly relevant from an areal-typological perspective, and present their findings, illustrated with authentic language data. Reading *Croft, William. 2001. Typology. In Aronoff, Mark & Janie Rees-Miller (eds.). The Handbook of Linguistics. Oxford: Blackwell, 337–368. *Bisang, W. 2006. Contact-induced convergence: Typology & areality. In K. Brown (ed.), Encyclopedia of Language & Linguistics (Second Edition). Elsevier, 88-101. DOI 10.1016/B0-08044854-2/00217-0. *Haspelmath, Martin. 2001. The European linguistic area: Standard Average European. In Haspelmath et al. (eds.). Language Typology and Language Universals. HSK 20.2. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, 1492–1510. DOI 10.1515/9783110171549.2.14.1492 *Haspelmath, Martin. 1998. How young is Standard Average European? Language Sciences 20: 271287. Stolz, T. 2006. Europe as a linguistic area. In K. Brown (ed.), Encyclopedia of Language & Linguistics (Second Edition). Elsevier, 278-295. DOI 10.1016/B0-08-044854-2/00216-9. Weeks 3-4: Changes in Modern English: Levelling v. Diversification It used to be commonplace to find both experts and laypeople painting a bleak picture of the future of regional varieties. Ever since WW2, which is associated with a dramatic increase in (geographical) mobility, it was assumed that regional differences would be slowly reduced and ultimately lost. Multiple studies have shown that this is in fact the case for many traditional regional features. However, this is not the whole story – more recent work shows a very complex pattern of loss and innovation, conditioned by a multitude of complex, often interacting factors. It is this apparent contradiction that we will focus on in two seminars. The first will look at one end of the ―continuum‖: where, why and how does levelling occur? The second will consider the other side of the coin. Examples such as Multicultural London English clearly show that new varieties are emerging as we speak. We will also look at similar developments outside the UK in this context. We will also critically evaluate traditional studies and their claims: Are older studies‘ findings still valid given what we know today? Reading *Britain, David, Phoenix from the ashes?: The death, contact and birth of dialects in England. Working Paper. Essex Research Reports in Linguistics, University of Essex, Colchester, UK, 2002. *Kerswill, Paul. 2003. Dialect levelling and geographical diffusion in British English. In D. Britain and J. Cheshire (eds.). Social Dialectology. In honour of Peter Trudgill. Amsterdam: Benjamins. 223-243. *Williams, Ann & Kerswill, Paul. 1999. Dialect levelling: change and continuity in Milton Keynes, Reading and Hull. In Paul Foulkes & Gerard Docherty (eds.). Urban voices. Accent studies in the British Isles. London: Arnold. 141– 162. 42

*Cheshire, J., Kerswill, P., Fox, S. and Torgersen, E. 2011. Contact, the feature pool and the speech community: the Emergence of Multicultural London English. Journal of Sociolinguistics 15/2: 151-196. Hultgren, A.K. (2011). ‗Building rapport‘ with customers across the world: The global diffusion of a call centre style. Journal of Sociolinguistics 15/1: 36-64. *Smith, J. and Durham, M. (2011). A tipping point in dialect obsolescence? Change across the generations in Lerwick, Shetland. Journal of Sociolinguistics 15/2: 197-225. Week 5: ‗The TV doesn‘t talk back‘. Media, genre, register and their role in spreading innovations in a globalizing world The influence of the media – traditionally through TV and film, nowadays also increasingly through social media – is a fiercely contested issue in linguistics. Researchers such as Jane Stuart-Smith have found evidence for links between media consumption and linguistic features, while others such as Peter Trudgill maintain that media cannot influence language – ―because the TV doesn‘t talk back‖. Is it really that simple? Or is it definitely that simple? We will discuss different studies and their contradictory findings, focussing on concrete issues such as whether speakers really adopt linguistic features from e.g. TV shows (or if media simply act as reinforcers) and whether the media play a role in what is known as the ―colloquialisation of English‖ (e.g. Hundt & Mair 1999, Leech et al. 2009). Reading *Stuart-Smith, Jane. 2012. English and the media: Television. In Bergs, A. & Brinton, J. (eds.). English Historical Linguistics. HSK 34.1. Berlin: de Gruyter, 1075-1088. DOI: 10.1515/9783110251593.1075. *Stuart-Smith, Jane. 2007. The influence of the media. In: Llamas, C. et al. (eds.) The Routledge. Companion to Sociolinguistics, 140-148. Chapters in English Historical Linguisitics. An International Handbook. Handbücher zur Sprach- und Kommunikationswissenschaft / Handbooks of Linguistics and Communication Science Vol. 34. Edited by Bergs, Alexander / Brinton, Laurel J. De Gruyter 2012. http://www.degruyter.com/view/serial/182226 1. ch. 67 by Fries on Newspapers 2. ch. 69 by Schwyter on Radio 3. ch. 70 by Heyd on the Internet *Hundt, M., & Ch. Mair. 1999. 'Agile' and 'uptight' genres: the corpus-based approach to languagechange in progress. International Journal of Corpus Linguistics 4: 221-242. *Biber, D. & V. Clark. 2002. Historical shifts in modification patterns with complex noun phrase structures. In Fanego, T. et al (eds.). English Historical Syntax and Morphology. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, 43-66. Leech, Geoffrey, Marianne Hundt, Christian Mair, and Nicholas Smith. 2009. Change in Contemporary English: A Grammatical Study. Cambridge: Cambridge UP. Week 6: Zooming in on current trends For the final seminar, students will be asked to read in depth about one specific topic/feature which illustrates one of the aspects discussed in the previous meetings and present an overview in class. The presentation focus should be on placing the chosen topic/feature within the system of innovation, change, levelling, diversification etc. as established in our previous meetings and discussions. Areas of particular interest include supra-regional (possibly global?) features such as quotative systems, intensifiers or tags on a discourse level, urban hierarchical features such as glottalisation, th-fronting,

43

interdental stopping or a major chain shift such as the Northern Cities Shift in the US on a phonological level, and many more options. B-Course: Research Skills Fundamentals of English (Professor Deborah Cameron and Dr Susanne Wagner) This course will be taught in weekly practical classes during Michaelmas Term, though independent study will also be required, especially where students have no previous experience of studying English linguistics. The course is intended to ensure that all students know the basics of English phonetics, phonology and grammar, are able to transcribe English using the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) and describe grammatical structures accurately in appropriate terminology. There will be a test of these skills in Week 8 which students are required to pass in order to proceed. Students who have already acquired the relevant skills in a previous course of study may elect to take a diagnostic test in Week 1: if they achieve a satisfactory mark they may request an exemption from this part of the B-course (though they will still be required to take and pass the end-of-term test, which is a compulsory element of the M.St). Course texts: Ashby, P. Speech Sounds (Routledge, 2005) Other reading and resources UCL Internet Grammar of English, http://www.ucl.ac.uk/internet-grammar/intro/intro.htm Crystal, D. Discover Grammar, Rediscover Grammar or Making Sense of Grammar (all fairly basic but may be useful if you have never studied English grammatical structure formally) Hurford, J. Grammar: A Student‟s Guide (CUP, 1994) Roach, P. English Phonetics and Phonology (CUP, 2009) Approaches to Research in English Language This course, taught in weekly 90-minute classes in Michaelmas and Hilary Terms, will introduce you to a series of approaches and methods which are used in research on the English Language. It aims not only to prepare you for the assignment you will do for the B-course and the research you will do for your final dissertation, but also to make you a better informed reader of the research articles and books you will read for the A and C courses. Most sessions will involve practical tasks, done individually or in small groups, as well as demonstrations and discussion. The schedule below contains lists of suggested readings for each session; it is not expected that students will have read every item, but a small number of readings each week may be required (they are marked with an asterisk). Two texts which will be used quite extensively, and which students may want to get hold of in advance, are: Johnstone, B., Qualitative Methods in Sociolinguistics (OUP, 2000) McEnery, A., R. Xiao and Y. Tono, Corpus-based Language Studies: An Advanced Resource Book (Routledge, 2005)

44

B-Course: Michaelmas Term (Note: all students must attend all sessions listed for this term) Preliminaries Week 1: Introduction: what is research in English Language? (Professor Deborah Cameron) This session will explore some general issues in English language research: what makes a good research question, what range of methods may be considered in designing studies, and what is involved in ensuring that research is conducted ethically. Suggested reading Johnstone, Qualitative Methods, ch. 3; Cameron, D., E. Frazer, P. Harvey, B. Rampton and K. Richardson, Researching Language (Routledge, 1992), Introduction. Week 2: Finding and using information sources (EFL) Using corpora to investigate English usage (Mr Martin Wynne and Dr Ylva Berglund Prytz) (Note: this will be taught in the Windrush Room at OUCS (the Computing Services building in Banbury Road) This 4-week block will introduce you to the methods of corpus linguistics, showing how these can be applied to questions about the structure and use of English. A number of English language corpora will be examined, and you will be able to undertake practical exercises using the British National Corpus. Week 3: Introduction to corpora In this session we start looking at how to use corpora for linguistic research. We will make corpus searches and collate the results. We will discuss issues related to corpus composition, representativeness, and how to represent and examine quantitative results. It is expected that students will be familiar with some basic concepts, outlined in McEnery, Xiao and Tono (2006): Units A1, A2, A3, A4.1-4.2 Reading (* marks required reading) * McEnery, A., R. Xiao and Y. Tono, Units A1, A2, A3, A4.1-4.2. McEnery, A., R. Xiao and Y. Tono, Unit A7 Hommerberg, C. and G. Tottie (2007). Try to or Try and? Verb complementation in British and American English. ICAME Journal 31: 45-64. http://icame.uib.no/ij31/ij31-page45-64.pdf Sinclair, J. (2005). ‗Corpus and Text: Basic Principles‘. In Developing linguistic corpora: a guide to good practice. M. Wynne (ed). Oxford, Oxbow Books: 1-16. http://ota.oucs.ox.ac.uk/documents/creating/dlc/chapter1.htm Week 4: Beyond simple frequencies In this session we will look at how to move beyond simple concordances and frequency comparisons. We will explore and discuss POS tagging and annotation and look at including linguistic and extralinguistic features in corpus searches.

45

Suggested reading Hoffmann, S., S. Evert, N. Smith, D. Lee, Y. Berglund Prytz (2008) Corpus linguistics with BNCweb: a practical Guide. Frankfurt; Oxford: Peter Lang * Hommerberg, C. and G. Tottie (2007). Try to or Try And? Verb Complementation in British and American English. ICAME Journal 31: 45-64. http://icame.uib.no/ij31/ij31-page45-64.pdf Leech, G. (2005). ‗Adding linguistic annotation‘. In Developing linguistic corpora: a guide to good practice. M. Wynne (ed). Oxford, Oxbow Books: 17-29. http://ota.oucs.ox.ac.uk/documents/creating/dlc/chapter2.htm * McEnery, A., R. Xiao and Y. Tono, Units B3-B6 Week 5: Working with spoken and historical data In this third session we will look at how to work with data that is not easily and readily available in corpus form with custom-made tools. We will discuss issues related to the creation and use of spoken and historical corpora and explore material with a stand-alone concordance program. Suggested reading * Corpus of Early English Correspondence http://www.helsinki.fi/varieng/domains/CEEC.html (Read the brief introduction to the corpora. If interested, follow links for further information) Davies, M. (forthcoming). Examining recent changes in English: some methodological issues. In: Nevalainen, T. and E. C. Traugott. Handbook of the history of English: rethinking and extending approaches and methods. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Preprint at http://corpus.byu.edu/filesoup/davies.doc * Meurman-Solin, A. (2001) ‗Structured Text Corpora in the Study of Language Variation and Change‘ Literary and Linguist Computing 16(1): 5-27 http://llc.oxfordjournals.org/content/16/1/5.full.pdf+html Hoffmann, S., S. Evert, N. Smith, D. Lee, Y. Berglund Prytz (2008) Corpus linguistics with BNCweb: a practical Guide. Frankfurt; Oxford: Peter Lang * Thompson, P. (2005) ‗Spoken Language Corpora‘. In Developing linguistic corpora: a guide to good practice. M. Wynne (ed). Oxford, Oxbow Books: http://ota.oucs.ox.ac.uk/documents/creating/dlc/chapter5.htm Week 6: Creating and analysing corpora In this final session we will move beyond simple searching and analysis of corpus data. We will look at statistical analyses of corpus data and explore questions relating to the creation and annotation of corpora. Depending on the needs of the students, we may also return to and engage further in issues from the first three sessions, and explore additional corpora and tools. Suggested reading * McEnery, A., R. Xiao and Y. Tono, Units A6, A8, A9. * Stubbs, M. (1995). Collocations and semantic profiles: on the cause of the trouble with quantitative studies. Functions of Language 2(1): 23-55 Wynne, M. (ed). (2005) Developing linguistic corpora: a guide to good practice. Oxford, Oxbow Books http://ota.oucs.ox.ac.uk/documents/creating/dlc/

46

Full reading list for this block (additional recommendations may be offered in the sessions) Anderson, W. and J. Corbett, Exploring English with On-Line Corpora: An Introduction (PalgraveMacmillan, 2009) Davies, M. et al (forthcoming) ‗Observing recent change through electronic corpora‘. To appear in Handbook of the History of English: Rethinking and Extending Approaches and Methods. Nevalainen, T. and E. C. Traugott, (eds). Oxford University Press, 2011 Preprints at http://davieslinguistics.byu.edu/oup-2011.htm Hoffmann, S., S. Evert, N. Smith, D. Lee, Y. Berglund Prytz (2008) Corpus linguistics with BNCweb: a practical Guide. Frankfurt; Oxford: Peter Lang Hommerberg, C. and G. Tottie (2007). Try to or Try And? Verb Complementation in British and American English. ICAME Journal 31: 45-64. http://icame.uib.no/ij31/ij31-page45-64.pdf Honkapohja, A., S. Kaislaniemi and V. Marttila. (2009). ‗Digital Editions for Corpus Linguistics: Representing manuscript reality in electronic corpora‘. In: Corpora: Pragmatics and Discourse. Jucker, A.H, D. Schreier and M. Hundt (eds.). Amsterdam/New York: Rodopi. Preprint: http://www.helsinki.fi/varieng/domains/DECL/DECL/ICAME29ProceedingsArticleSubmitted.pdf Leech, G. (2005). Adding linguistic annotation. In Developing linguistic corpora: a guide to good practice. M. Wynne (ed). Oxford, Oxbow Books: 17-29. http://ahds.ac.uk/linguistic-corpora/ McEnery, A., R. Xiao and Y. Tono, Corpus-based Language Studies: An Advanced Resource Book (Routledge, 2006). Meurman-Solin, A. (2001) ‗Structured Text Corpora in the Study of Language Variation and Change‘ Literary and Linguist Computing 16(1): 5-27 http://llc.oxfordjournals.org/content/16/1/5.full.pdf+html Nevalainen, T. and S. M. Fitzmaurice (eds). (2011). How to Deal with Data: Problems and Approaches to the Investigation of the English Language over Time and Space. Studies in Variation, Contacts and Change in English, Volume 7 http://www.helsinki.fi/varieng/journal/volumes/07/ Newman, J. (2008) ‗Spoken corpora: rationale and application‘ Taiwan Journal of Linguistics. 6.2 http://tjl.nccu.edu.tw/volume6-2/6.2-2%20Newman.pdf Stubbs, M. (1995). Collocations and semantic profiles: on the cause of the trouble with quantitative studies. Functions of Language 2(1): 23-55 Wynne, M. (ed). (2005) Developing linguistic corpora: a guide to good practice. Oxford, Oxbow Books http://ota.oucs.ox.ac.uk/documents/creating/dlc/ Xiao, R., and T. McEnery (2006). Collocation, Semantic Prosody, and near Synonymy: A CrossLinguistic Perspective. Applied Linguistics 27(1): 103-129. http://applij.oxfordjournals.org/cgi/content/full/27/1/103

B-Course: Hilary Term In HT students must choose ONE of the first two blocks listed below (they may attend both if they wish, but note that all participants will be expected to do the assigned work for the classes they attend), plus the final sessions on planning and writing research.

47

Approaches to research on the history of English (Professor Simon Horobin and Professor Lynda Mugglestone) Week 1: Mapping Middle English dialects The purpose of this session is to gain hands-on experience of using the principal resources for the study of Middle English dialects: the Linguistic Atlas of Late Mediaeval English and the Linguistic Atlas of Early Middle English. Suggested Reading Benskin, M., ‗The Fit-technique explained‘, in F. Riddy (ed.) Regionalism in Late Medieval Manuscripts and Texts (Cambridge, 1991), pp. 9-26 ------ ‗The letters <þ> and in later Middle English, and some related matters‘, Journal of the Society of Archivists 7 (1982), 13-30 Benskin, M. and M. Laing, ‗Translations and Mischsprachen in Middle English Manuscripts‘, in M. Benskin and M. L. Samuels (eds) So Meny People Longages and Tonges: Philological Essays in Scots and Mediaeval English presented to Angus McIntosh (Edinburgh, 1981), pp. 55-106 Laing, Margaret and Roger Lass (eds), A Linguistic Atlas of Early Middle English, 1150-1325 (Edinburgh 2007) [http://www.lel.ed.ac.uk/ihd/laeme1/laeme1.html] Laing, M. (ed.), Middle English Dialectology (Aberdeen, 1989) McIntosh, A., M.L. Samuels and M. Benskin (eds.), A Linguistic Atlas of Late Mediaeval English (Aberdeen, 1986), 4 vols Riddy, F. (ed.), Regionalism in Late Medieval Manuscripts and Texts: Essays celebrating the Publication of A Linguistic Atlas of Late Mediaeval English. (Cambridge, 1991) Smith, J.J. (ed.), The Language of Chaucer and his Contemporaries. (Aberdeen, 1988) Week 2: Working with the Middle English Dictionary This session will introduce you to the major historical dictionary for the medieval period, the Middle English Dictionary, and will consider how best to make use of its printed and online versions to research the history and use of Middle English words. Suggested reading Cannon, C. The Unchangeable Word: the Dating of Manuscripts and the History of English, in A.J. Minnis, ed. Middle English Poetry: Texts and Traditions. Essays in Honour of Derek Pearsall. (York Medieval Press, 2001), pp. 1-15. ------ The Making of Chaucer‟s English: A Study of Words. Cambridge Studies in Medieval Literature 39. (Cambridge University Press, 1998). Kuhn, S. M. On the Making of the Middle English Dictionary. Dictionaries: Journal of the Dictionary Society of North America 4 (1992): 14-41 Dictionaries: Journal of the Dictionary Society of North America 23 (2002), esp. articles by Stanley, Blake, Lewis, McSparran. Lewis, R. E. and M. J. Williams. Middle English Dictionary: Plan and Bibliography. 2nd Edition (University of Michigan Press). Lewis, R. E. Some Observations on the Use of Manuscripts, Dates, and Preferred Editions in the Middle English Dictionary, in Margaret Connolly and Yoko Iyeiri, eds. 'And gladly wolde he lerne and gladly teche': Essays on Medieval English Presented to Professor Matsuji Tajima on his Sixtieth Birthday. (Kaibunsha, 2002) pp. 169-79. 48

Week 3: Using the Oxford English Dictionary for research purposes This session explores various ways of using the Oxford English Dictionary to investigate the history of English, looking at both its strengths and weaknesses as a resource, and using both on-line and print editions. Suggested reading Examining the OED. http://oed.hertford.ox.ac.uk/main/ Brewer, C. The Treasure House of the English Language. The Living OED. (Yale University Press, 2007) ----- 'Prescriptivism and descriptivism in the first, second and third editions of OED', English Today 26 (2010): 24-33. Cowie, A. The Oxford History of Lexicography (OUP, 2009). Vol 1: General Purpose Dictionaries. Chs 10, 11. Knowles, E. Making the OED: Readers and Editors. A Critical Survey, in L. Mugglestone (2002), 2239. Mugglestone, L. (ed.) Lexicography and the OED. Pioneers in the Untrodden Forest (OUP, 2002) ----- Lost for Words. The Hidden History of the OED (Yale University Press, 2005). Approaches to research on contemporary English (Professor Deborah Cameron and Dr Rosalind Temple) These sessions will introduce you to the basic principles and methods of two kinds of empirical research which involve collecting and analysing linguistic data, especially though not exclusively spoken language data. Weeks 1 & 2: Investigating variation and change These two sessions will focus on variationist methods in sociolinguistics, discussing issues such as sampling, interviewing and other kinds of data elicitation, the identification/definition of linguistic variables and the statistical techniques used in analysis. Weeks 3-4: Analysing discourse These two sessions will deal with various approaches to the analysis of spoken and written discourse (focusing on those most relevant to participants‘ own interests—these may include the ethnography of communication, Conversation Analysis (CA) and Critical Discourse Analysis). Reading You are advised to read at least one text dealing with any approach you plan to use in your B-course written assignment. The item in each category which we think is most useful for most purposes is marked with an asterisk; however, individuals‘ needs and interests will vary, so you should choose the readings most directly relevant to you. General issues/overviews Cameron, D., E. Frazer, P. Harvey, B. Rampton and K. Richardson, Researching Language: Issues of Power and Method (Routledge, 1992) *Johnstone, B. Qualitative Methods in Sociolinguistics (OUP, 2000) 49

Wray, A. and A. Bloomer, Projects in Linguistics and Language Studies (Hodder Education, 2012) Variationist methods Macaulay, R.K.S., Quantitative Methods in Sociolinguistics (Palgrave-Macmillan, 2009) *Milroy, L. and M. Gordon, Sociolinguistics: Method and Interpretation (Blackwell, 2002) Tagliamonte, S., Analysing Sociolinguistic Variation (Cambridge UP, 2006) Discourse analysis Baker, P. Using Corpora in Discourse Analysis (Continuum, 2006) Bloor, M. and T. Bloor, The Practice of Critical Discourse Analysis (Hodder Education, 2007) Brice-Heath, S. and B. Street, On Ethnography: Approaches to Language and Literacy Research (Teachers Press, 2008) *Cameron, D., Working With Spoken Discourse (Sage, 2001) Sidnell, J. Conversation Analysis: An Introduction (Blackwell, 2010) Preparing to do research This final short block of the research skills course addresses issues relating directly to the written assignment you will produce, and ultimately also to your dissertation, such as structuring a research report, reviewing literature, using references and other scholarly apparatus. Week 5: Workshop: planning and writing up research Students should bring to this workshop a short rough draft proposal for their course assignment, which they will be asked to present briefly and informally to the group. Week 6: Individual consultations on B course assignment There is no class meeting this week, but students should schedule a meeting with one of the course tutors to discuss their proposed assignment.

50

B-COURSE, POST-1550 - MICHAELMAS TERM Dr Giles Bergel ([email protected]) The B-Course, a distinctive feature of the Oxford English MSt/MPhil, introduces students to bibliography, manuscript studies, textual scholarship and book history. In providing a range of approaches to literary study that will almost certainly be new to you, the B-Course is very highly recommended. In particular, those intending to continue to doctoral study, whether at Oxford or elsewhere, would need to show good reasons for not taking this course to the relevant course convenor. The course comprises a number of elements across Michaelmas and Hilary terms. Some elements are strand-specific; some address more than one strand in joint sessions; and others are optional. As well as providing training in research skills that support all written work, the B-Course includes two formal assessments of its own. Period-specific classes in both Michaelmas and Hilary lead to the submission of a 5000-7000 word essay at the end of Hilary. A period-specific class on manuscript transcription and palaeography is assessed by a transcription test. Further details about the B-Course assessments, including dates, are available in the MSt/MPhil Handbook. Overview All courses listed run for the entire term

Strand 650-1550 and first year MPhil

Michaelmas Term

Hilary Term

Palaeography and Codicology (Prof. Wakelin)

Palaeography and Codicology (Prof. Wakelin)

Transcription (Prof. Wakelin)

Transcription (Prof. Wakelin)

Textual Criticism (various)

Textual Criticism (various)

Transcription (Dr. Roebuck and Dr. West)

1550-1700 1660-1830 1800-1914 1900-present American

All (optional)

Material Texts 1550-1800 or 1830-present (Dr. Bergel)

1550-1700 B-course (Dr. Gazzard and Dr. Murphy) 1660-1830 B-course (Dr. Halmi)

Transcription (Mr. Hurst)

1800-1900 B-course (Dr. Bergel)

Transcription (Dr. Priestman)

1900-present/American B-course (Dr. Whitworth)

Hand-press printing workshop (Dr. Nash)

Editing workshop (Dr. Bergel)

Hand-press printing workshop (Dr. Nash)

Students will usually take the B-Course classes in Michaelmas and Hilary that cover the MSt. periodstrand on which they are registered, but they may choose another course if their research interests straddle a period divide (subject to permission). Class times and locations are given in the Lecture List. A practical and historical class in hand-press printing is taught by Dr. Nash across both Michaelmas and Hilary: it is optional and is not assessed, but it strongly supports classroom instruction in bibliography and the materiality of the printed text. Students can register an interest in taking the class through their B-course tutors in early Michaelmas.

51

A class on scholarly editing is taught by Dr. Bergel in Hilary: it is optional and not assessed, but it may assist students on any period strand who are interested in editorial issues on a theoretical or a practical level. Further research skills courses that are relevant for B-Course work are run by the Bodleian Library, the English Faculty Library and Oxford University Computer Services throughout the year. Masterclasses on manuscripts and rare books are run by the Bodleian Centre for the Study of the Book on Monday afternoons in Michaelmas.

B-COURSE: MATERIAL TEXTS, 1550-1830 The B-Course provides an introduction to bibliography, book history and textual scholarship for the study of literature. It includes both the study of books as singular physical objects and as texts that may exist in multiple physical states. Weekly readings (below) are offered as general or theoretical introductions and as jumping-off points for your own explorations: the list is neither prescriptive nor exhaustive and will be supplemented by further reading lists provided each week. Readings marked with an asterisk are particularly recommended; those marked with a [W] will be available through the course page on Weblearn. Articles in periodicals are generally available online through SOLO, as are an increasing number of books. It would be useful for you to have looked at one or more of the following in advance: Craig S. Abbott and William Proctor Williams, An Introduction to Bibliographical and Textual Studies, (Modern Language Association, 2009) Philip Gaskell, A New Introduction to Bibliography, (Oxford University Press, 1972) D. C. Greetham, Textual Scholarship: An Introduction (Routledge, 1994) D. F. McKenzie, Bibliography and the Sociology of Texts, (Cambridge University Press, 1999) Peter Davison (ed.), The Book Encompassed: Studies in Twentieth-Century Bibliography, (Cambridge University Press, 1992) John Barnard, D.F. McKenzie and Maureen Bell (eds.), The Cambridge History of the Book in Britain, vol. 5: 1557-1695, (Cambridge University Press, 2002) Michael F. Suarez and Michael L. Turner (eds.), The Cambridge History of the Book in Britain, vol. 6: 1695-1830, (Cambridge University Press, 2009) 1. Introduction James McLaverty, ‗The Mode of Existence of Literary Works of Art: The Case of the Dunciad Variorum‘, Studies in Bibliography, 37, (1984), 82-105 2. The Material Text I: Format * Philip Gaskell, A New Introduction to Bibliography, (Oxford University Press 1972), 87-107 * Thomas Tanselle, ‗The Concept of Format‘, Studies in Bibliography, 53, (2000), 67-115 * [W] Peter Stallybrass, ‗Books and Scrolls: Navigating the Bible,‘ in Books and Readers in Early Modern England: Material Studies, edited by Jennifer Andersen and Elizabeth Sauer, (University of Pennsylvania Press, 2002), 42-79

52

* Pauline Kewes, ‗―Give me the sociable Pocket-books‖: Humphrey Moseley‘s Serial Publication of Octavo Play Collections‘, Publishing History, 38, (1995), 5-21 R. W. Chapman, ‗Notes on Eighteenth-Century Book-Building‘, The Library, 4:3, (1923), 165-180 [W] Joseph A. Dane and Alexandra Gillespie, ‗The Myth of the Cheap Quarto,‘ in Tudor Books and the Material Construction of Meaning, (Cambridge University Press, 2010) 25-45 [W] Stephen Galbraith, ‗English Literary Folios 1593-1623: Studying Shifts in Format,‘ in Tudor Books and the Material Construction of Meaning, (Cambridge University Press, 2010), 46-67 Evelyn B. Tribble, Margins and Marginality: The Printed Page in Early Modern England, (University Press of Virginia, 1993) 3. The Material Text II: Typography and Illustration * Philip Gaskell, A New Introduction to Bibliography, (Oxford University Press, 1972) 5-56 * [W] D. F. McKenzie, ‗Typography and Meaning: the Case of William Congreve,‘ in Making Meaning: Printers of the Mind and Other Essays, (University of Massachussets Press, 2002), 199-200 * Mark Bland, ‗The Appearance of the Text in Early Modern England‘, Text, 11, (1998), 91-154 * Joseph Dane and Svetlana Djananova, ‗The Typographical Gothic: A Cautionary Note on the Title Page to Percy‘s ―Reliques of Ancient English Poetry‖‘, Eighteenth-Century Life, 29:3, (2005), 76-97 Charlton Hinman, The Printing and Proof-Reading of the First Folio of Shakespeare (Oxford University Press, 1963) Paul Werstine, ‗The Editorial Usefulness of Printing House and Compositor Studies,‘ in Play-Texts in Old Spelling, edited by G.B. Shand and Raymond C. Shady (AMS Press, 1984), 35-64 ‗The Technologies and Aesthetics of Book Production‘, Part III of The Cambridge History of the Book in Britain, Volume V, 1695-1830, 161-290 Janine Barchas, Graphic Design, Print Culture, and the Eighteenth Century Novel, (Cambridge University Press, 2003) Johanna Drucker, The Alphabetic Labyrinth: The Letters in History and Imagination, (Thames & Hudson, 1995) Michael Hunter, Printed Images in Early-Modern Britain: Essays in Interpretation, (Ashgate, 2010) 4. The History of the Book and the Economics of Authorship * Robert Darnton, ‗What Is the History of Books?‘, Daedalus, 111:3, (1982), 65-83 * [W] Peter Blayney, ‗The Publication of Playbooks,‘ in A New History of Early English Drama, edited by John D. Cox and David S. Kastan (Columbia University Press, 1997, 383-422 * D. F. McKenzie, ‗Printing and publishing 1557–1700: Constraints on the London Book Trades,‘ in The Cambridge History of the Book in Britain, Vol. 5, (1557-1695), (Cambridge University Press, 2002), 553-67 * [W] Terry Belanger, ‗Publishers and Writers in Eighteenth-Century England,‘ in Books and their Readers in Eighteenth-Century England, edited by Isabel Rivers, (Leicester University Press, 1982), 525.

53

James Raven, The Business of Books: Booksellers and the English Book Trade, 1450-1850, (Yale University Press, 2007) Brean Hammond, The Rise of Professional Imaginative Writing in England, 1670-1740: Hackney for Bread, (Oxford University Press, 1997) David Foxon, Pope and the Early Eighteenth-Century Book Trade, (Clarendon, 1991) William St. Clair, The Reading Nation in the Romantic Period, (Cambridge University Press, 2004) 5. Descriptive Bibliography and the History of Collecting * Philip Gaskell, ‗Identification‘, in A New Introduction to Bibliography, (Oxford University Press, 1972), 311-21 * Thomas Tanselle, ‗Descriptive Bibliography and Library Cataloguing‘, Studies in Bibliography, 30, (1977), 1-56 * [W] Heidi Brayman Hackel, ‗The Countess of Bridgewater‘s London Library,‘ in Books and Readers in Early Modern England, edited by Jennifer Andersen and Elizabeth Sauer, (University of Pennsylvania Press, 2002) * Philip Connell, ‗Bibliomania: Book Collecting, Cultural Politics, and the Rise of Literary Heritage in Romantic Britain‘, Representations, 71, (2000), 24-47 [W] Barbara Benedict, ‗Reading Collections: The Literary Discourse of Eighteenth-Century Libraries,‘ in Bookish Histories: Books, Literature and Commercial Modernity, 1700-1900, edited by Ina Ferris and Paul Keen, (Palgrave, 2009) David Pearson, Provenance Research in Book History: A Handbook, (British Library, 1998) Roger Chartier and Lydia G Cochrane, The Order of Books: Readers, Authors, and Libraries in Europe Between the Fourteenth and Eighteenth centuries, (Polity 1994) The Cambridge History of Libraries in Britain and Ireland, vol. II: 1640–1850, edited by Giles Mandelbrote and Keith Manley, (Cambridge University Press, 2006) 6. ‗Book Use‘ and The History of Reading * Anthony Grafton and Lisa Jardine. ‗How Gabriel Harvey Read His Livy‘, Past and Present, 129, (1990), 30–78 * Ann Blair, ‗Reading Strategies for Coping with Information Overload ca. 1550-1700‘, Journal of the History of Ideas, 64, (2003), 11-28 * Roger Chartier, ‗Laborers and Voyagers: From the Text to the Reader‘, Diacritics, 22, (1992), 49–61 * Margaret Ezell, ‗Mr. Spectator on Readers and the Conspicuous Consumption of Literature‘, Literature Compass, 1, (2003), 1-7 James Raven, ‗New Reading Histories, Print Culture and the Identification of Change: the Case of Eighteenth-Century England‘, Social History, 23, (1998), 268-87 Jennifer Richards and Fred Schurink, ‗The Textuality and Materiality of Reading in Early Modern England‘, Huntington Library Quarterly, 73:3, (2010), 345-61 54

William H. Sherman, Used Books: Marking Readers in Renaissance Books, (University of Pennsylvania Press, 2008) Heidi Brayman Hackel, Reading Material in Early Modern England: Print, Gender and Literacy, (Cambridge University Press, 2005) Harold Love, Scribal Publication in Seventeenth-Century England, (Clarendon Press, 1993; reprinted as The Culture and Commerce of Texts: Scribal Publication in Seventeenth-Century England, (University of Massachussets Press, 1998) Maynard Mack, The Last and Greatest Art: Some Unpublished Poetical Manuscripts of Alexander Pope, (University of Delaware Press, 1984) Stephen Colclough, Consuming Texts: Readers and Reading Communities, 1695-1870, (Palgrave, 2007) H. J. Jackson, Marginalia: Readers Writing in Books, (Yale University Press, 2001)

B-COURSE: MATERIAL TEXTS, 1830-PRESENT The B-Course provides an introduction to bibliography, book history and textual scholarship for the study of literature. It includes both the study of books as singular physical objects and as texts that may exist in multiple physical states. Weekly readings (below) are offered as general or theoretical introductions and as jumping-off points for your own explorations: the list is neither prescriptive nor exhaustive and will be supplemented by further reading lists provided each week. Readings marked with an asterisk are particularly recommended; those marked with a [W] will be available through the course page on Weblearn. Articles in periodicals are generally available online through SOLO, as are an increasing number of books. It would be useful for you to have looked at one or more or the following in advance: Craig S. Abbott and William Proctor Williams, An Introduction to Bibliographical and Textual Studies, (Modern Language Association, 2009) Philip Gaskell, A New Introduction to Bibliography, (Oxford University Press, 1972) D. C. Greetham, Textual Scholarship: An Introduction, (Routledge, 1994) D. F. McKenzie, Bibliography and the Sociology of Texts, (Cambridge University Press, 1999) The Cambridge History of the Book in Britain vol. 6, 1830-1914, (Cambridge University Press, 2009) Peter Davison (ed.), The Book Encompassed: Studies in Twentieth-Century Bibliography, (Cambridge University Press, 1992) 1. Introduction Paul Eggert, ‗Brought to Book: Bibliography, Book History and the Study of Literature‘, The Library, 13:1, 2012, 3-32 2. The Material Text I: Format * Troy J. Bassett, ‗Living on the Margin: George Bentley and the Economics of the Three-Volume Novel, 1865–70‘, Book History, 13, 2010, 58-79

55

* [W] Edward Bishop, ‗Re: Covering Modernism — Format and Function in the Little Magazines,‘ in Modernist Writers and the Marketplace, edited by Ian Willison, Warwick Gould, and Warren Chernaik (Macmillan, 1996), 287-319 * [W] Hans Schmoller, ‗The Paperback Revolution,‘ in Essays in the history of publishing in celebration of the 250th anniversary of the House of Longman, 1724-1974, ed. by Asa Briggs (Longman, 1974), 283-318 * [W] Paul Duguid, ‗Material Matters: The Past and Futurology of the Book‘, in The Future of the Book, ed. by Geoffrey Nunberg, (University of California Press, 1996) * Graham Law and Robert L. Patten, ‗The Serial Revolution,‘ in The Cambridge History of the Book in Britain, vol. 6: 1830-1914, (Cambridge University Press, 2009), 144-71 Gerard Genette, Paratexts: Thresholds of Interpretation (Cambridge University Press, 1997) David Reed, The Popular Magazine in Britain and the United States 1880-1960, (The British Library, 1997) Megan L. Benton, Beauty and the Book: Fine Editions and Cultural Distinction in America, (Yale University Press, 2000) George Bornstein, Material Modernism: The Politics of the Page, (Cambridge University Press, 2001) Alan Bartram, Making Books: Design in British publishing since 1945, (BL and Oak Knoll, 1995) Stephen Bury, Artists‘ Books: The Book as a Work of Art, 1963-1995, (Scolar Press, 1995) 3. The Material Text II: Typography and Illustration * [W] David McKitterick, ‗Changes in the look of the book,‘ in The Cambridge History of the Book in Britain, vol. 6: 1830-1914, (Cambridge University Press, 2009), 75-116 * Lawrence Rainey, ‗Eliot Among the Typists: Writing the Waste Land‘, Modernism/modernity, 12:1, (2005), 27-84 * Johanna Drucker, ‗Intimations of Immateriality: Graphical Form, Textual Sense, and the Electronic Environment,‘ in Reimagining Textuality: Textual Studies in the Late Age of Print, edited by Elizabeth Bergmann Loiseaux and Neil Fraistat, (University of Wisconsin Press, 2002), 152-77 Hugh Kenner, ‗The Most Beautiful Book‘, English Literary History, 48:3, (1981), 594-605 George Bornstein, Material Modernism: The Politics of the Page, (Cambridge University Press, 2001) Jerome McGann, Black Riders: The Visible Language of Modernism, (Princeton University Press, 1993) Claire Hoertz Badaracco, Trading Words: Poetry, Typography, and Illustrated Books in the Modern Literary Economy, (Johns Hopkins University Press, 1995) Paul C. Gutjahr and Megan L. Benton (eds.), Illuminating Letters: Typography and Literary Interpretation, (University of Massachussets Press, 2001) Johanna Drucker, The Visible Word: Experimental Typography and Modern Art, 1909-1923 (University of Chicago Press, 1994) Patricia Anderson, The Printed Image and the Transformation of Popular Culture, 1790-1860, (Clarendon, 1991) 56

Michael Twyman, ‗The Illustration Revolution,‘ in The Cambridge History of the Book in Britain, vol. 6: 1830-1914, (Cambridge University Press, 2009), 117-143 Laurel Brake and Marysa Demoor (eds.), The Lure of Illustration in the Nineteenth Century: Picture and Press, (Palgrave, 2008) Michael Twyman and Ruari McLean, Printing 1770-1970: An Illustrated History of its Development and Uses in England, (British Library, 1998) 4. The History of the Book Trades * Robert Darnton, ‗What Is the History of Books?‘, Daedalus, 111:3, (1982), 65-83 * Margaret Diane Stetz, ‗Sex, Lies, and Printed Cloth: Bookselling at the Bodley Head in the EighteenNineties‘, Victorian Studies, 35:1 (1991), 71-86 * Lawrence Rainey, ‗The Price of Modernism: Reconsidering the Publication of The Waste Land‘, Critical Quarterly, 31:4, (1989), 21-47 * Peter D. McDonald, ‗Pierre Bourdieu and the History of the Book‘, The Library, 19:2, (1997) Simon Eliot, Some Patterns and Trends in British Publishing 1880-1919, (Bibliographical Society, 1994) John O. Jordan and Robert L. Patten (eds.), Literature in the Marketplace: Nineteenth-Century British Publishing and Reading Practices, (Cambridge University Press 1995) Meredith McGill, American Literature and the Culture of Reprinting, 1834–1853, (University of Pennsylvania Press, 2003) Alexis Weedon, Victorian Publishing: The Economics of Book Production for a Mass Market, 18301916, (Ashgate, 2002) Michael Winship, American Literary Publishing in the Mid-nineteenth Century: The Business of Ticknor and Fields, (Cambridge University Press, 2003) Mary Ann Gillies, The Professional Literary Agent in Britain, 1880-1920, (University of Toronto Press, 2007) Peter D. McDonald, British Literary Culture and Publishing Practice, 1880-1914, (Cambridge University Press 1997) Joseph McAleer, Popular Reading and Publishing in Britain, 1914-1950, (Clarendon, 1992) Paul K Saint-Amour (ed.), Modernism and Copyright, (Oxford University Press 2011) Catherine Turner, Marketing Modernism Between the Two World Wars, (University of Massachussets Press, 2003) Evan Brier, A Novel Marketplace: Mass Culture, the Book Trade, and Postwar American Fiction, (University of Pennsylvania Press, 2010) Claire Squires, Marketing Literature: The Making of Contemporary Writing in Britain, (Palgrave, 2007) John B. Thompson, Merchants of Culture: The Publishing Business in the 21st Century, (Polity, 2010)

57

5. Descriptive Bibliography and the History of Collecting * Philip Gaskell, ‗Identification,‘ in A New Introduction to Bibliography, (Oxford University Press, 1972), 311-21 * Philip Connell, ‗Bibliomania: Book Collecting, Cultural Politics, and the Rise of Literary Heritage in Romantic Britain‘, Representations, 71, (2000), 24-47 * [W] Walter Benjamin, ‗Unpacking my Library,‘ in Walter Benjamin: Selected Writings, Volume 2, 1927-1934, translated by Rodney Livingstone and others; edited by Michael W. Jennings, Howard Eiland, and Gary Smith, (Belknap Press, 1999) 486-493 * [W] Marilyn Deegan and Kathryn Sutherland, Chapter 5: ‗The Universal Library‘, pp. 119-135 in Transferred Illusions: Digital Technology and the Forms of Print, (Farnham: Ashgate, 2009) Thomas Tanselle, ‗A Sample Bibliographical Description with Commentary‘, Studies in Bibliography, 40, (1987), 1-30 Thomas Tanselle, ‗Descriptive Bibliography and Library Cataloguing‘, Studies in Bibliography, 30, (1977), 1-56 David Pearson, Provenance Research in Book History: A Handbook, (British Library, 1998) Peter Shillingsburg, ‗Text as Matter, Concept, and Action‘, Studies in Bibliography, 44, (1991), 81-82 Alistair Black and Peter Hoare (eds.), The Cambridge History of Libraries in Britain and Ireland, Vol. III: 1850-2000, (Cambridge University Press, 2006) John Elsner and Roger Cardinal (eds.), The Culture of Collecting, (Harvard University Press 1994) 6. The History of Reading * Stephen Colclough and David Vincent, ‗Reading,‘ in The Cambridge History of the Book in Britain vol. 6, 1830-1914, (Cambridge University Press, 2009), 281-323 * Shafquat Towheed, Rosalind Crone and Katherine Halsey (eds.), The History of Reading, (Routledge, 2010) * Mats Dahlström, ‗A Book of One's Own‘, in R. Crone and S. Towheed (eds.), The History of Reading. Vol. 3: Methods, Strategies, Tactics, (Palgrave Macmillan, 2011, 115-131 Kate Flint, The Woman Reader 1837-1914, (Clarendon, 1993) Stephen Colclough, Consuming Texts: Readers and Reading Communities, 1695-1870, (Palgrave, 2007) Richard D. Altick, The English Common Reader, (Ohio State University Press, 1998) James Raven, Helen Small and Naomi Tadmor (eds.), The Practice and Representation of Reading in England, (Cambridge University Press, 1996) Sue Currell, ‗Streamlining the Eye: Speed Reading and the Revolution of Words, 1870-1940,‘ in Residual Media: Residual Technologies and Culture, (University of Minnesota Press, 2007), 344-60 Janice Radway, A Feeling for Books: the Book-of-the-Month Club, Literary Taste, and Middle-Class Desire, (University of North Carolina Press, 1997)

58

Elizabeth Long, Book Clubs: Women and the Uses of Reading in Everyday Life, (University of Chicago Press, 2003) DeNel Rehberg Sedo (ed.), Reading Communities from Salons to Cyberspace, (Macmillan, 2011)

B-COURSE: POST-1550 TRANSCRIPTION CLASSES Please note that these classes are taught in Michaelmas Term and are held in addition to the main class taught by Dr Giles Bergel. Attendance at both is compulsory. 1550-1700: Early Modern Hands (Dr Philip West and Dr Tom Roebuck)

A course of eight classes for M.St. students working in the period. The main aims of the course are to enable students to read secretary hand fluently, and to describe its forms; to enable students to transcribe hands using semi-diplomatic conventions; and to explain scribal features of early modern manuscript writing. Students will learn how to find and use manuscripts in Oxford. There will be a transcription test at the end of Michaelmas term. 1660-1830 and 1800-1914: Handwriting, 1700-1900 (Mr Clive Hurst) A course of eight classes for MSt students working in this period. You will be presented with examples of literary hands which will be transcribed in class; there will be three pieces of formal transcription to present during the term, and a final test transcription in the last class. The course is to familiarise you with contemporary hands to enable you to use primary resources more effectively, and to introduce you to some of the problems encountered in editing texts. 1900-present: Material Methodology: Modern manuscript research, post-1900 (Dr Judith Priestman) The purpose of this part of the M.St. course is to familiarize postgraduates with some of the techniques and methodologies involved in researching primary sources, principally manuscripts and archives. Students are taught basic document analysis (how to spot a forgery; date paper &c) and offered one practical session in the Bodleian‘s Conservation workshops, but the main emphasis of the course is on transcribing and editing manuscripts, where transcription is understood to be a tool for analysing an author‘s compositional technique.

HILARY TERM OPTIONAL SEMINAR - THE WORK OF EDITING This optional seminar is designed for graduates interested in editing, whether in support of their work or as a subject of interest in itself. It includes readings in editorial theory and scrutiny of critical editions, electronic archives and other products of the editorial process. It is open to all students enrolled on a BCourse. There is no assessed component. Week 1: The history of editing Week 2: The politics and poetics of transcription Week 3: Mechanical reproductions: image-based editions and the ‗archival turn‘ Week 4: Putting the pieces together: fragments, textual criticism, genetic and eclectic editing Week 5: Commentary and the margins of the text Week 6: The ends of editing

59

C-COURSE DESCRIPTIONS - MICHAELMAS TERM You can select your C- Courses from any period strand 650-1550 Michaelmas Term

THE AGE OF ALFRED Dr Francis Leneghan ([email protected]) King Alfred of Wessex (871-99) is often credited with inventing English prose and even the idea of ―Englishness‖. This course will interrogate these ideas by exploring the burgeoning vernacular literary culture associated with Alfred‘s court and its impact on English writing and society in the tenth century. Texts will be studied in Old English, so some prior knowledge of the language will be required (concurrent language classes will be provided by the Faculty should the need arise). Key texts will include the Old English translations of the following works: Gregory the Great, Pastoral Care and Dialogues Boethius, The Consolation of Philosophy St Augustine, Soliloquies Psalms 1-50 Orosius, Seven Books of History Against the Pagans We will also look at important vernacular works such as Alfred‘s Lawcode (Domboc) and The AngloSaxon Chronicle (MS A), while paying attention to continental influences on Alfredian writing. Recommended reading Abels, Richard. Alfred the Great: War, Kingship and Culture in Anglo-Saxon England (London, 1998). Bately, Janet M. The Literary Prose of King Alfred‟s Reign: Translation or Transformation? (London, 1980). --------- ‗Did King Alfred Actually Translate Anything? The Integrity of the Alfredian Canon Revisited‘, Medium Ævum 78 (2009), 189-215. Discenza, Nicole G. The King‟s English: Strategies of Translation in the Old English „Boethius‟ (New York, 2005). Foot, Sarah. ‗The Making of Angelcynn: English Identity Before the Norman Conquest‘, Transactions of the Royal Historical Society, 6th ser. 6 (1996), 25-49. Godden, Malcolm. ‗Did King Alfred Write Anything?‘, Medium Ævum 76 (2007), 1-23. ----------- ‗The Alfredian Project and its Aftermath: Rethinking the Literary History of the Ninth and Tenth Centuries‘, Proceedings of the British Academy 162 (2009), 93-122. Harris, Stephen J. Race and Ethnicity in Anglo-Saxon England: Culture, Identity and Representation (New York, 2003). Karkov, Catherine E. The Ruler Portraits of Anglo-Saxon England (Woodbridge, 2004), pp. 23-52. Keynes, Simon and Michael Lapidge. Alfred the Great: Asser‟s „Life of King Alfred‟ and Other Contemporary Sources (London, 1983).

60

Pratt, David. The Political Thought of King Alfred the Great (Cambridge, 2007). Sheppard, Alice. Families of the King: Writing Identity in the Anglo-Saxon Chronicle (Toronto, 2004). Whitelock, Dorothy. ‗The Prose of Alfred‘s Reign‘, in Continuations and Beginnings: Studies in Old English Literature, ed. E. G. Stanley (London, 1966), pp. 67-103. Wormald, Patrick. ‗Engla lond: The Making of an Allegiance‘, Journal of Historical Sociology 7 (1994), 1-24.

ARCHETYPES OF THE HIGH MIDDLE AGES Dr Laura Ashe ([email protected]) 1.

Warrior: The Battle of Maldon; The Song of Roland; Geoffrey of Monmouth‘s Historia regum Britanniae; Laȝamon‘s Brut The knight before chivalry – warrior kings – crusade – empire – battle

2.

Lover: Tristan texts; Chrétien de Troyes, Lancelot; Marie de France, Lais; Andreas Capellanus, Art of Love Self and beloved – idealization and symbolism – aesthetic morality – game and play – grief and loss

3.

Knight: Chrétien de Troyes, Erec & Enide, Yvain; History of William Marshal; The Roman des Eles; L‟ordene de chevalerie; Sir Gawain and the Green Knight The invention of chivalry – knighthood as order – nobility and exclusivity – romances and court culture

4.

Saint: Christina of Markyate; Lives of Edward the Confessor; South English Legendary Holy lives – royal saints – hermits and confessors – holiness in history

5.

Martyr: Lives of Becket; Lives of Edmund; Saint Margaret; South English Legendary Violence and the sacred – torture and ecstasy – bodily damage and renewal

6.

Mixture: Gui de Warewic/Guy of Warwick; Vita Haroldi; Emaré; The Man of Law‘s Tale; The Legend of Good Women; Troilus & Criseyde Virtuous laity – penitent knights – virtue to a fault – devotion to unworthy ideals

61

650-1550 Michaelmas Term

DEVOTIONAL LITERATURE Dr Annie Sutherland ([email protected]) This course focuses on the thirteenth-century Ancrene Wisse. A text of guidance written for women embarking upon lives of anchoritic solitude, Ancrene Wisse will be considered alongside the closely associated texts of the Katherine Group (the lives of saints Katherine, Margaret and Juliana, in addition to Sawles Warde and Hali Meiðhad) and the Wooing Group (a series of lyrical meditations directed to Christ and the Virgin Mary). The course will provide scope for close readings of the texts in their manuscript contexts, and will also encourage broader investigations which might include (although need not be confined to) sources and background ways of reading invited by the texts later uses and adaptations of the texts male authors, female readers Students who opt for this course will need to be prepared to work on this material in the original language (i.e., Early Middle English). Week 1: What is Ancrene Wisse? Mouvance, Manuscripts and Structure In preparation for this class, please 1. Read Ancrene Wisse in Bella Millett‘s edition. Does the text itself say anything that helps us to answer the question ‗What is Ancrene Wisse‟? 2. Read the following (all listed on the bibliography) * Millett‘s introduction to her EETS edition * Millett‘s introduction to her Ancrene Wisse translation * Millett‘s essay What is Mouvance? Come to the class with a summary the theory of mouvance and the ways in which Millett applies it to Ancrene Wisse. Be prepared to discuss the effectiveness of the theory as applied to AW and also the reasoning behind most editors‘ choice of Cambridge, Corpus Christi MS 402 as a base text. 3. Read the following (all listed on the bibliography) * Georgianna The Solitary Self * Cannon ‗The Form of the Self‘ and ‗The Shape of the Self‘ *Price [i.e. Wogan-Browne] ‗Inner and Outer‘ Come to the class prepared to discuss the categories of ‗inner‘ and ‗outer‘ as related to Ancrene Wisse To facilitate discussion, please bring three printed copies of summaries (including relevant primary and secondary quotations) of your thoughts in each of these three areas.

62

Week 2: The Shape of Anchoritic Life What do Ancrene Wisse and other contemporary sources (Aelred of Rievaulx‘s De Institutione Inclusarum, historical records in Rotha Clay and Anne Warren etc) tell us of the practicalities of anchoritic life? To what extent are the rhetoric and the reality of the anchorhold related? What, if anything, is distinctive in Ancrene Wisse‘s characterisation of the anchoritic life? In preparation for the class please 1. Prepare a short written piece (c. 2000 words) exploring the relationship between rhetoric and reality in Ancrene Wisse. Please email this to me by 12 noon on Wednesday. 2. Prepare a short presentation on * The Life of Christina of Markyate (ed. Samuel Fanous and Henrietta Leyser (2008) * De Institutione Inclusarum ('A Rule of Life for a Recluse' in Aelred of Rievaulx – Treatises and the Pastoral Prayer Cistercian Fathers Series II (1971)) Theology Faculty Library 60.00c57 Considering in particular the ways in which they relate to/shed light on/differ from Ancrene Wisse Week 3: Trends of Early Medieval Devotion 1. Consider the following questions, which we will discuss in next week‘s class – What is the Wooing Group? What mss do the texts appear in? What criteria have we used to define ‗The Wooing Group‘? What relation do they have to Ancrene Wisse? 2. Write an essay ‗Should we privilege the erotic or the mystic? Are texts which speak of longings, ecstasies, penetrations ‗really‘ sexual or ‗really‘ religious? To what extent can the two models coexist?‘ (Sarah Salih) Consider these questions in relation to the texts of the Wooing Group. 3. Come to the class ready to discuss 4. Anselm of Canterbury‘s Prayers and Meditations and their relation to the Wooing Group texts Benedicta Ward (ed and trans) The Prayers and Meditations of St Anselm with the Proslogion 5. Contemporary devotional lyrics Carleton Brown (ed) English Lyrics of the Thirteenth Century Week 4: Bodies Denied, Bodies Embraced and Bodies in Pain 1. Ancrene Wisse on the body Classical, Patristic and Medieval Attitudes to the Body (Alcuin Blamires) What attitudes does Ancrene Wisse convey? 2. Hali Meiðhad and virginity How do HM‘s attitudes to the body compare with those of AW? What is virginity, according to HM? (Sarah Salih)

63

3. The Katherine Group saints‘ lives and the body in pain Read all three (in translation) How are women‘s bodies presented? Are these texts ‗sacred pornography‘? (Salih and Wogan-Browne) What do these texts have to say about bodily pain? Week 5: Reading Anchoresses What was the anchoress encouraged to read? How was she encouraged to read it? Is she given access to the bible? Is she given any training in the traditions of allegorical interpretation? Primary Texts I. Ancrene Wisse Millett, B. (ed.), Ancrene Wisse: a corrected edition of the text in Cambridge, Corpus Christi College, MS 402, with variants from other manuscripts 2 volumes EETS 325 & 6 (2005 & 6) Another accessible edition of the complete text (based on Cambridge, Corpus Christi MS 402) is – Hasenfratz, R. (ed), Ancrene Wisse (TEAMS 2000) (also available online via the TEAMS website) EETS has also published diplomatic editions of all the English manuscripts – CCCC MS 402 can be found in – Tolkien, J.R.R. (ed), The English Text of the Ancrene Riwle: Ancrene Wisse (CCCC MS 402) EETS 249 (1962) Note also Ackerman, R.W and Dahood, R (eds.), Ancrene Riwle: Introduction and Part I (1984) Shepherd, G. (ed.), Ancrene Wisse Parts 6 and 7 (1959. Revd. 1991) (Translations) Savage, A. and Watson, N. (eds), Anchoritic Spirituality: Ancrene Wisse and Associated Works (1991) There are also translations by Hugh White (1993) Mary Salu (1955. Revd. 1990) and Bella Millett (2009). Millett‘s is by far the most useful. See also Wogan-Browne, J., Potts, J and Stevenson, L (eds.), Concordance to Ancrene Wisse: MS Corpus Christi College Cambridge 402 (1993) II. The Katherine Group d‘Ardenne, R.T.O. (ed.), þe Liflade ant te Passiun of Seinte Iuliene EETS os 248 (1961) d‘Ardenne, R.T.O. (ed), The Katherine Group: Edited from MS Bodley 34 (1977) d‘Ardenne and Dobson, E.J. (eds.), Seinte Katerine EETS ss 7 (1981) Bennett, J.A.W and Smithers, G.V (eds.), Early Middle English Prose and Verse (repr. 1974) [contains 64

an edition of Sawles Warde] Mack, F.M (ed), Seinte Marherete: þe Meiden and Martyr EETS os 193 (1934, 1958) Millett, B (ed.), Hali Meiðhad EETS os 284 (1982) Wilson, R.M (ed.), Sawles Warde: An Early Middle English Homily (1938) (Translations) Millett, B and Wogan-Browne, J. (eds.), Medieval English Prose for Women (1990) Savage, A. and Watson, N. (eds), Anchoritic Spirituality: Ancrene Wisse and Associated Works (1991) See also Wogan-Browne, J and Stevenson, L (eds.), Concordances to the Katherine Group and the Wooing Group (2000) III. The Wooing Group Thompson, W.M (ed.), þe Wohunge of Ure Lauerd EETS os 241 (1958) [contains all the Wooing Group texts] (Translations) Savage, A. and Watson, N. (eds), Anchoritic Spirituality: Ancrene Wisse and Associated Works (1991) See also Wogan-Browne, J and Stevenson, L (eds.), Concordances to the Katherine Group and the Wooing Group (2000) IV. Other Ayto, J. and Barratt, A. (eds.), Aelred of Rievaulx‟s De Institutione Inclusarum – Two Middle English Translations EETS 287 (1984) Holthausen, F. (ed.), Vices and Virtues EETS os 89 (1888) Macpherson, M.P (trans.), 'A Rule of Life for a Recluse' in Aelred of Rievaulx – Treatises and the Pastoral Prayer Cistercian Fathers Series II (1971) Morton, V. and Wogan-Browne, J. (eds.) Guidance for Women in Twelfth-Century Convents (2003) Otter, M (ed and trans), Goscelin of St Bertin: The Book of Encouragement and Consolation (2004) Talbot, C.H (ed and trans), The Life of Christina of Markyate, a Twelfth-Century Recluse (1959) [Henrietta Leyser and Samuel Fanous have published an updated version of this translation with Oxford World Classics (2008)] Secondary Reading I. Ancrene Wisse, Katherine Group, Wooing Group, Saints‘ Lives Ackerman, R.W., ‗The Liturgical Day in Ancrene Riwle‘ Speculum 53 (1978), 734-44

65

Barratt, A., 'Anchoritic Aspects of the Ancrene Wisse' Medium Aevum 49 (1980), 32-56 Cannon, C., 'The Form of the Self: Ancrene Wisse and Romance' Medium Aevum 70 (2001), 47-65 Cannon, C., ‗The Place of the Self: Ancrene Wisse and the Katherine-Group‘ in The Grounds of English Literature (2004) Chewning, S.M. ―‗Gladly Alone, Gladly Silent‘: Language, Gender, and Desire in Medieval Mysticism.‖ in McAvoy, L and Hughes-Edwards, M. (eds.), Anchorites, Wombs, and Tombs: Intersections of Gender and Enclosure in the Middle Ages (2005) Chewning, S.M. ―‗Mi bodi henge / wið þi bodi‘: The Paradox of Sensuality in þe Wohunge of Ure Lauerd‖ in Chewning, S.M. (ed.), Intersections of Sexuality and the Divine in Medieval Culture (2005) Chewning, S.M. ―‗Make . . . of me/ wrecche þi leofmon and spuse‘: Mystical Desire and Visionary Consummation.‖ in Jones, E.A. (ed.), The Medieval Mystical Tradition in England VII (2004), pp. 163176 Chewning, S.M. (ed.), The Milieu and Context of the Wooing Group (2009) Clark, C., ‗Early Middle English Prose: Three Essays in Stylistics‘ Essays in Criticism 18 (1968) Clark, C., 'With scharpe sneateres': Some Aspects of Colloquialism in Ancrene Wisse', Neuphilologische Mitteilungen 79 (1978), 341-53 Cole, C., ‗The Integrity of Text and Context in the Prayers of British Library, Cotton MS Nero A.xiv‘ Neuphilologische Mitteilungen 104, no. 1 (2003), 85-94 Dobson, E.J., The Origins of Ancrene Wisse (1976) Georgianna, L., The Solitary Self: Individuality in the Ancrene Wisse (1981) Grayson, J., Structure and Imagery in Ancrene Wisse (1974) Hasenfratz, B. ‗The Anchorhold as Symbolic Space in Ancrene Wisse‟ Philological Quarterly 84, no. 1 (2005 Winter) Innes-Parker, C., ‗Fragmentation and Reconstruction: Images of the Female Body in Ancrene Wisse and the Katherine Group‘ Comitatus: A Journal of Medieval and Renaissance Studies 26, (1995), 27-52 Innes-Parker, C., ‗Ancrene Wisse and The Wooing of Our Lord: The Thirteenth-Century Female Reader and the Lover-Knight‘ in Smith, L. and Taylor, J.H.M. (eds.), Women, the Book and the Godly (1995) Innes-Parker, C and Gunn, C. (eds.), Texts and Traditions of Medieval Pastoral Care: Essays in Honour of Bella Millett (2009) Lochrie, K., ‗The Language of Transgression: Body, Flesh and Word in Mystical Discourse‘ in Frantzen, A.J. (ed.), Speaking Two Languages: Traditional Disciplines and Contemporary Theory in Mediaeval Studies (1991) Margherita, G., ‗Desiring Narrative: Ideology and the Semiotics of the Gaze in the Middle English Juliana‘ Exemplaria: A Journal of Theory in Medieval and Renaissance Studies 2, no. 2 (1990), 355374 Millett, B. ‗Hali Meiðhad, Sawles Warde and the Continuity of English Prose‘ in Stanley, E.G and Gray, D. (eds.), Five Hundred Years of Words and Sounds (1983) 66

Millett, B. ‗The Saints‘ Lives of the Katherine Group and the Alliterative Tradition‘ Journal of English and Germanic Philology 87 (1988) Millett, B., 'The Origins of Ancrene Wisse: New Answers, New Questions' Medium Aevum 61 (1992), 206-228 Millett, B., ‗Mouvance and the medieval author: Re-editing Ancrene Wisse‘ in Minnis (ed.), Late Medieval Religious Texts and their Transmission (1991, 1994) [See also http://www.soton.ac.uk/~wpwt/mouvance/mouvance.htm for Bella Millett‘s essay ‗What is mouvance?‘] Millett, B., Ancrene Wisse, the Katherine Group, and the Wooing Group (1996) Millett, B., ‗Ancrene Wisse and the Conditions of Confession‘ English Studies 80, no. 3 (1999 June), 193-214 Millett, B., ‗Ancrene Wisse and the Book of Hours‘ in Renevey, D. and Whitehead, C. (eds.), Writing Religious Women – Female Spiritual and Textual Practices in Late Medieval England University of Wales Press (Cardiff, 2000), pp. 21-40 Millett, B., ‗Ancrene Wisse and the Life of Perfection‘ Leeds Studies in English 33, (2002), 53-76 Millett, B., ‗The Ancrene Wisse Group‘, in Edwards, A.S.G. (ed.), A Companion to Middle English Prose (2004) Perkins, N., ‗Reading the Bible in Sawles Warde and Ancrene Wisse‘ Medium Aevum 72 (2003), 207-37 Price, J., ‗―Inner‖ and ―Outer‖: Conceptualising the Body in Ancrene Wisse and Aelred‘s De Institutione Inclusarum‘ in Kratzmann, G. and Simpson, J. (eds.), Medieaval English Religious and Ethical Literature: Essays in Honour of G.H. Russell (1986) Raw, B., ‗The Prayers and Devotions in the Ancrene Riwle‘ in Rowland, B. (ed.), Chaucer and Middle English Studies in Honour of Rossell Hope Robbins (1974), 260-71 Renevey, D., 'Enclosed Desires: a Study of the Wooing Group', in Pollard, W.F. and Boenig, R. (eds) Mysticism and Spirituality in Medieval England (1997), pp. 39-62. Renevey, D., ‗Middle English Writings for Women: Ancrene Wisse‘ in Johnson, D. F. and Treharne, E. (eds) Readings in Medieval Texts: Interpreting Old and Middle English Literature (2005) Robertson, E. 'This Living Hand': Thirteenth-Century Female Literacy, Materialist Immanence, and the Reader of the Ancrene Wisse ‗Speculum 78, no. 1 (2003), 1-36 Rygiel, D., 'The Allegory of Christ the Lover Knight in Ancrene Wisse: An Experiment in Stylistic Analysis' Studies in Philology 73 (1976), 343-64 Rygiel, D., 'Structure and Style in Part 7 of Ancrene Wisse' Neuphililogische Mitteilungen 81 (1980), 47-56 Salih, S. ‗Performing Virginity: Sex and Violence in the Katherine Group‘ in Carlson, C. and Weisl, A. (ed. and introd.) Constructions of Widowhood and Virginity in the Middle Ages (1999) Salih, S., ‗Queering Sponsalia Christi: Virginity, Gender and Desire in the Early Middle English Anchoritic Texts‘ New Medieval Literatures 5 (2002), 155-75. Tolkien, J.R.R., 'Ancrene Wisse and Hali Meiðhad' Essays and Studies 14 (1929), 104-26. 67

Wada, Y. (ed.), A Companion to Ancrene Wisse (2003) Watson, N., ‗The Methods and Objectives of Thirteenth-Century Anchoritic Devotion‘ in Glasscoe, M. (ed.), The Mediaeval Mystical Tradition in England IV (1987) Wogan-Browne, J., ‗Saints‘ Lives and the Female Reader‘ Forum for Modern Language Studies 27 (1991), 314-32 Wogan-Browne, J., ‗The Virgin's Tale‘ in Evans, R. and Johnson, L. (ed. and introd.) Feminist Readings in Middle English Literature: The Wife of Bath and All Her Sect (1994) Wogan-Browne, J., Saints‟ Lives and Women‟s Literary Culture c. 1150-1300: Virginity and its Authorisations (2001) II. General Barratt, A., ‗Spiritual Writings and Religious Instruction‘ in Morgan, N. and Thomson, R. (eds.), The Cambridge History of the Book in Britain Volume II 1100-1400 (2008), pp. 340-366. Bernau, A., Salih, S. and Evans, R. (eds.), Medieval Virginities (2003) Dinshaw, C. and Wallace, D. (eds.), The Cambridge Companion to Medieval Women's Writing (2003) Elkins, S.K., Holy Women of Twelfth-Century England (1988) Fanous, S and Leyser, H (eds.), Christina of Markyate: a Twelfth-Century Holy Woman (2005) Frankis, J. ‗The Social Context of Vernacular Writing in Thirteenth-Century England: The Evidence of the Manuscripts‘ in Coss, P.R and Lloyd, S.D (eds) Thirteenth Century England I (1986) Gillespie, V. and Fanous, S. (eds.), The Cambridge Companion to Medieval English Mysticism (2011) (available online) Herbert-McAvoy, L. and Hughes-Edwards, M. (eds.), Anchorites, Wombs and Tombs (2005) Herbert-McAvoy, L. Rhetoric of the Anchorhold – Space, Place and Body within the Discourses of Enclosure (2008) Lewis, Katherine J, Menuge, N.J and Phillip, K.M. (eds.) Young Mediaeval Women (1999) Macdonald, A.A. et al (eds), The Broken Body: Passion Devotion in Late-Medieval Culture (1998) Meale, C. (ed.), Women and Literature in Britain, 1150-1500 (1993) Mulder-Bakker, A. (trans. Myra Heerspink Scholz) Lives of the Anchoresses: The Rise of the Urban Recluse in Medieval Europe (2005) Nichols, J.A and Shank, L.T (eds), Distant echoes: Medieval religious women I (1984) Nichols, J.A and Shank, L.T (eds), Peaceweavers: Medieval religious women II (1987) Robertson, E., Early English Devotional Prose and the Female Audience (1990) Ross, Ellen M., The Grief of God: Images of the Suffering Jesus in Late Medieval England (1997) Salih, S. Versions of Virginity in late Medieval England (2001) Stock, B., After Augustine: The Meditative Reader and the Text (Philadelphia, 2001) 68

Taylor, J. and Smith, L. (eds), Women, the Book and the Godly (1995) Warren, Ann K., Anchorites and their Patrons in Medieval England (1985) Wogan-Browne, J., ‗Chaste Bodies: Frames and Experiences‘ in Kay, S. and Rubin, M. (eds.), Framing Medieval Bodies (1994)

OLDER SCOTS LITERATURE Dr Sally Mapstone ([email protected]) This course will focus on the Scottish literature composed between c.1375 and c.1550. The options for study are diverse, and range from major historical works such as The Bruce and The Wallace, to the writings of Henryson, Dunbar, Douglas, and Lyndsay. There will be the opportunity to concentrate on the wealth of anonymous writing from the period, and its manuscript contexts, and to examine the development of popular genres including romance, tale collection and dream vision.

1550-1700 Michaelmas Term

THE LIFE AND DEATH OF THE SONNET IN THE SEVENTEENTH CENTURY: MILTON, DONNE AND OTHERS Professor Sharon Achinstein ([email protected]) This course will test the hypothesis that the sonnet was on the decline in the seventeenth-century, after the great age of sonneteering inaugurated by Petrarch and the silver poets of the sixteenth century. We will consider such topics as sequence; modes of address; vernacularity and linguistic nationalism; the themes of love v. empire; the social role of the sonnet; patronage and circulation; the question of private, occasional, and public poetry; rhetoric; the place of sonnets in manuscript collections; the histories of books; poetic subjectivity and objective thought; and we will also read a good many sonnets through close attention to language. Some contemporary literary theory on the sonnet will be introduced, as well as sonnets in European languages and some renaissance poetics, depending on the students‘ interests and proclivities. Students will be expected to work in the manuscript collections of the Bodleian library to prepare a class report on their chosen sonneteer. We will consider such authors as John Milton, John Donne, George Herbert, Lady Mary Wroth, William Drummond, Anne Bradstreet, Michael Drayton, Robert Herrick and others. Before starting, it would make sense to read Michael R. G. Spiller, The Development of the Sonnet: An Introduction (London: Routledge, 1992); and get hold of a copy of Petrarch, Canzoniere; or Thomas P. Roche, ed., Petrarch in English (Penguin, 2005). Week 1: Petrarchism: Liberty and Love As source for the sonnet form Petrarch brought to English writers a set of images, postures, and even political ideas about freedom, restraint, loyalty and choice. Possible readings include: Francesco Petrarch, Canzoniere; Sir Philip Sidney, Astrophil and Stella, Lady Mary Wroth, Pamphilia to Amphilanthus; William Herbert, Poems written by the Right Honorable William earl of Pembroke (1660); Fulke Greville, Caelica; Richard Fanshawe, ―Sonnets translated out of the Spanish‖; George Wither, ―Sonnets,‖ in The Workes of Master George Wither (1620), fols. Y7-Z1v; Robert Herrick, ―The bad season makes the Poet sad,‖ Hesperides (1648). Critical readings may include Greene and Kennedy.

69

Week 2: Monuments The slightest of forms, the sonnet nonetheless seeks monumentality. This week we will explore how. Possible Readings: Spenser, Ruins of Rome, from Complaints (1591; and compare du Bellay, Les antiquitez de Rome, 1558); Milton ―On Shakespeare‖ (not a sonnet, but what of that?); Anne Bradstreet, ―Upon some distemper of Body,‖ ―To my dear and Loving Husband,‖ ―To her Father with some verses,‖ ―On my dear Grandchild‖; William Drummond of Hawthornden, Flowers of Sion (Edinburgh, 1623). Robert Herrick, ―The parting verse, the feast there ended,‖ ―Upon his kinswoman Mistris Elizabeth Herrick,‖ ―Upon his Departure Hence,‖ ―The Pillar of Fame‖ from Hesperides (1648); George Herbert, ―Love I‖ and ―Love II‖ and others. Critical readings may include Johnson, Stewart. Week 3: Gifts What functions do sonnets serve in relation to the contex of their presentation within a social or communication network? In what ways are they meaningful presentations or salutations? The rhetoric of apostrophe. Possible readings: Donne, ―To E. of D. with six holy Sonnets‖; Herrick, ―To his faithfull friend, Master John Crofts, Cup-bearer to the King,‖ ―To the right Honourable Mildmay, Earl of Westmoreland,‖ ―To his Lovely Mistress,‖ ―To the Genius of his House,‖ ―To his worthy friend M. John Hall, Student of Grayes-Inne,‖ and others from Hesperides (1648); Milton, ―So soon hath time‖. The use of sonnets in commendatory verses to major works (e.g. Ralegh‘s tribute to Sir Arthur Gorges‘ translation of Lucan); Drayton, patronage sonnets (Sonet 58, ―Madam, my words cannot expresse‖); Sonnets in ms collections; sonnets in gift bindings, etc. Critical readings include Marotti, Davis, Latour. Week 4: Books This week we will explore how sonnets function within single volumes of poetry or across different editions of poetry: William Drummond of Hawthornden, Poems Amorous, funerall, divine (Edinburgh, 1616); Robert Herrick, Hesperides (1648); Herbert, The Temple (1633); Milton, 1645 and 1673 poems; Poems, by J. D. (1633); Drayton, Ideas Mirrour (1599; 1600; 1602; 1605; 1619); sonnets in manuscript collections (TBD). We may return to Lady Mary Wroth and ask about the relation of the sonnet sequence to the Urania, for example. This may take us to investigate the way authors selected their material, revised it, and made changes, testifying to the sonnet‘s potency and malleability. We will also explore manuscript additions and responses to sonnets. Critical readings include Marotti, Stewart Ch. 4. Weeks 5 & 6: Donne and Milton Our final two weeks will combine close historical work with close reading of two exemplary sonneteers: Donne and Milton. For Donne, we will explore the materialities of his texts and reflect on the nature of his thematic concern with corporeality; critical readings will include Tiffany and Beal. For Milton, we will explore the various publication histories and manuscripts associated with Milton‘s sonnets, including exploring the Trinity Manuscript, the volumes of 1645, 1673, and elsewhere, and the circumstances of his poems within patronage communication, as gifts, his translations, e.g. Italian sonneteering; ―To Mr Lawes,‖ in Choice Psalmes (1648); the Vane sonnet in George Sikes, Life and Death of Sir Henry Vane (1662); the publication of Fairfax, Cromwell, Vane and Blindness sonnets in Letters of State (1694); or in his letters, e.g. Letter to a Friend; the problems of dating; the ―hidden‖ sonnets in Paradise Lost. Primary Texts John Donne Poems, / by J. D. With elegies on the authors death (London, 1633).

70

Poems of John Donne, ed. Herbert J. C. Grierson (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1912). The Divine Poems/John Donne, ed., Helen Gardner (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 200). The Complete Poetry of John Donne, ed. John T. Shawcross (Garden City, NY: Anchor Books, 1967) The Complete Poems of John Donne, ed. Robin Robbins (Harlow: Longman, 2010) The Variorum Edition of the poetry of John Donne, ed. Gary A. Stringer, (Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 12005), vol. 7, pt. 1. Michael Drayton Works. Ed. William Hebel. 5 vols. Oxford: Blackwell, 1931-41. William Drummond of Hawthornden. Flowers of Zion (1623); Poems (1616; 1640: ed. Edward Phillips, Poems, by that most famous Wit, William Drummond of Hawthornden). The Poetical Works of William Drummond of Hawthornden, ed. Kastner, L. E. 2 vols. (Manchester, 1913); Bodl. URR A.4.32/3-4. Drummond‘s imitations of Petrarch are in Thomas Roche, ed. Petrarch in English (Penguin, 2005). Robert Fanshawe The Poems and Translations of Sir Richard Fanshawe, ed. Peter Davidson, 2 vols. (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1997), vol. 1. MSS: Bodleian MS Firth c.1.: tr. Gongora, Sonnets out of Spanish; Fanshawe tr., Guarini, Il Pastor Fido (London, 1647) Fulke Greville, Lord Brooke. Caelica (1633) in Certaine learned and elegant workes of the Right Honorable Fulke Lord Brooke (London, 1633) Caelica rpt. in Martha Foote Crow, ed., Elizabethan Sonnet-Cycles (London: 1896-8). Caelica, ed. Una Ellis-Fermor (Newton: The Gregynog Press, 1936). Selected Poems of Fulke Greville, ed. Thom Gunn (London: Faber, 1968). Greville, Life of Sidney (1652). William Habington Castara (1635; 1640) The Poems of William Habington, ed. with and intro. Kenneth Allott (Liverpool: University Press of Liverpool, 1948). George Herbert The Temple, sacred poems and private ejaculations (Cambr. 1633)

71

The English Poems of George Herbert, ed., Helen Wilcox (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2007) The Works of George Herbert, ed. F. E. Hutchinson (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1953). The Temple: A Diplomatic edition of the Bodleian Manuscript (Tanner 307)/George Herbert, ed. Mario A. Di Cesare (Binghamton: Medieval & Renaissance Texts & Studies, 1995). The Bodleian Manuscript of George Herbert‟s Poems: A Facsimile of Tanner 307, ed. Amy M. Charles and Mario A. Di Cesare (Delmar, NY: Scholars‘ Facsimiles, 1984). The Temple, facs. (Menston: Scolar Press, 1968) Robert Herrick Hesperides (1648) Hesperides, Scolar Press Facsimile (Menstone, 1969) The Poems of Robert Herrick , ed. L. C. Martin (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1965) John Milton Poems of Mr John Milton, Both English and Latin (1645) Poems, &c upon several occasions/ By Mr John Milton: both English and Latin (1673) Complete shorter poems of John Milton, ed. John Carey (Harlow: Longman, 1971). Complete Shorter Poems/John Milton, ed. Stella P. Revard (Oxford: Wiley-Blackwell, 2009). Poetical Works of John Milton, ed. Helen Darbishire (Oxford: Clarendon) Epistolarum Familiarum Liber Unus (1674) George Sikes, The Life and Death of Sir Henry Vane (1662) Henry Lawes, Choice Psalmes put into musick (1648) for sonnet, ―To my Friend Mr Henry Lawes‖ Trinity Manuscript, reproduced in: John Milton, Poems. Reproduced in Facsimile from the Manuscript in Trinity College, Cambridge (Menstone: Scolar Press, 1972) Francesco Petrarch Petrarch, Francesco. Petrarch‟s Lyric Poems, ed., and tr. Robert M. Durling. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1976. Sir Philip Sidney Astrophel and Stella (1591) Facsimile: (Menston: Scolar Press, 1970) Poems. Ed., William A. Ringler, Jr. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1962. Lady Mary Wroth The Poems of Lady Mary Wroth ed. J.A. Roberts (Baton Rouge: Louisiana State University Press,1983)

72

Love's Victory: the Penshurst Manuscript ed. M. Brennan (London: Roxburghe Club, 1988) The First Part of the Countess of Montgomery's Urania ed. J.A. Roberts (Binghamton, NY: Medieval & Renaissance Texts & Studies, 1995) The Second Part of the Countess of Montgomery's Urania ed. J.A. Roberts, S. Gossett and J. Mueller (Tempe, AZ: Renaissance English Text Society,1999) Secondary Texts Agamben, Giorgio. ―The Dream of Language,‖ in The End of the Poem (Stanford, 1999) Agamben, Giorgio. Stanzas: Word and Phantasm in Western Culture (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota, 19930. Alexander, Gavin. Writing after Sidney: The Literary Response to Sir Philip Sidney 1586-1640 (2007). Beal, Peter. 'John Donne and the Circulation of Manuscripts', in Cambridge History of the Book in Britain, vol. III, ed. Roger Lass (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2002), 122-126. Beal, Peter. In Praise of Scribes: Manuscripts and their Makers in Seventeenth-Century England (Oxford, 1998). Braden, Braden. The Classics and English Renaissance Poetry: Three case Studies (New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1978) Braden, Gordon. Petrarchan Love and the Continental Renaissance (New Haven: Yale UP, 1999). Bradshaw, Graham. ―Donne‘s challenge to the Prosodists,‖ Essays in Criticism 32:4 (1982). Bruno Latour, Rassembling the Social: An Introduction to Actor-Network Theory (Oxford UP, 2005) Cleanth Brooks. ―The Language of Paradox,‖ in The Well-Wrought Urn: Studies in the Structure of Poetry (London, 1969), 1-16 Coiro, Ann Baynes. Robert Herrick's Hesperides ana the Epigram Book Tradition (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1988) Davis, Natalie. ―Beyond the Market: Books as Gifts in Sixteenth-Century France,‖ Transactions of the Royal Historical Society, 5th Ser., vol 33 (London, 1983). De Grazia, Quilligan and Stallybrass, eds. Subject and Object in Renaissance Culture (Cambridge UP, 1996). Dobranski, Stephen B. Milton, Authorship and the Book Trade (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1999). Dobranski, Stephen B. Readers and Authorship in Early Modern England (Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 2005), ―The Incomplete Poems of John Donne,‖ and ―Herrick Unbound,‖ Douglas Trevor. ―George Herbert and the Scene of Writing,‖ in Historicism, Psychoanalysis and Early Modern Culture, ed. Carla Mazzio and Douglas Trevor (New York, 2000), 228-58. Dubrow, Heather. The Challenges of Orpheus: Lyric Poetry and Early Modern England (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 2008), Ch. 2, ―The Domain of Echo: Lyric Audiences‖

73

Dubrow, Heather. Echoes of Desire: English Petrarchism and Its Counterdiscourses (Ithaca: Cornell Univ. Press, 1995) Eliot, T. S. 'The Metaphysical Poets', in Selected Essays (London: Faber, 191). Elsky, Martin. 'George Herbert's Pattern Poems and the Materiality of Language: A New Approach to Renaissance Hieroglyphics', English Literary History, 50 (1983), 245-260. Empson, William, 'Donne and the Rhetorical Tradition', Kenyon Review, 11 (1949), 571-581. Ferry, Anne. The „Inward‟ Language: Sonnets of Wyatt, Sidney, Shakespeare, Donne (Chicago: University of Chicago, 1983), Ch. 5, pp. 215-246. Fish, Stanley. ―Masculine Persuasive Force: Donne and Verbal Power,‖ in Elizabeth Harvey and Katharine Eisaman Maus, eds., Soliciting Interpretation: Literary Theory and Seventeenth-Century English Poetry (Chicago: University of Chicago, 1990). Fish, Stanley. Self-Consuming Artifacts: The Experience of Seventeenth Century Literature (Berkeley, CA: University of CA, 1974) Freccero, John. ―The Fig Tree and the Laurel: Petrarch‘s Poetics,‖ Diacritics 5:1 (1975), 34-40; rpt. in Patricia Parker and David Quint, eds., Literary Theory/Renaissance Texts (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1986), 20-32. Freinkel, Lisa. Reading Shakespeare‟s Will: The Theology of Figure from Augustine to the Sonnets (New York: Columbia University Press, 2002), Ch. 2, ―Petrarch in the Shade of Laurel‖ Fumerton, Patricia, Cultural Aesthetics: Renaissance Literature and the Practice of Social Ornament (Chicago: University of Chicago, 1991), Ch. 3, ―Secret Arts: Elizabethan Miniatures and Sonnets‖ Goldberg, Jonathan. Desiring Women Writing: English Renaissance Examples (Stanford: Stanford Univ. Press, 1997) Greene, Roland. Post-Petrarchism: Origins and Innovations of the Western Lyric Sequence (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1991). Greene, Roland. Unrequited Conquests: Love and Empire in the Colonial Americas (Chicago: University of Chicago P, 1999) Guibbory, Achsah. Ceremony and Community from Herbert to Milton: Literature, Religion and Cultural Conflict in Seventeenth-Century England (Cambridge, 1998), pp. 80-118 Hammond, Gerald. Fleeting Things: English Poets and Poems, 1616-1660 (Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1990) Hannay, Margaret. Mary Sidney, Lady Wroth (London: Ashgate, 2010) Hanson, Elizabeth. ―Boredom and Whoredom: Reading Renaissance Women‘s Sonnet Sequences,‖ Yale Journal of the Humanities 10:1 (1997), 165-91. on canon formation Hardison, O.B. Prosody and Purpose in the English Renaissance (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1989). Harris, Gil Untimely Matter in the time of Shakespeare (Phila.: University of Penn Press, 2009), Ch. on Herbert.

74

Helgerson, Richard. A Sonnet from Carthage: Garcilaso de la Vega and the New Poetry of SixteenthCentury Europe (Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 2007). Heninger, S. K. ―Sidney and the Secularization of Sonnets,‖ in Fraistat. Nei, ed. Poems in their Place: The Intertextuality and Order of Poeic Collections (University of North Carolina Press, 1986), 66-94. Hosek, Chaviva and Patricia Parker, eds. Lyric Poetry: Beyond the New Criticism (Ithaca: Cornell UP, 1985). Ingram, Randall. "Robert Herrick and the Makings of Hesperides," SEL 38, no. 1 (Winter 1998): 131. Jack, Ian. The Italian Influence on Scottish Literature (Edinburgh, 1972), 113-144. On Drummond Janie Caves McCauley. "On the 'Childhood of the Yeare': Herrick's Hesperides New Year's Poems," George Herbert Journal 14, nos. 1-2 (Fall 1990-Spring 1991): 72-96. Johnson, Barbara. ―Monuments,‖ Persons and Things (Cambridge: Harvard UP, 2008), ch. Johnson, Barbara. ―Muteness Envy,‖ The Feminist Difference (Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1998), ch. 7. Johnson, Barbara. Persons and Things (Cambridge: Harvard UP, 2008), Ch. 3, ―Monuments‖ Kennedy, William J. The Site of Petrarchism: Early Modern National Sentiment in Italy, France, and England (Baltimore: JHU Press, 2003), chs. on Wroth. Kimmey, John L. ‗Order and Form in Herrick's Hesperides‘, JEGP 70 (1971), 255-68 Lamb, Mary Ellen. Gender and Authorship in the Sidney Circle (1982) Latour, Bruno. Reassembling the Social: An Introduction to Actor-Network-Theory (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2005). Laughlin, Rosemary M. "Anne Bradstreet: Poet in Search of Form." American Literature 42 (1970): 117. Leavis, F. R. 'The Line of Wit', in Revaluation: Tradition and Development in English Poetry (London: Chatto & Windus, 1936), ch. 1. Lewalski, Barbara Kiefer. Protestant Poetics and the Seventeenth-Century Religious Lyric. (Princeton, N.J.; Princeton UP, 1979). For Bradstreet and Herbert in particular Love, Harold. Scribal Publication in Seventeenth-Century England (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1993). Macdonald, Robert H., ed. The Library of William Drummond of Hawthendorn (Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press, 1971). Marcus, Leah. Unediting the Renaissance: Shakespeare, Marlowe, Milton (London: Routledge, 1996), Ch. 6, ―John Milton‘s Voice‖ Marjorie Swann, Curiosities and Texts: The Culture of Collecting in Early Modern England (Philadephia, 2001): for Herrick Marotti, Arthur F. ―‘Love is not Love‘: Elizabethan Sonnet Sequences and the Social Order,‖ ELH 49 (1982), 396-428. Marotti, Arthur F. Manuscript, Print and the English Renaissance Lyric (Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1995), Chs. on mss collections, print and the lyric. 75

Marotti, Arthur F., 'Manuscript, Print, and the Social History of the Lyric', in The Cambridge Companion to John Donne, ed. Guibbory, Achsah (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2004), 5279. Marotti, Arthur. John Donne: Coterie Poet (1986) Masson, David. Drummond of Hawthornden (London, 1873) McDowell, Nicholas. ―Dante and the Distraction of Lyric in Milton‘s ‗To My Friend Mr Henry Lawes,‖ Review of English Studies 59: 239 (2007), 232-254. Miller, Naomi and Gary Waller, eds., Reading Mary Wroth: Representing Alternatives in Early Modern England, ed. Naomi J. Miller and Gary Waller (Knoxville: Univ. of Tennessee Press, 1991). Moore, Mary B. Women Sonneteers and Petrarchism (Carbondale, IL: Southern Illinois UP, 2000). Mortimer, Anthony, ed. Petrarch‟s Canzoniere in the English Renaissance (New York, 2005): good anthology of Eng. Ren. poets‘ translations. Neely, Carol Thomas. ―The Structure of English Renaissance Sonnet Sequences,‖ ELH 45 (1978), 35989. Norbrook, David. Poetry and Politics in the English Renaissance (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2002). Post, Jonathan. 'Irremediably Donne', in English Lyric Poetry: The Early Seventeenth Century (London and New York: Routledge, 1999), 1-22. Pugh, Syrithe. Herrick, Fanshawe and the Politics of Intertextuality (London: Ashgate, 2010). Quilligan, Maureen. "The Constant Subject: Instability and Authority in Wroth's Urania Poems," in Soliciting Interpretation: Literary Theory and Seventeenth-CenturyEnglish Poetry, ed. Elizabeth D. Harvey and Katharine Eisaman Maus (Chicago: Univ. of Chicago Press, 1990), pp. 307-35. Roche, Thomas. Petrarch and the English Sonnet Sequences (New York: AMS Press, 1989). Roche, Thomas. Petrarch in English (Harmondsworth: Penguin, 2005). Saunders, Ben. Desiring Donne: Poetry, sexuality, interpretation (Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 2006). Schoenfeldt, Michael C. Power and Prayer: George Herbert and Renaissance Courtship. (Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1991). Schoenfeldt. Michael C. 'That Ancient Heat': Sexuality and Spirituality in the Temple', in Soliciting Interpretation, Literary Theory and Seventeenth-Century English Poetry, (eds.) Elizabeth D. Harvey and Katharine Eisaman Maus (Chicago: The University of Chicago Press, 1990,) 273–305, Schweitzer, Ivy. The Work of Self-Representation: Lyric Poetry in Colonial New England. Chapel Hill: U of North Carolina P, 1991. for Bradstreet Semler, L. E. "Robert Herrick, the Human Figure, and the English Mannerist Aesthetic," Studies in Engush Literature 35, no. 1 (Winter 1995): 105-21. Shawcross, John. ―Speculations on the Dating of the Trinity MS of Milton‘s Poems,‖ Modern Language Notes 75 (1960), 11-17. 76

Shawcross, John. ―The Arrangement and Order of John Donne‘s Poems,‖ in Fraistat. Nei, ed. Poems in their Place: The Intertextuality and Order of Poeic Collections (University of North Carolina Press, 1986), 119-163. Spiller, R. G. The Sonnet Sequence: A Study of Its Strategies (New York: Twayne, 1997). Stachniewski, John. 'John Donne: The Despair of the "Holy Sonnets"', English Literary History, 48 (1981), 677-705. Stewart, Susan. ―Preface to a Lyric History,‖ in Marshall Brown, ed., The Uses of Literary History (Durham: Duke University Press, 1995), 199-218. Stewart, Susan. Poetry and the Fate of the Senses (Chicago: University of Chicago, 2002), Ch. 4, ―Facing, Touching, and Vertigo‖; Ch. 5, ―The Forms and Numbers of Time‖ (for Monuments) Strier, Richard. Love Known: Theology and Experience in George Herbert‟s Poetry (Chicago, 1983); Stull, William. ―‘Why are Not Sonnets Made of Thee?‘ A new context for the ‗Holy Sonnets‘ of Donne, Herbert, and Milton,‖ Modern Philology 80:2 (1982), 129-35. Targoff, Ramie. John Donne, Body and Soul. (Chicago: University of Chicago, 2008). Thomas Crane, Mary Thomas. "Herrick's Cultural Materialism," George Herbert Journal 14, nos. 1-2 (Fall 1990-Spring 1991) Thomas, H. ―Three Translators of Gongora,‖ Revue Hispanique XLVIII (1920), 230-43. On Fanshawe Tiffany, Daniel. Infidel Poetics: Riddles, Nightlife, Substance (Chicago: University of Chicago, 2009), Ch. 2, ―Riddlecraft‖ Tiffany, Daniel. Toy Medium: Materialism and the Modern Lyric (Los Angeles: University of California Press, 2000), Ch. 1, ―Poetics and Materialism: Lyric Substance‖ Waller, Gary F. The Sidney Family Romance: Mary Wroth, William Herbert, and the early modern construction of gender (Detroit: Wayne State University Press, 1993), on William Herbert Warley, Christopher. Sonnet sequences and social distinction in Renaissance England (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2005) Watson, Robert, The Rest is Silence: Death as Annihilation in the English Renaissance (Los Angeles: University of California Press, 1994), ch. 5. on Donne White, Helen C., The Metaphysical Poets: A Study in Religious Experience (London: CollierMacmillan, 1962). White, Peter, ed. Puritan Poets and Poetics: Seventeenth-Century American Poetry in Theory and Practice (University Park: Pennsylvania State UP, 1985). for Bradstreet Winters, Ivor. Forms of Discovery: Critical and Historical Essays on the Forms of the Short Poem in English (Chicago: Swallow Press, 1967)

77

1550-1700 Michaelmas Term

THE SERMON & EARLY MODERN ENGLISH LITERARY CULTURE Professor Peter McCullough ([email protected]) This C-course will give students the opportunity to study in some depth one of the most important, and most neglected, literary genres in the early modern period. Its primary aim will be to provide a detailed understanding of the sermon in its own right, with particular attention to the conventions of the genre and to rhetoric (in all its manifestations, from style, to persuasion, to delivery and reception). It will also have wider appeal as a course which treats early modern textual production and transmission, performance, rhetoric, prose style, and polemic. We will use as our primary authors the great contemporaries Lancelot Andrewes (1555-1626) and John Donne (1572 – 1631), two prose artists with fundamentally different religious sensibilities, views of preaching and of language itself, as well as prose styles. Study of their works offers not only an unrivalled way to learn about the many contested aspects of religious (and the often indistinguishable political) culture of the period, but also the opportunity to reintroduce formal and aesthetic critical approaches to religious literary texts after decades of predominantly historical, political, and doctrinal readings. Understanding the sermon as originally intended – performance art – will encourage students to consider the relationship between textual composition, revision, and delivery (issues too often considered with exclusive reference to stage plays of the period); at least three set texts discussed in seminar will be delivered in the historically accurate setting of Lincoln College chapel (1629). Attention to textual transmission (both manuscript and print) will exploit the unrivalled sermon holdings of the Bodleian Library, and encourage application of skills learned in the B-course. The course will draw on Prof. McCullough‘s expertise as biographer and editor of Andrewes, and on work in progress as General Editor of the Oxford Edition of the Sermons of John Donne. Although the course will challenge the treatment of sermons as a footnote to literary history, it will also -- precisely by asserting the centrality of the sermon to literary culture -- encourage the exploration of how this culturally pervasive genre influenced others that are now more familiar in the canon. Extensive reading in Andrewes, Donne, and their contemporaries, as well as a wide-ranging body of secondary critical and historical sources, will inform each week‘s seminar, for which two contrasting specimen sermons will be set for detailed discussion. The seminars will be ordered to introduce first matters of genre and style, then move to wider, more contextualized readings, and end with an examination of the sermon‘s presence in three now more familiar literary texts (Marprelate and Nashe‘s pamphlets, Bartholomew Fair, and Twelfth Night). Week 1: Sermon Genre & Structure Week 2: Words & Things Week 3: Tropes, Figures, Grammar Week 4: The Preacher‘s Theatrical Self Week 5: Preaching Politics Week 6: Responses, Parodies, & Uses Texts may be difficult to secure during the Long Vacation, but students should at a minimum please read in advance the biographies of Andrewes and Donne in the Oxford Dictionary of National Biography; the sermons in Evelyn Simpson, ed., John Donne: Sermons on the Psalms and Gospels (available in paperback; University of California Press); and the contents of the website http://www.cems-oxford.org/donne. For Andrewes, introduction and any sermons in Peter McCullough, ed., Lancelot Andrewes: Selected Sermons & Lectures (Oxford, 2005), or G M Story, ed., Lancelot

78

Andrewes: Sermons (Oxford, 1967). For background, please begin as soon as possible to familiarise yourself with the contents of Peter Mack, Elizabethan Rhetoric: Theory and Practice (Cambridge, 2002), and Peter McCullough, Hugh Adlington, and Emma Rhatigan, The Oxford Handbook of the Early Modern Sermon (Oxford, 2011).

RENAISSANCE TRAGICOMEDY Dr John Pitcher ([email protected]) In the Renaissance, poets and dramatists imitated classical writers and experimented with classical genres. Often they tried to outdo their predecessors by varying the form they had inherited (e.g. the ode, or the singing contest between shepherds); sometimes they acknowledged that they had done nothing more than give a new name to an old form. Only a very few of their literary forms (e.g. the sonnet) was entirely new. One form that seemed new and special to them, and which some of them claimed they had created afresh, was tragicomedy. This is the form that this C course for the M.St. in Michaelmas Term 2012 is devoted to—tragicomedy, the dramatic genre invented (or seized on) by Euripides, re-invented in Renaissance Italy after the publication of Aristotle‘s Poetics, and developed in the English public theatres in the early seventeenth century. Students taking this course will be used to the concepts of tragedy and comedy, and they will have read and seen many examples in Shakespeare and other writers. They may be less familiar with Euripides, Tasso and Marston, and with the early modern debates about the origins and characteristics of tragicomedy. The aim of this course is to set out, in broad terms, a narrative and a theoretical framework for the genre, providing opportunities to examine particular plays, their contexts in society (the city state of Athens or the elite court of the d‘Este family), and the innovations introduced into tragicomedy, particularly in the course of the sixteenth century. The course ends with three of Shakespeare‘s plays viewed from this generic perspective. A note on translations and other reading: nine of the texts on the course are in Greek or Latin or Italian. The translations in the Penguin Classics, Worlds Classics and Loeb editions are all suitable, as are Lattimore‘s versions of Euripides etc. Particular texts need detailed annotation (e.g. Halliwell‘s commentary on Aristotle‘s Poetics). Seventeenth century translations of Tasso and Guarini are valuable, in some cases crucial (e.g. Marston used the 1602 Dymoke version of Il Pastor Fido when writing The Malcontent), but they need to be supplemented with modern ones. Students taking the course will receive further guidance about translations just before the start of Michaelmas Term 2012. Editions of some of the plays are very good (e.g. the Jernigan and Marchegiani edition and translation of the Aminta); again, these will be recommended before the course begins. The secondary literature—a mix of newer with older criticism and scholarship—is only a beginning, and will need to be added to. This is especially true of critical writing on Shakespeare, which is vast. Week 1: What is Tragedy, and what is Comedy? Tragedy and mixed tragedy in antiquity, and tragicomedy in the Renaissance were self-reflexive in varying degrees. In this class particular attention will be paid to consciousness of genre. Students should familarise themselves with the essays in David Duff (ed.), Modern Genre Theory (1999), as well as the following: Sophocles, Oedipus the King Aristophanes, Frogs 79

Aristotle, Poetics Hoy, Cyrus, The Hyacinth Room: An Investigation into the Nature of Comedy, Tragedy, and Tragicomedy (1964) Easterling, P.E. (ed.), The Cambridge Companion to Greek Tragedy (1997) Silk, M.S., Aristophanes and the Definition of Comedy (2002) Joe Sachs‘s essay on the Poetics in the Internet Encyclopaedia of Philosophy Week 2: Mixed Tragedy - or why does Tragicomedy exist? Euripides‘ experiments with tragedy—new gods, impossible escapes from what seems ineluctable, different moods and feelings—have been of special interest to modern classical scholars. Did Euripides invent tragicomedy in all but name, and did the ancient world chose to forget what he had done? Euripides, Alcestis, Iphigenia at Tauris and Iphigenia at Aulis Burnett, Anne Pippin, Catastrophe Survived (1971) Knox, Bernard, Word and Action: Essays on the Ancient Theater (1979) Foster, Verna A., The Name and Nature of Tragicomedy (2004) Hirst, David L., Tragicomedy (1984) Week 3: Pastoral Tragicomedy: boys, eclogues and satyrs During the sixteenth century, Italian writers and academics in ducal courts and in the universities read the newly rediscovered Poetics, and vehemently disputed the nature of tragedy. Out of this ferment (and Virgil‘s Eclogues), Tasso created a new form, tragicomedy, the play of boys with girls with satyrs, and then Guarini perfected it—at least that‘s what Guarini said happened. Is it true? Tasso, Aminta Guarini, Il Pastor Fido Virgil, Eclogues Herrick, M. T., Tragicomedy: Its Origin and Development in Italy, France and England (1955) Bernard Weinberg, ‗The Quarrel over Guarini‘s Pastor Fido‘, in A History of Literary Criticism in the Italian Renaissance (2 vols. 1961), 2, 1074-1112 Louise George Clubb, Italian Drama in Shakespeare‟s Time (1989) Maguire, Nancy Klein (ed.), Renaissance Tragicomedy: Exploration in Genre and politics (1987) Allan H. Gilbert (ed.), Literary Criticism: Plato to Dryden (1940) Week 4: Tragicomedy in England: (1) shepherds, boys and satyrs In the early 1580s, Sidney deplored the mongrel plays he saw acted in the public theatres, with their confusions of manners and form, and the players‘ ignorance of what proper tragedy was. Serious attempts to bring Italian tragicomedy to the aid of the public stage began in England around 1600, in

80

unusual circumstances, with even more unusual connections with satire and public criticism on court and state matters. John Marston, The Malcontent Samuel Daniel, The Queen‟s Arcadia and Hymen‟s Triumph Philip Sidney, A Defence of Poetry David Orr, Italian Renaissance Drama in England Before 1625 (1970) G. K. Hunter, ‗Italian Tragicomedy on the English Stage‘, Renaissance Drama, 6 (1973), 123-148 James J. Yoch, ‗A Greater Power Than We Can Contradict: The Voice of Authority in the Staging of Italian Pastorals‘, The Elizabethan Theatre, VIII (1982), ed. G. R. Hibbard, 164-87 Lucy Munro, Children of the Queen‟s Revels (2005) Week 5: Tragicomedy in England: (2) et in Arcadia ego Tragicomedy is sometimes defined simply as tragedy without death—promising the catastrophe but ultimately sparing the audience the tragic ordeal. How far the form might deal with the deathliness of ‗civilisation‘ (control of desire, greed and calumny at court) and the loss of the Golden Age was a question the English public stage began to ask during the early seventeenth century. Samuel Daniel, ‗A Pastoral‘ and ‗Ulysses and the Siren‘ John Fletcher, The Faithful Shepherdess and Philaster Lee Bliss, ‗Tragicomic Romance for the King‘s Men, 1609-11: Shakespeare, Beaumont and Fletcher‘ in A.R. Braunmuller (ed.), Comedy from Shakespeare to Sheridan (1986) Philip J. Finkelpearl, Court and Country Politics in the Plays of Beaumont and Fletcher (1990) Mukherji, Subha, and Lyne, Raphael (eds.), Early Modern Tragicomedy (2007) Week 6: Shakespeare‘s versions of mixed comedy and tragicomedy It is often said that Shakespeare‘s interest in tragicomedy begins inside his comedies and tragedies, and that he combines it with romance at certain points. Does it help to understand these combinations in terms of the ‗Guarini phenomenon‘; did Italian tragicomedy help him to clarify what he wanted to say in his later plays? Much Ado About Nothing All‟s Well that Ends Well The Winter‟s Tale Robert Henke, Pastoral Transformations: Italian Tragicomedy and Shakespeare‟s Late Plays (1997) Barbara A. Mowat, ―‗What's in a Name?‖ Tragicomedy, Romance, or Late Comedy‖ in Richard Dutton and Jean E. Howard (eds.), A Companion to Shakespeare's Works 4 (2005)

81

1660-1830 Michaelmas Term

WOMEN‘S POETRY 1700-1830 Dr Christine Gerrard ([email protected]) This course will explore the rich diversity of verse written by women poets during the eighteenth century and Romantic era. The approach will be thematic and generic, focusing on issues such as manuscript versus print culture, women‘s coterie writing, the imitation and contestation of male poetic models, amatory and libertine poetry, public and political verse on issues such as dynastic struggle, revolution and slavery, and representations of domestic and manual labour. Students will be encouraged to explore the work of less familiar female poets and to pursue original lines of research. We will be paying particular attention to the work of Ann Finch, Sarah Fyge Egerton, Mary Collier, Mary Leapor, Lady Mary Wortley Montagu, Martha Fowke, Anna Laetitia Barbauld, Ann Yearsley, Ann Robinson, Charlotte Smith, Hannah More and Anna Seward. Week 1: Women in Nature Texts: Anne Finch, ‗Upon the Hurricane‘, ‗A Nocturnal Reverie‘; Martha Fowke, ‗An Invitation to a Country Cottage‘; Anna Laetitia Barbauld, ‗A Summer Evening‘s Meditation‘; Ann Yearsley, ‗Clifton Hill‘; Anna Seward ‗To The Poppy‘. Background texts: Bridget Keegan, British Labouring-class Nature Poetry, 1730-1837 (2008); Christine Gerrard, ‗The Country and the City‘, in The History of British Women‟s Writing, 1690-1750, vol. 4, ed. Ros Ballaster (2010). Week 2: The Rights and Wrongs of Women Texts: Sarah Fyge Egerton, ‗The Liberty‘ and ‗The Emulation‘; Anne Finch, ‗The Spleen‘; Mary Leapor, ‗Man the Monarch‘; Lady Mary Wortley Montagu, ‗The Lover‘ and ‗On the Death of Mrs Bowes‘; Anna Laetitia Barbauld, ‗The Rights of Woman‘. Background texts: Mary Wollestonecraft, A Vindication of the Rights of Woman (1792); Helena Maria Williams, Letters from France (1793). Week 3: The Construction of Beauty Texts: Anne Finch, ‗The Agreeable‘; Martha Fowke, ‗Clio‘s Picture‘; Mary Leapor, ‗Mira‘s Picture‘ and ‗Dorinda at her Glass‘; Lady Mary Wortley Montagu, ‗Satturday: The Smallpox‘; Mary Jones, ‗After the Smallpox‘. Background texts: Kathryn R. King, ‗The Constructions of Femininity‘, in Christine Gerrard (ed.), The Blackwell Companion to Eighteenth-Century Poetry; Tita Chico, Designing Women: The Dressing Room in Eighteenth Century Women‟s Literature (2005). Week 4: Friendship, Patronage and independence Texts: Mary Leapor, ‗An Epistle to Artemisia: On Fame‘; Mary Jones, ‘An Epistle to Lady Bowyer‘; Hanna More, Preface to Ann Yearsley, Poems on Several Occasions (1785); Yearsley, ‗On Mrs Montagu‘ and ‗To Stella: on a Visit to Mr Montagu‘. Background Texts: Carol Barash; English Women‟s Poetry, 1649-1714: Politics, Community and Linguistic Authority; Moira Ferguson, Eighteenth-Century Women Poets: Nation, Class and Gender.

82

Week 5: Women and Work Texts: Stephen Duck, The Threshers‘s Labour; Mary Collier, The Woman‟s Labour; Mary Leapor, Crumble Hall; Ann Yearsley, To Mr ***, an Unlettered Poet; on Genius Improved‘; Anna Laetitia Barbauld, ‗Washing Day‘. Background texts: Donna Landry, The Muses of Resistance: Laboring-Class Women's Poetry in Britain, 1739-1796 (Cambridge University Press, 1990; paperback reprint 2005); Bridget Keegan, British Labouring-class Nature Poetry, 1730-1837 (2008). Week 6: Women and Slavery Texts: Hannah More, Slavery: A Poem (1787), Ann Yearsley, A Poem on the Inhumanity of the Slave Trade (1788). I also suggest that you look at other poems and material in the online collection assembled by Brycchan Carey at: http://www.brycchancarey.com/slavery/poetry.htm Main Textual Sources Fairer, David, and Christine Gerrard, Eighteenth-Century Poetry: An Annotated Anthology (Blackwell, 1999). Ashfield, Anthony, ed. Romantic Women Poets, 1770-1838: an Anthology and Romantic Women Poets, 1772-1848: an Anthology. ( 2 vols., Manchester UP, 1998). Select Bibliography Armstrong, Isobel and Virginia Blain, eds. Women's Poetry in the Enlightenment: The Making of a Canon, 1730-1820. Palgrave Macmillan, 1998. Ballaster, Ros., ed., The History of British Women‟s Writing, 1690-1750, vol. 4, Palgrave Macmillan, 2010. Barash, Carol, English Women‟s Poetry, 1649-1714: Politics, Community and Linguistic Authority (Oxford: OUP, 1996). Chico, Tita, Designing Women: The Dressing Room in Eighteenth Century English literature and Culture, Bucknell University Press, 2005. Breen, Jennifer, ed. Women Romantic Poets, 1785-1832.. London: Everyman, 1992. B Brycchan Carey, Markman Ellis, and Sara Salih Discourses of Slavery and Abolition: Britain and its Colonies, 1760-1838 (Basingstoke, Palgrave Macmillan, 2004). Colman, George and Thornton Bonnell. Poems by Eminent Ladies. 1755. Dyce, Alexander. Specimens of British Poetesses. London: 1829. Reprinted many times. Feldman, Paula R., ed. British Women Poets of the Romantic Era. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins, 1997. ---------------- and Daniel Robinson, ed. A Century of Sonnets: : The Romantic-Era Revival, 1750-1850 Oxford UP, 2002. ----------------- and Theresa M. Kelley, eds. Romantic Women Writers: Voices and Countervoices. Hanover: University Press of New England, 1995.

83

Franklin, Caroline, ed. The Romantics: Women Poets, 1770-1830. Bristol: Thoemmes Press, 1996. Fullard, Joyce, ed. British Women Poets 1660-1800: An Anthology. Troy: New York, 1990. Ferguson, Moira, Eighteenth-Century Women Poets: Nation, Class and Gender (New York, 1995). Homans, Margaret. Women Writers and Poetic Identity. Princeton, 1980. Jones, Vivien, ed. Women and Literature in Britain, 1700-1800. Cambridge UP, 2000. Kramer, Harriet Linkin, and Stephen Behrendt, eds. Romanticism and Women Poets: Opening the Doors of Reception. University Press of Kentucky, 1999. Leighton, Angela and Margaret Reynolds, ed. Victorian Women Poets: An Anthology. UK: Blackwell, 1995. Lonsdale, Roger, ed. Eighteenth-Century Women Poets. New York: Oxford University Press, 1990. Miller, Nancy K. Subject to Change: Reading Feminist Writing. Columbia University Press, 1990. ----------------, ed. Poetics of Gender. Columbia University Press, 1986. Moulin, Jeanine, ed. La Posie Feminine Franaise. 2 Vols. Paris: Seghers, 1966. Vol I: du XIIe sicle au XIX sicle. Vol II: Epoque Moderne. Prescott, Sarah and David E. Shuttleton, ed. Women and Poetry, 1660-1750. Palgrave Macmillan, 2003. Uphaus, Robert W. and Gretchen Foster, ed. The "Other" Eighteenth Century: English Women of Letters, 1660-1800. East Lansing: Colleagues Press, 1991. Wilcox, Helen, ed. Women and Literature in Britain, 1500-1700. Cambridge UP, 1996. Wilson, Katherine M. and Frank K. Warne. Women Writers of the Seventeenth Century. University of Georgia Press, 1989. Wu, Duncan. Romantic Women Poets: An Anthology Cambridge: At the University Press, 1996.

LETTERS AS LITERATURE Dr Louise Curran ([email protected]) The long eighteenth century has often been called the great age of letter writing, a time when correspondence flourished both as a literary form and a social practice. This option will explore how authors in the period used letters for a variety of purposes. We will investigate the controversies (legal and literary) surrounding the publication of letters in the early part of the period, including the case of Pope v. Curll (1741) regarding letters and copyright; authors who edited their letters to shape and influence their posthumous reputations (for example, Samuel Richardson and Anna Seward); the afterlife of once-private letters and their place in the construction of public literary celebrity (notably of Samuel Johnson and Thomas Gray); how letters often blur the line between the biographical and fictional in intriguing ways (as is the case with Frances Burney and Jane Austen‘s epistolary writings), and what gets elided when letters translate from manuscript to print. In summary, the course will investigate the influence of the history of letters on the interpretation of authorship.

84

1. John Wilmot, Earl of Rochester The Letters of John Wilmot, Earl of Rochester ed. Jeremy Treglown (Blackwell, 1980); editions of Rochester‘s letters in the eighteenth century (ECCO copies); The Rochester-Savile Letters: 1671-1680, ed. John Harold Wilson (Columbus: Ohio State University, 1941). 2. Alexander Pope Alexander Pope: Selected Letters, ed. Howard Erskine-Hill (OUP, 2000); selections from The Correspondence of Alexander Pope, ed. George Sherburn, 5 vols (Oxford, 1956). James A. Winn, A Window in the Bosom: The Letters of Alexander Pope (1977); Paul Baines and Pat Rogers, Edmund Curll, Bookseller (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2007); Introduction to The Prose Works of Alexander Pope, Vol. I: The Earlier Works, 1711-1720, ed. Norman Ault (Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1936); ‗Pope v. Curl [sic] (1741)‘, 2Atk.342, Primary Sources on Copyright (1450-1900), ed. L. Bently and M. Kretschmer (www.copyrighthistory.org). 3. Samuel Richardson Selected Letters of Samuel Richardson, ed. John Carroll (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1964); The Richardson-Stinstra Correspondence and Stinstra‟s Prefaces to Clarissa, ed. William C. Slattery (Carbondale and Edwardsville: Southern Illinois University Press, 1969); I will provide some manuscript facsimiles. A. D. McKillop, Samuel Richardson: Printer and Novelist, 2nd edn (Hamden, Conn.: Shoe String Press: 1960); Tom Keymer, Richardson‟s „Clarissa‟ and the Eighteenth-Century Reader (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1992); Peter Sabor, ‗―The Job I Have Perhaps Rashly Undertaken‖: Publishing the Complete Correspondence of Samuel Richardson‘, Eighteenth-Century Life 35.1 (2011): 9-28; compare SR‘s letters to other novelists‘ correspondence, e.g. Letters of Laurence Sterne, ed. Lewis Perry Curtis (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1935) and The Correspondence of Henry and Sarah Fielding, ed. Martin C. Battestin and Clive T. Probyn (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1993). 4. Johnson, Thrale, Hawkins, and Boswell Selections from The Letters of Samuel Johnson, ed. Bruce Redford, 5 vols. (Oxford, 1992-4). Selections from Hester Thrale, The Anecdotes of the Late Samuel Johnson (1786), Sir John Hawkins's Life, which appeared as the first volume of Hawkins's 1787 edition of Johnson's Works; and James Boswell, Life of Samuel Johnson, LL.D (1791). Bruce Redford, Designing the Life of Johnson (OUP, 2002); Keymer, Tom, ‗Letters about nothing‘, The Cambridge Companion to Samuel Johnson, ed. Greg Clingham (Cambridge University Press, 1997); Freya Johnson, 'Correspondence', in Samuel Johnson in Context, ed. Jack Lynch (Cambridge University Press, 2011). 5. Gray and Mason Thomas Gray, The Poems of Mr. Gray. To which are prefixed Memoirs of his Life and Writings by W. Mason, M.A. (1775) Ian Jack, ‗Gray in his Letters‘, Fearful Joy: Papers from the Thomas Gray Bicentenary Conference, ed. James Downey and Ben Jones, 20–36 (Montreal: McGill-Queen‘s University Press, 1974); Bruce Redford, The Converse of the Pen: Acts of Intimacy in the Eighteenth-Century Familiar Letter (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1986), 95–132; Heidi Thomson, ‗The Editor‘s Subject: William Mason‘s Construction of Thomas Gray‘, Books and Bibliography: Essays in Commemoration of Don McKenzie, ed. John Thomson (Wellington: Victoria University Press, 2002); Stephen Clarke, ‗Boswell and Mason, Johnson and Gray: an Encounter‘, Age of Johnson, 20 (2010): 95–109.

85

6. Austen and Burney Jane Austen, Selected Letters, ed. Vivien Jones (OUP, 2009); Frances Burney, Journals and Letters, ed. Sabor and Triode (Penguin, 2001). Introductions to Letters of Jane Austen, ed. R. W. Chapman, 2nd edn (OUP, 1979) and Jane Austen‟s Letters, ed. Deidre Le Faye, 3rd edn (OUP, 1995); Carol Houlihan Flynn, ‗The letters‘, The Cambridge Companion to Jane Austen, ed. Edward Copeland and Juliet McMaster (CUP, 1997); John Wiltshire, ‗Journals and letters‘, The Cambridge Companion to Frances Burney, ed. Peter Sabor (CUP, 2007); Lorna Clark, ‗Epistolarity in Frances Burney‘, The Age of Johnson, 20, 193-222. Background reading Altman, Janet Gurkin, Epistolarity: Approaches to a Form (Columbus: Ohio State University Press, 1982) Brant, Clare, Eighteenth-Century Letters and British Culture (Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan, 2006) Bray, Joe, The Epistolary Novel: Representations of Consciousness (Routledge, 2003) Ellis, Kenneth, The Post Office in the Eighteenth Century: A Study in Administrative History (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1958) Epistolary Histories: Letters, Fiction, Culture, ed. Amanda Gilroy and W. M. Verhoeven (Charlottesville VA: University Press of Virginia, 2000) Goodman, Dena, Becoming a Woman in the Age of Letters (Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press, 2009) Halsband, Robert, ‗Editing the Letters of Letter-Writers‘, Studies in Bibliography , Vol. 11, (1958), pp. 25-37 Heckendorn Cook, Elizabeth, Epistolary Bodies: Gender and Genre in the Eighteenth-Century Republic of Letters (Stanford: Stanford University Press, 1996) Kauffman, Linda, Discourses of Desire: Gender, Genre and Epistolary Fictions (Ithaca, NY, and London: Cornell University Press, 1986) Mitchell, Linda C., ‗Letter-Writing Instruction Manuals in Seventeenth- and Eighteenth-Century England‘, Letter-Writing Manuals and Instruction from Antiquity to the Present, ed. Carol Poster and Linda C. Mitchell (Columbia, SC: The University of South Carolina Press, 2007) Redford, Bruce, The Converse of the Pen: Acts of Intimacy in the Eighteenth-Century Familiar Letter (Chicago: University of Chicago Press,1986) Rose, Mark, Authors and Owners: Invention of Copyright (Cambridge MA: Harvard University Press, 1993) The Familiar Letter in the Eighteenth Century, ed. Anderson, Howard and Philip B. Caghlian and Irvin Ehrenpreis (Lawrence: University of Kansas, 1966) Whyman, Susan, The Pen and the People: English Letter Writers 1660-1800 (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2009) Zaczek, Barbara Maria, Censored Sentiments: Letters and Censorship in Epistolary Novels and Conduct Material (Newark: University of Delaware Press, 1997)

86

1800-1914 Michaelmas Term

WILLIAM WORDSWORTH Professor Stephen Gill ([email protected]) Text based and primarily historical in approach, the course will explore the phases of Wordsworth‘s career across a wide range of poetry and prose. The self-presentation in the 1799 and 1805 versions of The Prelude will be used as a way in to our investigation of Wordsworth‘s achievement. The class text will be the edition William Wordsworth in the ‗21st-Century Oxford Authors‘ series, ed. Stephen Gill (Oxford: 2010; pbk, 2011). Further reading It cannot but seem immodest to say so, but the fact is that for this course the best preparation would be to immerse yourself in the primary texts—the poems and prose—and to familiarize yourself with the following of my own contributions to Wordsworth scholarship: William Wordsworth: A Life (OUP, 1989); The Cambridge Companion to Wordsworth (CUP, 2003); Wordsworth‟s Revisitings (OUP, 2011). Further secondary reading will of course be recommended during the seminar.

AESTHETICISM AND DECADENCE Dr Stefano Evangelista ([email protected]) This course concentrates on the literature of the Victorian fin de siècle, paying special attention to the two most prominent, interrelated literary phenomena of those years: Aestheticism and Decadence. From the 1860s until the beginning of the twentieth century writers linked to these movements ask readers to question the habits, conventions and values at the heart of nineteenth-century culture. We will ask how writings from this period promote literary and linguistic innovation, how they challenge traditional aesthetic categories and gender norms, how they relate to other European traditions and predate some of the experimental techniques generally associated with the onset of modernism. Topics for discussion will include the doctrine of art for art‘s sake, the figures of the aesthete and the dandy, the inter-artistic experiment, and the relationship between intellectual culture and popular forms of writing. We will examine a wide variety of literary texts, comprising fiction, essays and poetry. There will also be the opportunity to explore non-literary material, including political and medical writings and the visual arts. Preliminary Reading Primary Texts Students are asked to read the following texts before they arrive in Oxford. This is a list of the core texts for the course; additional compulsory reading will be discussed in a preliminary meeting in 0th week. Field, Michael [Katharine Bradley and Emma Cooper], selected poetry (available in paperback in a Broadview edition by Marion Thain and Ana Vadillo) Gautier, Théophile, Mademoiselle de Maupin (1835). The ‗Preface‘ is particularly important Huysmans, Joris-Karl, Against Nature (also known as Against the Grain) (1884) James, Henry, Roderick Hudson (1875), The Golden Bowl (1904) Lee, Vernon, Hauntings (1890)

87

Pater, Walter, The Renaissance (1873) Swinburne, A.C., Poems and Ballads (1866), essays on Charles Baudelaire and William Blake Symons, Arthur, ‗The Symbolist Movement in Literature‘ (1899) and selected poetry Wilde, Oscar, The Picture of Dorian Gray (1890), Salomé (1891), Intentions (1891), ‗The Portrait of Mr W.H.‘ (1889) Other authors we will discuss during the course include Charles Baudelaire, Audrey Beardsley, John Gray, Amy Levy, Marc-André Raffalovich, Christina Rossetti, Dante Gabriel Rossetti, Olive Schreiner, John Addington Symonds and W .B. Yeats. Students are encouraged to familiarise themselves with some of their works. Secondary Texts Students are asked to familiarise themselves with as many of the following as possible. A full reading list of relevant criticism will also be available. Bernheimer, Charles (ed. T. Jefferson Kline and Naomi Schor), Decadent Subjects: The Idea of Decadence in Art, Literature, Philosophy and Culture of the Fin de Siècle in Europe (2002) Bristow, Joseph (ed.), The Fin-de Siècle Poem (2005) Bürger, Peter (trans. Michael Shaw), Theory of the Avant Garde (1984) Chai, Leon, Aestheticism: The Religion of Art in Post-Romantic Literature (1990) Dellamora, Richard, Masculine Desire: the Sexual Politics of Victorian Aestheticism (1990) Denisoff, Dennis, Aestheticism and Sexual Parody, 1840-1940 (2001) Dowling, Linda, Language and Decadence in the Victorian Fin de Siècle (1986) Evangelista, Stefano, British Aestheticism and Ancient Greece (2009) Livesey, Ruth, Socialism, Sex and the Culture of Aestheticism in Britain, 1880-1914 (2007) Praz, Mario, The Romantic Agony (1930) Prettejohn, Elizabeth, Art for Art‟s Sake: Aestheticism in Victorian Painting (2007) Psomiades, Kathy Alexis, Beauty‟s Body: Femininity and Representation in British Aestheticism (1997) Sturgis, Matthew, Passionate Attitudes: The English Decadence of the 1890s (1995)

88

1800-1914 Michaelmas Term

CLASS AND GENDER IN THE VICTORIAN NOVEL Professor Sally Shuttleworth ([email protected]) This course explores the complex interrelations between class and gender in works by four Victorian novelists: Elizabeth Gaskell, Charlotte Brontë, Charles Dickens and George Eliot. We will look in particular at such questions as the alignment of feminity and the working classes, representations of female sexuality and working class animality, the displacement of class issues into those of gender and the constraints of narrative closure. The course will also cover relevant critical theory and Victorian contextual material. Texts include Elizabeth Gaskell, North and South (Oxford) Charlotte Brontë, Shirley (Penguin) Charles Dickens, Bleak House (Penguin) George Eliot, Felix Holt (Penguin) A list of recommended reading in contextual material will be supplied at the beginning of the semester. Key critical reading Michel Foucault, The History of Sexuality, vol. 1, and Discipline and Punish or ed. P. Rabinow, The Foucault Reader Mary Poovey

Uneven Developments: The Ideological Work of Gender in Mid-Victorian England

HENRY JAMES IN 19th and 20th CENTURY CONTEXTS Dr Michele Mendelssohn ([email protected]) Seminar 1: Henry James and the American Woman James, Henry. Daisy Miller, 1878 (Portable 3-61). --. The Portrait of a Lady, 1881. Seminar 2: The Art of Fiction: Realism, Romance, and Impressionism James, Henry. ―The Art of Fiction,‖ 1884. (Portable 426-447) ---. Excerpts from Hawthorne, 1879 (Cohn 569-574). ---. ―George Eliot‖ ---. Preface to The Portrait of a Lady. (Cohn 604-614). ---. Excerpt from Preface to The American, 1907. Conrad, Joseph. The Nigger of the ‗Narcissus‘, 1897. Seminar 3: Psychology and Sexuality James, Henry. ―The Author of Beltraffio,‖ 1884

89

---. ―The Turn of the Screw,‖ 1898 (Portable 127-235) ---. ―The Pupil,‖ 1896 (in Selected Tales) Ford, Ford Madox. The Good Soldier, 1915. Seminar 4: Point of View, Style and Modernism James, Henry. The Ambassadors, volume one (17-172) Beerbohm, Max. ―The Mote in the Middle Distance‖ (Portable 588-92) Seminar 5: Moral Imagination and the International Theme James, Henry. The Ambassadors, volume 2 (172-348 and ―Preface‖ 1-16) ---. The American Scene. Seminar 6: James‘s Influence Today Hollinghurst, Alan. The Line of Beauty, 2004. Recommended reading **For primary texts, it is important that you purchase the editions listed below. Conrad, Joseph. The Nigger of The "Narcissus": An Authoritative Text, Backgrounds and Sources, Reviews and Criticism. Ed. Robert Kimbrough. New York: Norton, 1979. Ford, Ford Madox. The Good Soldier. Ed. Martin Stannard. 1st ed. New York: Norton, 1995. James, Henry. The Ambassadors. Ed. S.P. Rosenbaum. 1909 ed. New York: Norton, 1964. ---. The Portable Henry James. Ed. John Auchard. New York: Penguin, 2004. ---. The Portrait of a Lady. Ed. Jan Cohn. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 2001. 1881. ---. Selected Tales. London: Penguin, 2001. McLlvanney, Liam, and Ray Ryan, eds. The Good of the Novel. London: Faber & Faber, 2011. Tóibín, Colm. "All a Novelist Needs." The Henry James Review 30.3 (2009): 285-88.

MONEY IN VICTORIAN NARRATIVE Professor Helen Small ([email protected]) Professor George Levine (Rutgers University) This course will be co-taught by Prof Helen Small and Prof George Levine (Kenneth Burke Professor of English Literature Emeritus at Rutgers University) who will be a Visiting Professor in the Faculty of English for the central weeks of Michaelmas Term. ‗I am very uncomfortable with my money,‘ Dorothea tells Lydgate at a crucial point in Middlemarch: ‗they tell me I have too little for any great scheme of the sort I like best, and yet I have too much‘. This course will examine what money can and cannot do in Victorian narrative: how it functions as a driver of different kinds of plot; how it is valued, and how the values it expresses relates to other kinds of value including moral value and literary value; what kinds of pleasure it generates and what kinds of unease. Theoretical materials studied will include classic passages from Marx, Ruskin, and Weber, alongside more recent contributions to the critical literature on money and Victorian literature. Primary texts studied in part or in whole will include Charles Dickens‘s Dombey and Son, Charlotte M. Yonge‘s 90

The Heir of Redcliffe, Dinah Mulock Craik‘s John Halifax, Gentleman, Margaret Oliphant‘s Hester, George Eliot‘s Middlemarch and Henry James‘s Portrait of a Lady. Preliminary Suggestions for Secondary Reading: Max Weber, The Protestant Work Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism, tr. Talcott Parsons with an Intro. by R. H. Tawney (1958) Karl Marx: Selected Writings, 2nd edition, David McLellan (ed.), (2000) John Ruskin, Selected Writings, ed. Dinah Birch (2009) Francis O‘Gorman (ed.), Victorian Literature and Finance (2007) Mary Poovey, Genres of the Credit Economy: Mediating Value in Eighteenth- and Nineteenth-Century Britain (2008) Jonathan Rose, ‗Was Capitalism Good for Victorian Literature?‘, Victorian Studies 46/3 (2004), 489– 501 Marc Shell, The Economy of Literature (1978) Tamara S. Wagner, Financial Speculation in Victorian Fiction: Plotting Money and the Novel Genre, 1851-1901 (2010)

1900-present Michaelmas Term

CINEMA AND MODERNISM Professor Laura Marcus ([email protected]) ‗The cinema has become so much a habit of thought and word and deed as to make it impossible to visualize modern consciousness without it‗, wrote Kenneth Macpherson, editor of the film journal Close Up, in 1927. In this course, we will explore the responses of writers (from the close of the nineteenth century through to the 1920s and 1930s) to the coming of film, and assess the impact of the new medium on literary texts. We will examine the cinematic dimensions of modern literature, look at a number of influential films and writings on film, and address the mutual interactions between film and literature in the modernist period. Seminars will explore the impact of the early silent cinema on its first viewers; literary and cinematic ‗montage‗ in modernist fiction and poetry; the relationships between modernist literature, film and urban modernity; the machine-aesthetics of avant-garde film and literature, including, in David Trotter‗s phrase, ‗the will to automatism‗; Charlie Chaplin and the avantgarde; modernist women writers and the cinema. ‗The presence of an absence‘ Maxim Gorki, ‗The Kingdom of Shadows‘ (1896) [Xerox] Rudyard Kipling, ‗Mrs Bathurst‘ (1904) Virginia Woolf, ‗The Cinema‘ (1926), To the Lighthouse (1928) Films: Lumiére, ‗Arrival of a Train at La Ciotat‘, ‗Baby‘s Breakfast‘, ‗The Card Game‘, James Williamson, ‗The Big Swallow‘, G.A.Smith, ‗The Kiss in the Tunnel‘, ‗Grandma‘s Reading Glasses‘. [All films on BFI DVD Early Cinema: Primitives and Pioneers‘.] Robert Wiene, The Cabinet of Dr Caligari (1919)

91

Secondary Reading: Stanley Cavell, The World Viewed: Reflections on the Ontology of Film (Enlarged edition, 1979); Tom Gunning, ‗The Cinema of Attraction: Early Film, Its Spectator and the AvantGarde‘, Wide Angle 8, nos. 3-4 (Fall 1986): 63-70; Tom Gunning, ‗The Birth of Film Out of the Spirit of Modernity‘, in Ted Perry (ed), Masterpieces of Modernist Cinema (2006); Anton Kaes, ‗The Cabinet of Dr Caligari: Expressionism and Cinema‘, in Perry (ed.); Mike Budd, The Cabinet of Dr Caligari: Texts, Contexts, Histories (1990). ‗Montage thinking‘ Sergei Eisenstein, ‗The Cinematographic Principle and the Ideogram‘, ‗A Dialectical Approach to Film Form‘, ‗The Filmic Fourth Dimension‘, ‗Methods of Montage‘, ‗Dickens, Griffith and the Film Today‘, ‗Statement on Sound‘, in Film Form: Essays in Film Theory (1949). Films: D.W.Griffith, Way Down East (1920) Eisenstein, Battleship Potemkin. (1925) Secondary Reading: The Film Factory Russian and Soviet Cinema in Documents, 1896-1939, eds. Ian Christie and Richard Taylor (1994) ‗City symphonies‘ Virginia Woolf, Mrs Dalloway (1924), James Joyce Ulysses (focus on ‗Lotus-Eaters‘, ‗Nausicaa‘ and ‗Circe‘) (1922), John Dos Passos, Manhattan Transfer (1926), T.S.Eliot, The Waste Land (1922). Walter Benjamin, ‗The Work of Art in the Age of Mechanical Reproduction‘; Siegfried Kracauer, The Mass Ornament: Weimar Essays (especially ‗Analysis of a City Map‘, ‗Photography‘, ‗The Hotel Lobby‘, ‗The Little Shop Girls Go to the Movies‘, ‗Film 1928‘, ‗Cult of Distraction‘) Films: Walter Ruttmann, Berlin: Symphony of a Great City (1926); King Vidor, The Crowd (1928) Secondary Reading: Keith Williams, ‗Symphonies of the Big City: Modernism, Cinema and Urban Modernity‘, in Paul Edwards (ed.), The Great London Vortex : Modernist Literature and Art‘ (2003); James Donald, The City of Modern Imagination (also published as Imagining the Modern City); Carsten Strathausen, ‗Uncanny Spaces: The City in Ruttmann and Vertov‘ and Martin Gaughan, ‗Ruttmann‘s Berlin: Filming in a ―Hollow Space‖, in Mark Shiel and Tony Fitzmaurice (eds.), Screening the City (2003); Alexander Graf, ‗Paris-Berlin-Moscow: On the Montage Aesthetic in the City Symphony Films of the 1920s‘, in Alexander Graf and Dietrich Scheunemann (eds.), Avant-Garde Film (2007). The Machine Aesthetic and the Cine-Poem Films: Fernand Léger and Dudley Murphy, Ballet Mécanique (1924) René Clair, Entr‟acte (1924) Man Ray, Emak Bakia. (1926) Dziga-Vertov, Man with a Movie Camera (1929) Secondary Reading: Vlada Petric, Constructivism in Film; Yuri Tsivian, ‗Man with a Movie Camera – Lines of Resistance: Dziga Vertov and the Twenties‘, Ted Perry, Entr‟acte: Dada as Real Illusion, both in Perry (ed.), Masterpieces of Modernist Cinema; Rudolf E. Kuenzli (ed.), Dada and Surrealist Film (1996); James Donald, ‗Jazz Modernism and Film Art: Dudley Murphy and Ballet mécanique‘, Modernism/Modernity 16: 1, 2009, pp. 25-49.

92

The Machine Aesthetic and Chaplin/Charlot Wyndham Lewis, The Childermass; Time and Western Man (chapters 11-14) - ‗A Brief Account of the Child-Cult‘, ―Time‖-Children. Miss Gertrude Stein and Miss Anita Loos‘., ‗The Prose Song of Gertrude Stein‘, ‗Charlie Chaplin‘. Henri Bergson, On Laughter Essays on Chaplin in the transatlantic ‗little magazines‘ of the 1920s [Xeroxes provided] Films: Chaplin, The Circus (1928); Modern Times (1936). Secondary Reading: Michael North, Machine-Age Comedy (2008); Garrett Stewart, ‗Modern Hard Times: Chaplin and the Cinema of Self-Reflection‘, Critical Inquiry, Vol. 3, no. 2 (Winter 1976), pp. 295-314; Anthony Paraskeva, ‗Wyndham Lewis vs Charlie Chaplin‘, Forum for Modern Language Studies, 43, 2 (2007), pp. 223-234, Peter Conrad, ‗The Chapliniad‘, in Modern Times/Modern Places (1998). Modernism women writers and the cinema: H.D., Dorothy Richardson, Elizabeth Bowen and Jean Rhys. Close Up: Cinema and Modernism 1927-1933 (eds. James Donald, Anne Friedberg and Laura Marcus). Elizabeth Bowen, ‗Why I Go to the Cinema‘ in Charles Davy (ed.), Footnotes to the Films (1939) Jean Rhys, Good Morning Midnight (1939) Film: Borderline (Kenneth Macpherson, 1930) Secondary Reading: Roland Cosandey, ‗On Borderline‘, in Michael O‘Pray (ed.), Avant-Garde Film (1996). Suggested Further Reading Alan Spiegel, Fiction and the Camera Eye: Visual Consciousness in Film and the Modern Novel (1976) Keith Cohen, Film and Fiction: The Dynamics of Exchange (New Haven and London: Yale University Press, 1979) Hugh Kenner, The Mechanic Muse (1987) P.Adams Sitney, Modernist Montage: The Obscurity of Vision in Cinema and Literature (1990) Lawrence Goldstein, The American Poet at the Movies (1995) Grahame Smith, Dickens and the Dream of Cinema (2003) Sara Danius, The Senses of Modernism: Technology, Perception and Aesthetics (2002). Laura Marcus, The Tenth Muse: Writing about Cinema in the Modernist Period (2008) Julian Murphet and Lydia Rainford (eds.), Literature and Visual Technologies: Writing after Cinema (2003) Julian Murphet, Multimedia Modernism: Literature and the Anglo-American Avant-Garde (2009) Susan McCabe, Cinematic Modernism: Modernist Poetry and Film (2005) Michael North, Camera Works: Photography and the Twentieth-Century Word (2006)

93

Matthew Teitelbaum (ed), Montage and Modern Life 1919- 1942 (1994) David Trotter, Cinema and Modernism (2007) Michael Wood, ‗Modernism and Film‘, in The Cambridge Companion to Modernism ed. Michael Levenson (1999)

COMPOSING AND REVISING MODERNISM Dr Hannah Sullivan ([email protected]) The old quip: to the question ‗what did you do in the Great War,‘ Joyce replied ‗I wrote Ulysses.‘ In fact, despite beginning serial publication in The Little Review before the war ended, Joyce continued writing new episodes and revising old ones until book publication in 1922. In this course we will investigate the laborious and restless compositional processes of four major modernist writers, paying particular attention to revision. Our aim is to delineate some of the writing strategies that experimental writers used to make it new at different stages in the lifespan of the text, from early notebook drafting to post-publication revision in front of an audience. The modernists were the first writers to work on the typewriter and the last to draft primarily in longhand. How did this back and forth between the intimacy of handwriting and the ‗impersonal‘ (Auden) look of typescript influence literary style and structure? We will also pay attention to patronage and the diverse print cultures of modernism, including little magazines, deluxe limited early editions, and reprinted cheaper ones. Why, for example, did Eliot add the notes to The Waste Land only when it was published as a book? How did Joyce‘s writing of Ulysses change once he was unshackled from the constraints of serial publication? In the session on Yeats‘s play At the Hawk‟s Well, we will consider the ways in which dramatic performance can exert special kinds of pressure on written texts. Eliot Typing: Before the first session, please acquire a copy of Christopher Ricks‘s edition of Inventions of the March Hare: Poems 1909-1917, read the preface, and compare ‗Gerousia [Gerontion]‘ to the final version. You should also bring to class a copy of Valerie Eliot‘s facsimile edition, The Waste Land: A Facsimile and Transcript of the Original Drafts Including the Annotations of Ezra Pound (New York, 1971). Secondary reading: ‘The Art of Poetry No. 1‘, interview with Donald Hall, The Paris Review 21 (1959): 47-70, Hugh Kenner ‗The Urban Apocalypse‘ in Eliot in His Time, ed. A. Walton Litz (Princeton, 1973). Eliot and Pound Collaborating: The facsimile documents of The Waste Land. Pound‘s editing process and Eliot‘s revisions between manuscript and typescript. Friedrich Kittler, extracts from Gramophone, Film, Typewriter (Stanford, 1999); Lawrence Rainey, ‗Eliot Among the Typists: Writing The Waste Land,‘ Modernism/modernity 12.1 (2005): 27-84; Hugh Kenner, The Mechanic Muse (Oxford, 1987), 17-36; Richard Badenhausen, T. S. Eliot and the Art of Collaboration (Cambridge, 2004). Pound Rethinking: The early Cantos and their transformation. Experiments with dramatic voicing. Daniel Albright, ‗Early Cantos: I-XLI‘ in The Cambridge Companion to Ezra Pound (Cambridge, 1999); Ronald Bush, The Genesis of Ezra Pound‟s Cantos (Princeton, 1976) Joyce Abandoning: Stephen Hero and Giacomo Joyce. Abandoned works and their status in the canon. Generic shifts.

94

Christine Froula, ‗Modernity, Drafts, Genetic Criticism: On the Virtual Lives of Joyce‘s Villanelle‘, Yale French Studies 89 (1996): 113-29; Michel Deville, ‗Prologue,‘ The American Prose Poem: Poetic Form and the Boundaries of Genre (Florida, 1998). Yeats Rehearsing: At the Hawk‟s Well. Migrations from prose to poetry. Performance and prompt copies. Curtis B. Bradford, Yeats at Work (Southern Illinois, 1965), Andrew Parkin ed. At the Hawk‟s Well and the Cat and the Moon: Manuscript Materials (Cornell, 2010). ‗The Turn to Noh‘ in Michael McAteer, Yeats and European Drama (Cambridge, 2010). Joyce Revising: The genetic text of Ulysses, with particular focus on ‗Calypso‘ and ‗Nausicaa,‘ and the debates around Gabler‘s synoptic edition. Using Clive Driver‘s comparison of the 1922 first edition, The Little Review serialization, and the Rosenbach manuscript, we will study Joyce‘s process of adding to Ulysses in episodes 4-7 (‗Calypso‘ to ‗Aeolus‘, 54-143), and in the final serialized episode, ‗Nausicaa‘, (331-65). Hans Walter Gabler ed. Ulysses: A Critical and Synoptic Edition, 3 vols (New York, 1984); Clive Driver, „Ulysses‟: The Manuscript and First Printing Compared (London, 1975); Julie Sloan Brannan, Who Reads Ulysses: The Common Reader and the Rhetoric of the Joyce Wars (New York, 2003); Richard Ellmann, James Joyce, revised edition (Oxford, 1982); Michael Groden, Ulysses in Progress (Princeton, 1977) and ed. James Joyce Archive (New York, 1977-78); Philip Herring, Joyce‟s Ulysses Notesheets in the British Museum (Virginia, 1972); John Kidd, ‗The Scandal of Ulysses‘, The New York Review of Books, June 1988. http://www.nybooks.com/articles/archives/1988/jun/30/the-scandal-ofulysses-2/ George Bornstein, ‗Joyce and the Colonial Archive‘, Ch. 7 Material Modernism: The Politics of the Page (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2001); Matthew Creasy, ‗Introduction‘, Creasy ed. Errears and Erroriboose (European Joyce Studies, 2011); Mark Osteen, Ch. 8, The Economy of Ulysses: Making Both Ends Meet (Syracuse, N.Y.: Syracuse University Press, 1995).

DRAMA, 1945 – PRESENT Dr Kirsten Shepherd-Barr ([email protected]) This course examines British and American theatre from the post-war period to the present day, addressing issues of genre, theatrical structure and dramaturgy, gender, censorship, social and political contexts, science on stage, and the economics of the theatrical marketplace. A wide range of texts and authors will be addressed, including Beckett, Pinter, Orton, Hansberry, Stoppard, Shepard, Kane, Marber, Wertenbaker, Friel, Kushner, Bennett and Churchill, and topics discussed include sexuality, violence, political engagement, and the limits of representation. Week 1: The Well-Made Play and ―Revolution‖ Terence Rattigan, The Browning Version, The Deep Blue Sea; J. B. Priestley, An Inspector Calls, Harold Pinter, The Birthday Party; Samuel Beckett, Waiting for Godot, Endgame; Osborne, Look Back in Anger, The Entertainer; Shelagh Delaney, A Taste of Honey Week 2: The Family Harold Pinter, The Homecoming; Edward Albee, Who‟s Afraid of Virginia Woolf?; Joe Orton, What the Butler Saw; Alan Ayckbourn, A Woman in Mind; Trevor Griffiths, Comedians; Sam Shepard, Buried Child; Lorraine Hansberry, A Raisin in the Sun; Bruce Norris, Clybourne Park

95

Week 3: Political Theatre John McGrath, The Cheviot, the Stag and the Black, Black Oil; Howard Brenton, The Romans in Britain; Howard Brenton and David Hare, Pravda; Tom Stoppard, The Real Thing; David Hare, Stuff Happens, The Permanent Way; Steve Waters, The Contingency Plan (both plays) Week 4: Theatre of History Brian Friel, Making History; Timberlake Wertenbaker, Our Country‟s Good; Alan Bennett, The History Boys; Tony Kushner, Angels in America (both parts); Anna Deavere Smith, Fires in the Mirror Week 5: Violence and Sexuality Edward Bond, Saved; Sarah Kane, Blasted; Martin McDonagh, The Pillow Man; Jez Butterworth, Mojo; Mark Ravenhill, Shopping and Fucking; Caryl Churchill, Cloud Nine; Patrick Marber, Closer; Bryony Lavery, Frozen; Edward Albee, The Goat; or, Who is Sylvia? Week 6: Science Michael Frayn, Copenhagen; Tom Stoppard, Arcadia; Complicite, Mnemonic and A Disappearing Number; Caryl Churchill, A Number; Margaret Edson, Wit; Shelagh Stephenson, An Experiment with an Air-Pump; Terry Johnson, Cries from the Mammal House

English and American Michaelmas Term

MODERNIST POETRY: POUND AND ELIOT Professor Ron Bush ([email protected]) A six-week exploration of the formal and ideological issues involved in the evolution of modernist poetry. Topics include: Pound and Imagism; The Implications of Eliot's Early Irony; History in Pound's Propertius and Early Cantos; Ideology and Fragmentation in The Waste Land; The Pisan Cantos; Burnt Norton and Eliot's Reversion to Symbolism @ = Title of Suggested Student Seminar Presentation * = Essential Reading ** = Essential Reading to be brought to Class [Note: All members of the seminar, not just the ones delivering a presentation, are responsible for careful preparation of each week‟s primary reading. Seminar presentations should be 15-20 minutes long and are to be polished into formal 10-page papers, stripped of the rhetoric of an oral presentation and including footnotes, due no later than the following Monday. The longer M.St. papers due at the end of the term will assume that the student is familiar with the bulk of Pound and/or Eliot‟s poetry and relevant collected prose.] Week 1: Pound. Imagism and Cathay Reading **From Personae (Collected Shorter Poems): through Cathay, esp. from Ripostes **Literary Essays 1-87, 214-48 Gaudier-Brzeska Selected Prose 1-44, 327-32, 431-33

96

Translations 213-63 *The Chinese Written Character (also available in Nadel, ed., EP: Early Writings) The Spirit of Romance Seminar Focus: Imagism and Cathay Week 2: Eliot and Laforgue‘s Irony Reading **From CPP: Poems from Prufrock and Other Observations *Poems Written in Early Youth **Inventions of the March Hare: Poems 1909-1917. Ed. Christopher Ricks. **The Sacred Wood *Selected Essays: ‗Middleton‘, ‗The Metaphysical Poets‘, ‗Marvell‘, ‗Dryden‘ To Criticize the Critic 162-89 (‗Ezra Pound‘, ‗Vers Libre‘) **B.C. Southam, A Student‟s Guide to the Selected Poems of T.S. Eliot Seminar Focus @The poetic, philosophical, and/or ideological effect of Laforgue‘s irony on the dramatic monologue form in ―Prufrock‖ @ ―Prufrock‘s Pervigilium‖ (in March Hare): Why did Eliot leave it out and what does it mean for a reading of the poem? Week 3: The Prisons of Cliché and History. ―Propertius‖ and the early Cantos Reading ** From Personae: ―Homage to Sextus Propertius‖ and ―Hugh Selwyn Mauberly‖ ** [Handout] The ―Poetry‖ Cantos (also in Nadel, ed., EP: Early Writings) ** From The Cantos: 1-16, esp. 1-7 ** Literary Essays 94-213, 280-338, 371-77, 399-417, 418-23, 339-58, 418-22 Selected Prose 159-73, 177-82, 203-34, 333-43, 383-93 **K.K. Ruthven, A Guide to Ezra Pound‟s Personae (1928) ** Carroll Terrell, A Companion to the Cantos of Ezra Pound ** [Handout] T.S. Eliot: ―Eeldrop and Appleplex‖ I and II (Little Review, 1917) Seminar Focus: Cliché, Pound‘s Homage, and the language of modernist poetry @ Language and history in the Homage @ Canto 1

97

Week 4: Eliot. The Waste Land Reading ** The Waste Land: A Facsimile and Transcript * From CPP: Poems 1920 *From Selected Essays: ―Four Elizabethan Dramatists,‖ ―Middleton,‖ ―Heywood,‖ ―Tourneur,‖ ―Ford,‖ ―Marie Lloyd.‖ * The Sacred Wood Knowledge and Experience ** From Pound‘s Cantos: Canto 7 ** ―Ulysses, Order, and Myth‖ (The Dial 1923) * “A Sceptical Patrician: A Review of The Education of Henry Adams” (Athenaeum 1919) *On Henry James: ―In Memory‖ and ―The Hawthorne Aspect‖ (Little Review, 1918) Seminar Focus: The composition and form of The Waste Land (The Facsimile) @What difference would different choices about what to leave in and leave out have made to the poem?) @ The Waste Land: aesthetics and ideology. @ *The Waste Land and Canto 7: A Thematic and Stylistic Comparison Week 5: Pound. The Pisan Cantos Reading ** The Pisan Cantos The rest of **Literary Essays and Selected Prose *ABC of Reading ** [Handout] Carroll Terrell, A Companion to the Cantos of Ezra Pound Guide to Kulchur Seminar Focus: The Pisan Cantos, esp. 74, 81-83 @A reading of the first half of Canto 81 @A reading of the second half of Canto 81 Week 6: Eliot. Symbolism and Nonsense in ―Burnt Norton‖ Reading ** CPP: Remaining poems (esp. ―Burnt Norton), The Family Reunion **The Varieties of Metaphysical Poetry ** [Handout] ―Note sur Mallarmé et Poe‖ The rest of Selected Essays 98

For Lancelot Andrewes **On Poetry and Poets, esp. 17-33, 75-112, 157-83, 295-308 The rest of The Use of Poetry and the Use of Criticism To Criticize the Critic Seminar Focus: ―Burnt Norton‖ and Eliot‘s late reversion toward Symbolism @The Hyacinth Garden and the Rose Garden: a stylistic comparison. @Eliot and Nonsense Poetry

PHILIP ROTH: CONTEXTS AND IMPACT Dr Patrick Hayes ([email protected]) Roth‘s 80th birthday will fall in 2013, and with his work now published in the authoritative Library of America edition, and his archive on public access at the Library of Congress, he is widely acknowledged as one of the defining authors in the literature and culture of post-war America. Yet despite his canonical status and his large audience Roth has long been, and remains, an extremely polarising figure, especially among academics, intellectuals, and public moralists – who are often featured as objects of satire in his work. His fiction attracted public disapproval from the very outset, and as his writing evolved this disapproval has taken an ever-widening variety of forms; perhaps as a result, he remains the major living novelist not to have been awarded the Nobel Prize. Known for its audacity and excess, Roth‘s fiction is an awkward fit with the educational aims of many college literature courses, transgressing against a number of different ways in which post-war American intellectuals have sought to define (or domesticate?) the nature and value of literature. This course will Roth‘s unusual status and significance by placing him in the context of some of the different kinds of moral, political and cultural debate that have taken place in the post-war period – with a particular focus on the different kinds of humanism available in post-war America, the discourse on the emotions, the concept of human identity in its ethical and aesthetic dimensions, the relationship between writing and politics, and the experience of history. In each case we will explore the impact of Roth‘s writing by thinking about some of the different literary and intellectual traditions at stake in his approach. In their final essays participants will be free to either develop particular themes from the seminars or to pursue any other aspect of Roth‘s work they find of interest. For instance, essays could explore Roth‘s intertextual relationship with a range of American writers including Hawthorne, Melville, James, Saul Bellow, Susan Sontag, John Updike, Norman Mailer; or with European writers including Kafka, Céline, Mann, Milan Kundera, Witold Gombrowicz (among many others); his impact on particular discursive traditions, such as autobiography, confession, cultural criticism, Holocaust writing, psychoanalysis; or his interest in specific thinkers such as Freud (―our Sophocles‖, as Roth once called him) and Nietzsche. The seminars will involve presentations by participants, and will place Roth in relation to other writers and thinkers – the details of which we will discuss prior to our first meeting at the beginning of term. However the broad outline of seminars will be as follows: 1: Cold War Contexts: Goodbye, Columbus Note: for the first seminar we will discuss Roth‘s early short stories alongside Lionel Trilling, The Liberal Imagination and John Cheever, The Housebreaker of Shady Hill; Roth‘s first novel, Letting Go, will also be a useful point of reference.

99

2: Vehement Passions: Portnoy’s Complaint; Sabbath’s Theatre 3: History and the Sublime: American Pastoral 4: Identity: The Counterlife; The Human Stain 5: The Freudian Uncanny: Operation Shylock; The Plot Against America 6: Roth Now Participants should ensure they have read as widely as possible in Roth‘s oeuvre before the start of term – also see Reading Myself and Others, which collects a range of his interviews and essays. Useful recent studies of Roth include: Frank Scherer, The Cambridge Companion to Philip Roth (2004) Ross Posnock, Philip Roth‟s Rude Truth (2006) David Gooblar, The Major Phases of Philip Roth (2011) There is a journal devoted to Roth, which runs a useful website: http://rothsociety.org/ Introductions to post-war American literature include the following: Thomas Schaub, American Fiction in the Cold War (1991) Morris Dickstein, Leopards in the Temple (2002) Josephine Hendin, Postwar American Literature and Culture (2004) Jeremy Green, Late Postmodernism: American Fiction at the Millenium (2005) For a more general introduction to postwar American history and culture see: James Patterson, Grand Expectations: the United States 1945-1974 (1997) Howard Temperley and Christopher Bigsby, A New Introduction to American Studies (2006). Participants may also find it helpful to familiarise themselves with some of the following, which will provoke interesting questions about Roth‘s work (and some of which will be used as points of reference in seminars): Friedrich Nietzsche, Beyond Good and Evil; The Genealogy of Morals Sigmund Freud, Civilization and its Discontents; ‗The Uncanny‘ Lionel Trilling, The Liberal Imagination (1950) Susan Sontag, Against Interpretation (1966) Richard Poirier, The Performing Self (1971) Gerald Graff, Literature Against Itself: Literary Ideas in Modern Society (1979) Jürgen Habermas, The Philosophical Discourse of Modernity (1985) Julia Kristeva, Strangers to Ourselves (1991) Charles Altieri, The Particulars of Rapture (2003)

100

Frank Ankersmit, Sublime Historical Experience (2004)

English Language Michaelmas Term

THE LANGUAGE OF MIDDLE ENGLISH LITERATURE Professor Simon Horobin ([email protected]) This course will provide students with the necessary linguistic background to appreciate the stylistic practices of major Middle English writers such as Chaucer, Langland and the Gawain-poet. Following an introduction to key features of orthography, phonology, grammar and lexicon, students will examine language use, style and variety to consider how these writers exploited the resources of Middle English to achieve specific literary and stylistic effects. Week 1: Writing in dialect Texts: Chaucer, Reeve‟s Tale; Second Shepherds‟ Play; Osbern Bokenham, Mappula Angliae (extract in Burnley 2000, 171-6). Cannon, Christopher, ‗Chaucer and the Language of London‘, in Ardis Butterfield (ed.), Chaucer and the City (Cambridge, 2006), pp. 79-94. Hanna, Ralph, London Literature, 1300-1380 (Cambridge, 2006), chapter 1. Machan, Tim William, English in the Middle Ages (Oxford, 2003), chapter 3. McIntosh, A., M.L. Samuels and M. Benskin (eds.), A Linguistic Atlas of Late Mediaeval English (Aberdeen, 1986), vol. 1, ‗Introduction‘. Smith, Jeremy J., An Historical Study of English: Function, Form and Change (London: Routledge, 1996), chapter 4. Week 2: Lexis Texts: Preface to Wycliffite Biblical Concordance (Burnley 2000, pp. 165-70); Chaucer, Manciple‟s Tale lines 203-20; Miller‟s Tale; Prioress‟ Prologue. Benson, L.D. (ed.), Glossarial Database of Middle English http://quod.lib.umich.edu/g/gloss/ David Burnley, ‗Lexis and Semantics‘ in N.F. Blake (ed.), The Cambridge History of the English Language Volume II 1066-1476 (Cambridge, 1992), pp. 409-99. Cannon, Christopher, The Making of Chaucer's English: A Study of Words. (Cambridge, 1998), esp. chapter 5. Donaldson, E. Talbot, ‗Idiom of Popular Poetry in the Miller‘s Tale‘ in Speaking of Chaucer (London, 1970), pp. 13-29. Mersand, Joseph, Chaucer‟s Romance Vocabulary (New York, 1937). Middle English Dictionary (Ann Arbor, 1952-2001). http://quod.lib.umich.edu/m/mec/ Week 3: Translation and vernacularity Texts: Chaucer, Prologue to the Treatise on the Astrolabe; ‗On Translating the Bible into English‘ in The Idea of the Vernacular, pp. 146-8; John Trevisa, ‗Dialogue and Epistle‘ in The Idea of the Vernacular, pp. 130-8. Ardis Butterfield, ‗Chaucerian Vernaculars‘, Studies in the Age of Chaucer 31 (2009), 25-51

101

Andrew Cole, ‗Chaucer‘s English Lesson‘, Speculum 77 (2002), 1128-1167. Machan, Tim William, English in the Middle Ages (Oxford, 2003), chapter 2. Rothwell, William, ‗The Trilingual England of Geoffrey Chaucer‘, Studies in the Age of Chaucer 16 (1994), 45-67. Turville-Petre, Thorlac, England the Nation: Language, Literature, and National Identity, 1290-1340 (Oxford, 1996) Nicholas Watson, ‗The Politics of Middle English Writing‘, in The Idea of the Vernacular, pp. 331-352. Week 4: Verse style Texts: Chaucer, Clerk‘s Prologue; Host‘s words to the Prioress (VII.435-452); Gawain, lines 250-365; Nun‘s Priest‘s Epilogue; N.F. Blake, ‗The Literary Language‘, Cambridge History of English Language Volume II, ed. N.F. Blake (Cambridge, 1992), pp. 500-541. Burnley, David, The Language of Chaucer. (London, 1989), chapters 7 and 8. Cannon, Christopher, ‗Chaucer‘s Style‘, in Piero Boitano and Jill Mann (eds.), The Cambridge Companion to Chaucer 2nd edition (Cambridge, 2004), pp. 233-250. Week 5: Prose style Texts: Tale of Melibee; Treatise on the Astrolabe; Malory Morte Darthur (texts in Burnley 2000, pp. 181-90). Bornstien, Diane, ‗Chaucer‘s Tale of Melibee as an example of the Style Clergial‘ Chaucer Review 12 (1978), 236-54. Burnley, David, ‗Curial Prose in England‘ Speculum 61 (1986), 593-614. Davis, Norman, ‗Style and Stereotype in Early English Letters‘, Leeds Studies in English NS 1 (1967), 7-17. Eisner, Sigmund, ‗Chaucer as a Technical Writer‘ Chaucer Review 19 (1985), 179-204. Schlauch, Margaret, ‗The Art of Chaucer‘s Prose‘, in D.S. Brewer (ed.), Chaucer and Chaucerians (London, 1966), pp. 140-63. Smith, Jeremy J., ‗Language and style in Malory‘, in A.S.G.Edwards & E.Archibald (eds.), A Companion to Malory, (Woodbridge, 1996), pp. 97-113. Week 6: Alliterative verse Texts: Tolkien, J.R.R. and E.V. Gordon (eds), Sir Gawain and the Green Knight (Oxford, 2nd edition 1967); O‘Donaghue, Bernard (trans.) Sir Gawain and the Green Knight (Penguin, 2007); Armitage, Simon (trans.), Sir Gawain and the Green Knight, (Faber, 2007) Duggan, H.N., ‗Meter, Stanza, Vocabulary, Dialect‘, in Derek Brewer (ed.), A Companion to the Gawain-Poet (D.S. Brewer, 1999), pp. 221-242. Elliott, Ralph, ‗Landscape and Geography‘, in Derek Brewer (ed.), A Companion to the Gawain-Poet (D.S. Brewer, 1999), pp. 105-118. Putter, Ad and Myra Stokes, ‗The Linguistic Atlas and the Dialect of the Gawain Poems‘, Journal of English and Germanic Philology 106 (2007), 468-491. Turville-Petre, Thorlac, The Alliterative Revival (Cambridge, 1977), chapter 4.

102

General Reading Blake, N.F., ‗The Literary Language‘ in N.F. Blake (ed.), The Cambridge History of the English Language Volume II 1066-1476 (Cambridge, 1992), pp. 500-41. - The English Language in Medieval Literature (London, 1977) Burnley, David, The History of the English Language: A Source Book. 2nd edition. (Longman, 2000) - The Language of Chaucer. (London, 1989) - Chaucer's Language and the Philosopher's Tradition. (Cambridge, 1979) Butterfield, Ardis, The Familiar Enemy: Chaucer, Language and Nation in the Hundred Years War (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2009) Davis, N., ‗Chaucer and Fourteenth-Century English‘, in Derek Brewer (ed.), Geoffrey Chaucer (Cambridge, 1974), pp. 58-84. Elliott, R.W.V., Chaucer's English. (London, 1974) Horobin, Simon, Chaucer‟s Language (London, 2006) - The Language of the Chaucer Tradition (Cambridge, 2003) Horobin, Simon and Jeremy Smith, An Introduction to Middle English (Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press, 2002). Machan, Tim William, English in the Middle Ages (Oxford, 2003) Sandved, A.O., Introduction to Chaucerian English (Cambridge, 1985) Wogan-Browne, J. et al. (eds), The Idea of the Vernacular (Exeter, 1999)

ENGLISH HISTORICAL LINGUISTICS: THEORIES AND MODELS OF LANGUAGE CHANGE Professor Suzanne Romaine ([email protected]) This series of seminars will examine a variety of theories and models of language change in order to address the questions of why and how language changes, and what it means to ‗explain‘ vs. ‗model‘ language change. Examples will be drawn largely from key lexical, morphological, syntactic and pragmatic changes in early modern English (e.g. in areas such as pronouns and address systems, adjective comparison, word order, strong and weak verb classes, modals and other auxiliaries, and negation). Students will have opportunities to do practical work with various corpora and other databases to examine empirical data. Preparatory reading Fischer, Olga 2006. Morphosyntactic change. Functional and formal perspectives. Oxford: University Press. Lass, Roger 1997. Historical linguistics and language change. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nevalainen, Terttu and Raumolin-Brunberg, Helena 2003. Historical sociolinguistics: language change in Tudor and Stuart England. London: Longman. Week 1: Typology, universals and drift This session will look as the role of factors such as typology, universals and drift in explanations of language change, especially with respect to word order.

103

Reading Butters, Ronald R. 2001. Chance as cause of language variation and change. Journal of English Linguistics 29:201-213. Croft, William 2006. Evolutionary models and functional-typological theories of language change. In Kemenade and Los eds. Ch. 4. pp. 68-93. Denison, David 1993. Chapter 4 Word Order. Song, Jae Jung 2009. Word order patterns and principles. An overview. Language and Linguistics Compass 3(5): 1328–1341. Week 2: Pragmatics, pronouns, and forms of address This session will consider personal pronouns and forms of address as a key site for encoding interpersonal attitudes and understanding social relations among participants in speech events. Some of the changes in address terms will be examined from the perspective of the emerging field of historical pragmatics. Reading Nevalainen 2006 Chapter 2. Nouns and pronouns Nevala, Minna 2004. Inside and out. Forms of address in seventeenth and eighteenth century letters. Journal of Historical Pragmatics 5(2): 271-296. Fitzmaurice, Susan 2002. The familiar letter in early modern English. A pragmatic approach. Amsterdam: Benjamins. Week 3: Lexical change, key words and culture change This session will focus on lexical change, looking at new approaches such as key word and semantic domain analysis to examine quantitative methods for modeling language and culture change. Reading Archer, Dawn and Culpeper, Jonathan 2009. Identifying key sociophilological usage in plays and trial proceedings (1640–1760). An empirical approach via corpus annotation. Journal of Historical Pragmatics 10(2): 286–309. Archer, Dawn, Culpeper, Jonathan and Rayson, Paul 2009. Love – ‗a familiar or a devil‘? An exploration of key domains in Shakespeare‘s comedies and tragedies. In Archer, Dawn ed. What‟s in a word-list? Investigating frequency and keyword extraction. Farnham: Ashgate. 137–159. Nevalainen, Terttu 2006. Chapter 4. Old words and loan words. Nevalainen, Terttu 1999. Early modern English lexis and semantics. In Lass, Cambridge history of the English language. Vol. 3. Michel, Jean-Baptiste et al. 2011. Quantitative analysis of culture using millions of digitized books. Science 331:176-182. Minkova, Donka and Stockwell, Robert 2006. English words. In Arts, Bas and McMahon, April eds. The handbook of English linguistics. Chapter 20. Blackwell. Week 4: Analogy This session will examine the role of analogy as an explanatory principle or theory of language change. Changes to be discussed include strong and weak verbs.

104

Reading Hock, Hans Heinrich 2003. Analogy. In Joseph and Janda eds. Ch. 11. Blevins, James P. and Blevins, Juliette 2009. Analogy in grammar. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Week 5: Morphosyntactic change This session will examine variationist approaches to modeling and explaining language change, using adjective comparison and negation as examples of morphosyntactic change. Reading Mazzon, Gabriella 2004. A history of English negation. Harlow: Pearson Pintzuk, Susan 2003. Variationist approaches to syntactic change. In Joseph and Janda eds. 2003. Ch. 15. Week 6: Grammaticalization This session will examine grammaticalization as a concept and theory to explain language change. Changes to be discussed include modals and other auxiliaries. Reading Language Sciences 23. Special issue devoted to grammaticalization. Hopper, Paul J., and Traugott, Elizabeth Closs 2003. Grammaticalization. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. 2nd ed. Traugott, Elizabeth C. 2011. Modality from a historical perspective. Language and Linguistics Compass 5(6): 381–396. General reading and reference works Bybee, Joan L. 2007. Frequency of use and the organization of language. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Chambers J. K., Trudgill, Peter and Schilling-Estes, Natalie eds. 2002. The handbook of language variation and change. Oxford: Blackwell. Croft, William 2000. Explaining language change. An evolutionary approach. Harlow: Pearson. Culpeper, Jonathan 2011. Historical sociopragmatics. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Denison, David 1993. English historical syntax. Verbal constructions. London: Longman. Fennell, Barbara 2001. A history of English. A sociolinguistic approach. Oxford: Blackwell. Good, Jeff 2008. Linguistic universals and language change. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Hernández-Campoy, Juan Manuel and Conde-Silvestre, Juan Camilio eds. 2012. The handbook of historical sociolinguistics. Wiley. Hickey, Raymond ed. 2004. Motives for language change. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Hopper, Paul J. and Traugott, Elizabeth Closs 2003. Grammaticalization. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. 2nd ed. Joseph, Brian D. and Janda, Richard D. eds. 2003. The handbook of historical linguistics. Oxford: Blackwell.

105

Kemenade, Ans van and Los, Bettelou eds. 2006. The handbook of the history of English. Oxford: Blackwell. Labov, William 1994. Principles of linguistic change. Vol. 1: Internal factors. Oxford: Blackwell. Labov, William 2001. Principles of linguistic change. Vol. 2: Social factors. Oxford: Blackwell. Labov, William 2010. Principles of linguistic change. Vol.3: Cognitive and cultural factors. Oxford: Blackwell. Lass, Roger 1999. The Cambridge history of the English language. Volume III. 1476-1776. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nevalainen, Terttu 2006. Introduction to Early Modern English. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Romaine, Suzanne ed. 1998. The Cambridge history of the English language. Volume IV. 1776- present day. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Taavitsainen, Irma, and Jucker, Andreas H. eds. 2003. Diachronic perspectives in address term systems. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. Weinreich, Uriel, Labov, William and Herzog, Marvin 1968. Empirical foundations for a theory of language change. In Lehmann, W. and Malkiel, Y. eds. Directions for historical linguistics. Austin: University of Texas Press. pp. 97-195. Wierzbicka, Anna 2006. English. Meaning and culture. Oxford: Oxford University Press

DICTIONARIES AND LEXICOGRAPHY Professor Charlotte Brewer ([email protected]) Monolingual dictionaries in English are usually traced back to Cawdrey‘s Table Alphabeticall of 1604 and this seminar series will survey and (selectively) scrutinize some of the main English language dictionaries from Cawdrey to the present day. At the same time we‘ll investigate a range of different topics in lexicography, e.g. dictionaries‘ sources and their compilation, organization, definitions and other distinctive features, through to their use and reception (not least in the light of the revolutionary changes enabled by electronic media and the internet). Dictionaries have a complex relationship with the society which produces them, and we will explore how their appearance of objective and comprehensive authority can be sometimes substantiated, sometimes belied, by detailed study of their character and composition. In addition to attending seminars, participants in this option will make a group visit to Oxford University Press‘s dictionary department at some stage during the course. MSt students taking the lexicography option will be eligible to apply for an internship with Oxford University Press (up to two may be available). The successful candidate(s) will be expected to work on a specific research project, either in historical lexicography (i.e. related to OED) or contemporary lexicography (i.e. related to OUP‘s modern monolingual dictionaries), for four weeks full-time over the Easter vacation 2013. Anyone interested in this opportunity should contact Charlotte Brewer for more information. Preparatory reading Required Béjoint, Henri. 2010. The lexicography of English: from origins to present. Oxford: Oxford University Press. 106

Plus either Jackson, Howard. 2002. Lexicography: an introduction. London: Routledge. or Landau, Sidney I. 2001. Dictionaries: the art and craft of lexicography. 2nd ed. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Plus selection of essays (according to individual preference - select at least six) in Cowie, A. P. (ed.), The Oxford History of English Lexicography. Two vols. Oxford: Oxford University Press Additional Atkins, B. T. S., and Michael Rundell. 2008. The Oxford guide to practical lexicography. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Benson, Phil. 2001. Ethnocentrism and the English Dictionary. London: Routledge. Fontenelle, Thierry. 2008. Practical lexicography: a reader. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Svensén, Bo. 2009. A handbook of lexicography: the theory and practice of dictionary-making. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Lexicographical journals: (locate these and browse contents) Dictionaries (Dictionary Society of North America) International Journal of Lexicography (OUP) Lexicographica (De Gruyter) Week 1: Introduction ‗A dictionary is a systematically arranged list of socialized linguistic forms compiled from the speechhabits of a given speech-community and commented on by the author in such a way that the qualified reader understands the meaning…of each separate form, and is informed of the relevant facts concerning the function of that form in its community‘. L. Zgusta, Manual of Lexicography (The Hague: Mouton, 1971, p. 17). ―A Dictionary is a word-book which collects somebody's words into somebody's book. Whose words are collected, how they are collected, and who collects them all influence what kind of book a given dictionary turns out to be and, in turn, whose purpose it can best serve.‖ Kramarae and Treichler, A Feminist Dictionary (London: Pandora Press, 1985). What is a dictionary for and how might we expect it to be comprehensive or restricted? Our opening session will introduce some of the main features in lexicographical study, e.g. choice of words , relationship with other reference books (e.g. encyclopaedias), terminology, constituent features of a dictionary (pronunciation, etymology, spelling, definitions, labelling, quotation evidence), introductory matter, audience expectations. Week 2: Early dictionaries to Johnson What are the distinctive features of Johnson‘s dictionary of 1755 and in what ways did it build on the achievements of its predecessors? This seminar will discuss early dictionaries (each member will be asked to select one to report on, from the list available in Stein below, reading/consulting it in facsimile or via EEBO or ECCO) in relation to the specific characteristics of Johnson‘s work. Johnson‘s Plan and Preface will be examined in detail: how did the actual compilation of his dictionary change Johnson‘s mind about what a dictionary could, might or should do? What made it such a distinctive and influential work?

107

Required reading S. Johnson. A Dictionary. 1755 (extensive consultation). Copies of Johnson‘s dictionary are in English Faculty Library and the Gladstone Link: make sure you consult the facsimile edition, introduced by R W Burchfield (London : Times Books 1979 2 v. in 1) as there are hundreds of other editions which are abridgements or selections and not satisfactory therefore. The electronic edition, ed. Anne McDermott, is available via SOLO. Johnson‘s ‗Plan‘ and ‗Preface‘ to Dictionary, in Johnson, Samuel, Gwin J. Kolb, and Robert DeMaria. 2005. Johnson on the English language, The Yale edition of the works of Samuel Johnson. New Haven: Yale University Press. Vol XVIII. (Can be read online in edition by Jack Lynch at http://andromeda.rutgers.edu/~jlynch/Texts/plan.html and http://andromeda.rutgers.edu/~jlynch/Texts/preface.html) Reddick, Allen Hilliard. 1990. The Making of Johnson's Dictionary, 1746-1773. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Starnes, DeWitt T., and Gertrude Elizabeth Noyes. 1991. The English Dictionary from Cawdrey to Johnson, 1604-1755. New ed. by Gabriele Stein. Amsterdam Studies in the Theory and History of Linguistic Science. Series 3: Studies in the History of the Language Sciences 57. Amsterdam: John Benjamins (NB can be read online in the Oxford domain) Additional reading Gurr, Andrew, ed. Eighteenth-Century Lexis and Lexicography. Yearbook of English Studies (28) 1998 (see articles by Demaria, Hudson, McDermott and Reddick) Hitchings, Henry. 2005. Dr Johnson's dictionary: the extraordinary story of the book that defined the world. London: John Murray. Lynch, Jack, and Anne McDermott. 2005. Anniversary Essays on Johnson's 'Dictionary'. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Reddick, Allen Hilliard. 2009. Johnson and Richardson. In Oxford History of Lexicography, edited by A. P. Cowie. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Resources Early English Books Online Eighteenth-Century Collections Online Lexicons of Early Modern English http://leme.library.utoronto.ca/public/subscriptioninfo.cfm (much information available to non-subscribers here) Week 3: The Oxford English Dictionary (1) As an historical record of the development of vocabulary in English from 1150 to the present, based on around 5 million quotations from printed works over this period, the first edition of the OED (published 1884-1928) set out to provide a comprehensive and objective account of the language. Its editors believed that they had created a revolution in lexicography and the current editor John Simpson makes further claims about OED‘s lexicographical and societal role since then: ―Far more than a convenient place to look up words and their origins, the Oxford English Dictionary is an irreplaceable part of English culture. It not only provides an important record of the evolution of our language, but also documents the continuing development of our society.‖ A detailed examination of OED1‘s conception, compilation and completion will allow us to put its aims and achievements in a more nuanced context. What were the strengths and weaknesses of OED‘s methodology and realisation? Required reading First edition of OED (print copy; extensive consultation). Familiarise yourself also with OED2 (1989), which merges Burchfield‘s four-volume Supplement (1972-86) with OED1, and with OED3 (www.oed.com). 108

Murray, J. A. H. ‗General Explanations‘ to OED (read in edition of OED1 or (slightly updated) OED2). Murray, K. M. E. 1977. Caught in the Web of Words: James A. H. Murray and the Oxford English Dictionary. New Haven and London: Yale University Press. Mugglestone, Lynda. 2000 (2nd ed 2002). Lexicography and the OED: Pioneers in the Untrodden Forest. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Additional reading Brewer, Charlotte. 2010. The Use of Literary Quotations in the Oxford English Dictionary. Review of English Studies 61: 93-125. Brewer, Charlotte. 2012. "'Happy Copiousness? OED's Recording of Female Authors of the Eighteenth Century'. Review of English Studies 63: 86-117 Mugglestone, Lynda. 2005. Lost for Words: The Hidden History of the Oxford English Dictionary. New Haven and London: Yale University Press. Mugglestone, Lynda. 2007. "Decent Reticence": Coarseness, Contraception, and the First Edition of the OED. Dictionaries 28: 1-22. Raymond, Darrell R., 1987. Dispatches From the Front: The Prefaces to the Oxford English Dictionary. Waterloo, Ontario: UW Centre for the New Oxford English Dictionary. For updated version of this publication, available as a PDF, see http://www.darrellraymond.com/prefaces) For further OED information and resources see http://oed.hertford.ox.ac.uk/main/ Week 4: The OED (2) This week will follow the progress of the OED through its Supplements and Second Edition (1989) through to the creation of the Third Edition, which began to be released online in 2000 and will be in progress for some decades yet. We will review the characteristics of its various stages of revision and discuss its achievements to date, looking in particular at its treatment of quotation sources and its shifts of policy in areas such as World English, usage and prescriptivism, and contentious vocabulary (of one sort or another). How has electronic publication facilitated changes and improvements in lexicographical methodology, and are there any drawbacks to this medium? How justified, today, is the OED‘s current claim to be ‗the definitive record of the language‘? Depending on individual preferences we will also look at the range of other English language dictionaries which began to be produced by Oxford University Press from the Concise Oxford Dictionary (1911) onwards, and the rival dictionaries of other British publishing houses (Chambers, Collins and Longman). Reading Brewer, Charlotte. 2007. Treasure-House of the Language: The Living OED. New Haven and London: Yale University Press. Burchfield, R. W. 1989. Unlocking the English Language. London: Faber and Faber. (See essays on OED) Simpson, John. 2004. The OED and Collaborative Research into the History of English. Anglia 122: 185-208. Simpson, John, Edmund Weiner, and Philip Durkin, 2004. 'The Oxford English Dictionary Today', Transactions of the Philological Society, 102, 335-81 Weeks 5 & 6: Seminar participants will decide between two of the three following options: 1: Webster and the American tradition Noah Webster‘s dictionary of 1828 was a landmark in American dictionary-making for cultural as well as lexicographical reasons, and so (in different ways) was the Century Dictionary and Cyclopedia (first published 1889-1891, ed. W. D. Whitney) and Webster‘s Third International Dictionary (1961, ed. P. Gove). This session will discuss the distinctive features of American dictionary-making - its scope, methodology and public reception - and examine transatlantic influences in both directions. 109

Reading Primary dictionaries (editions and how to locate them in Oxford to be discussed) Landau, Sidney I. 2009. Major American Dictionaries. In Oxford History of Lexicography, edited by A. P. Cowie. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Micklethwait, David. 2000. Noah Webster and the American Dictionary. Jefferson, NC and London: McFarland. Morton, Herbert Charles. 1994. The Story of Webster's Third: Philip Gove's Controversial Dictionary and its Critics. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nunberg, Geoffrey. 1990. What the Usage Panel Thinks. In L. Michaels and C. Ricks, eds., The State of the Language. Berkeley: University of California Press. 2: Cobuild and corpora: contemporary dictionaries The Collins Cobuild dictionary is often regarded as the most innovative dictionary of the twentieth century, partly because it enabled practising lexicographers to catch up with some of the linguistic innovations and insights of corpus linguistics that appeared so far to have passed them by. In this seminar we will look at what made Collins Cobuild different, and better, than its predecessors and consider its influence on lexicography since its first publication in 1987. Reading Primary dictionaries (editions and how to locate them in Oxford to be discussed) ‗The Legacy of John Sinclair‘, International Journal of Lexicography Special Issue, Volume 21 Issue 3 September 2008 Moon, Rosamund. 2009 ‗The Cobuild Project', in A. P. Cowie (ed.), The Oxford History of English Lexicography, Oxford University Press Moon, Rosamund. 2010. `What can a corpus tell us about lexis?', in M. McCarthy and A. O'Keeffe (eds.) The Routledge Handbook of Corpus Linguistics, Routledge. 3: Slang dictionaries Slang is the specialist area of dictionary-making found most enticing by the public and dictionaries of slang have often held a special place in the heart of the dictionary-buying public; slang is the subject field of the most famous internet dictionary, http://www.urbandictionary.com/, ‗A veritable cornucopia of streetwise lingo, posted and defined by its readers‘. Yet the relationship between slang and colloquial, or more ‗general‘, language has been particularly tricky for lexicographers to pin down satisfactorily and the content and respectability of slang dictionaries have varied enormously. This session will consider a selection of slang dictionaries, both historical and contemporary, in the light of the particular issues (e.g. definitions and sources) characterizing slang lexicography. Reading Primary dictionaries (editions and how to locate them in Oxford to be discussed) Coleman, Julie. 2009. Slang and Cant Dictionaries. In Oxford History of Lexicography, edited by A. P. Cowie. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Coleman, Julie (2004-10). A History of Cant and Slang Dictionaries. 4 vols. Oxford: Oxford University Press Simes, G. (2005). ‗Gay Slang Lexicography: A Brief History and a Commentary on the First Two Gay Glossaries‘. Dictionaries 1-159.

110

English Language Michaelmas Term WORLD ENGLISHES Dr Susanne Wagner The term Englishes, while a commonplace for linguists, is still marked as ―incorrect‖ by spell checkers, reflecting most lay people‘s perception of one – and only one – English. Linguists do not only acknowledge different Englishes, but also classify them according to different criteria: first, we can distinguish varieties based on their status within the country under investigation; second, different varieties may be conditioned by (a set of) socio-cultural factors; third, geographical differences may have an impact on the variation. This seminar series will offer a snapshot of ways and types of variation in World Englishes, familiarising students with a number of different varieties, histories and outcomes in the history of today‘s lingua franca #1. General/introductory reading It is recommended that you should read at least two references marked with * before the teaching begins *Beal, Joan. 2010. An Introduction to Regional Englishes. Edinburgh UP Melchers, Gunnel & Philip Shaw. 2011. World Englishes. 2nd edition. Hodder Arnold. *Mesthrie, Rajend & Rakesh M. Bhatt. 2008. World Englishes. Cambridge UP *Schneider, Edgar W. 2010. English around the World. Cambridge UP Relevant for the later part of the seminar but ideally read in advance: *Schneider, Edgar W. 2007. Postcolonial English. Cambridge UP. chs. 1-4, parts of ch. 5 (relating to the varieties discussed) *Trudgill, Peter. 2004. New-dialect Formation. Edinburgh UP Description of varieties to be taken from: Kortmann, Bernd & Edgar W. Schneider (eds.). 2004. A Handbook of Varieties of English. Vol. 1: Phonology, Vol. 2: Morphosyntax. Mouton de Gruyter. (Hb; identical with 4-volume paperback set Varieties of English published in 2008, which is organised by geographic regions). Kirkpatrick, Andy (ed.). 2010. The Routledge Handbook of World Englishes. Routledge Historical setting for individual varieties to be taken from: Hickey, Raymond. 2005. Legacies of Colonial English. Cambridge UP Weeks 1-2: Setting the scene – English(es) in the british homelands Because of widespread levelling tendencies, variation in British English(es) is no longer as broad today as it used to be up until WWII. Nevertheless, many varieties have maintained maybe not ―the one‖ feature that makes them unique, but a mix of features which is not found in any other variety in the world in that exact combination or with the same frequencies. We will discuss variation in Britain in phonology as well as morphosyntax, focussing on system differences (e.g. inventory of relative markers; presence of tense & aspect categories) and formation strategies (e.g. regularisation tendencies in verbs, preference in relative clause formation, order of forms in coordinated pronominal subjects). Particular emphasis will be put on those features that ―made it‖ to other parts of the world, functioning as input for new varieties. eWAVE (http://www.ewave-atlas.org/) will serve as a hands-on tool for the remainder of the course to identify and work with different features of world Englishes. Reading *Britain in Kirkpatrick (ed.) 2010 111

*Docherty in Kirkpatrick (ed.) 2010 *2x Filppula in Kortmann & Schneider (eds.) 2004 Week 3: From Great Britain to the new world: US & Canadian varieties Apart from the homeland varieties, English in North American has had the longest time to develop subvarieties. In this seminar, we will look at American and Canadian English, including both ―mainstream‖ and more exotic dialects. Both countries show a wide range of (non)variation: while the varieties as such are generally considered as geographically rather homogeneous (given the size of the countries), exceptions to prove the rule can be found both in the US and Canada (e.g. conservative coastal varieties in the southeastern US or Newfoundland English in Canada). The US can also be analysed as the first colonial (and postcolonial) variety of English, established long before colonies in Africa or Asia would begin to play a role. Key terms to be discussed include Görlach‘s idea of colonial lag as well as Mufwene‘s founder principle. Reading *Görlach, Manfred. 1987. Colonial lag? The alleged conservative character of American English. English World-Wide 8: 41–60. *Mufwene, Salikoko. 1995. The founder principle in creole genesis. Diachronica 13: 83–134. *Kretzschmar in Kirkpatrick (2010) *Levey in Kirkpatrick (2010) Chambers in Hickey (ed.) 2005 Clarke in Hickey (ed.) 2005 Schneider in Hickey (ed.) 2005 Wolfram & Schilling-Estes in Hickey (ed.) 2005 N.B.: for this session, students should choose between American English (read Schneider + Wolfram & Schilling-Estes) and Canadian English (read Chambers & Clarke), but collectively the group should cover both varieties. Weeks 4-5: English as a world language – models & implications In these two seminars, we will first familiarise ourselves with three models/frameworks of classifying and analysing world Englishes: Kachru‘s circles model, Schneider‘s dynamic model and Trudgill‘s new dialect formation model. After a more theoretical discussion of the similarities and differences, advantages and disadvantages of the models in the first seminar, we will apply them selectively and eclectically to a number of different varieties from different parts of the world, with different histories and at different stages of the respective process(es). Depending on students‘ preferences, two foci are possible: English in Asia and English in the Caribbean. For Asia, varieties to be discussed include Indian English as relatively established, English in Singapore vs. Malaysia (many differences as well as similarities) and English in China as ―the new force to be reckoned with‖. For the Caribbean, Jamaican English – or should this be Jamaican Creole? – will be the focus of a discussion on pidgins and creoles which will also include issues of identity formation (Dread Talk?) that ultimately lead us back to Britain and the role of Jamaican Creole in metropolitan London. *Schneider in Kirkpatrick (ed.) 2010. *Schneider, Edgar W. 2007. Postcolonial English. Cambridge UP. chs. 1-4, parts of ch. 5 for the varieties discussed. *Trudgill, Peter. 2004. New-dialect Formation. Edinburgh UP. Depending on focus, chapters from Kortmann & Schneider (eds.) (2004) & Kirkpatrick (2010): 112

India: Gargesh; Bhatt (K&S); Mukherjee (K); Singapore: 2x Wee (K&S); Ling (K); Malaysia: 2x Baskaran (K&S); Ling (K); Jamaica: Devonish & Harry; Patrick; China: Zhichang (K). Week 6: Dimensions of variation – how world Englishes vary In this final meeting, we will re-consider the extralinguistic, regional developments and findings from a more general but intralinguistic perspective. Our focus will be on the different levels of language (from phonology via morphosyntax to discourse), and we will aim to unify contrasts with the help of a more typological perspective. We will look at parallel developments in unrelated varieties which may illustrate such general forces as analogy vs. economy. Another area to be discussed is Mesthrie‘s idea of preservers vs. deleters. With the help of eWAVE, we will look at one feature that students are particularly interested in from that perspective. Reading *Deterding in Kirkpatrick (ed.) 2010 *Kortmann in Kirkpatrick (ed.) 2010

113

C-COURSE DESCRIPTIONS - HILARY TERM You can select your C- Courses from any period strand 650-1550 Hilary Term

OLD NORSE LITERATURE Dr Heather O‘Donoghue ([email protected]) This course is designed to be flexible enough to meet two needs. On the one hand, beginners in Old Norse will be introduced to a varied range of Old Norse Icelandic prose and poetry, and set these texts in their historical and cultural contexts. On the other, those who have already studied some Old Norse will be able to focus on texts directly relevant or complementary to their own interests and expertise. There will be language classes in Old Norse, and a series of introductory classes on the literature, in Michaelmas Term 2012. These classes are mandatory for anyone who wishes to do the option in Hilary Term but has not done any Old Norse at undergraduate level.

BEOWULF Dr Heather O‘Donoghue ([email protected]) The basis of this course is a detailed study of the Anglo-Saxon poem Beowulf in the original language. Topics covered may include (but need not be limited to): structure and story; poetic technique; historical context (date, authorship, mss); biblical and Christian traditions; Scandinavian background; reception and translation. There will be scope to adapt the course to accommodate the particular interests of individual students. Essential preparatory reading Klaeber‟s Beowulf, fourth edition, ed. Fulk, Bjork and Niles Or George Jack‘s student edition of Beowulf Plus Andy Orchard‘s Critical Companion to Beowulf and Bjork and Niles‘ A Beowulf Handbook

WORD AND IMAGE IN LATE ANGLO-SAXON LITERARY CULTURE: FROM KING CANUTE TO EDWARD THE CONFESSOR Dr Mark Atherton ([email protected]) 1. The Anglo-Saxon Chronicle: Developments in narrative prose When reading the Chronicle, it is interesting to compare and contrast the different styles and themes of the chroniclers writing in the reigns of Ethelred (978-1016), Cnut (1016-1035) and Edward (1042-1066). Look also at the Chronicle poems written in these reigns, which provide interesting perspectives on the use and development of poetry in the period. Katherine O‘Brien O‘Keeffe (ed.), The Anglo-Saxon Chronicle: A Collaborative Edition Vol. 5: Manuscript C (Cambridge: D.S. Brewer, 2001) Michael J. Swanton (trans.), The Anglo-Saxon Chronicles (London: Phoenix, 2000)

114

Thomas A. Bredehoft, ‗History and Memory in the Anglo-Saxon Chronicle‟, in David Johnson and Elaine Treharne, Readings in Medieval Texts: Interpreting Old and Middle English Literature (Oxford University Press, 2005), pp. 109-21. Jayne Carroll, ‗Viking Wars and The Anglo-Saxon Chronicle‟, in Richard North and Joe Allard (eds.), Beowulf and Other Stories: A New Introduction to Old English, Old Icelandic and AngloNorman Literatures (Harlow: Pearson, 2007), ch. 11. Cecily Clarke, ‗The Narrative Mode of the The Anglo-Saxon Chronicle before the Conquest‘, in Peter Clemoes and Kathleen Hughes (eds.) England before the Conquest (Cambridge: CUP, 1971), pp. 215-36. 2. Homily and Law: Wulfstan and his imitators Wulfstan‘s Sermo Lupi and Cnut‘s Address to the English Nation are available conveniently in Treharne, Elaine Old and Middle English c. 890-c.1450. An Anthology, 3rd edition (Oxford, 2010). For a discussion of the text of Sermo Lupi and its background, read Godden, Malcom, ‗Apocalypse and Invasion in Late Anglo-Saxon England‘, From Anglo-Saxon to Early Middle English (Oxford, 1994), 130-162, especially pp. 142-162 on Wulfstan. See also Orchard, Andy, ‗Crying Wolf: oral style and the Sermones Lupi‘, Anglo-Saxon England 22 (1992), 239-64 and Jon Wilcox, ‗The Wulf on Shepherds: Wulfstan, Bishops and the Context of the Sermo Lupi‘, Old English Prose: Basic Readings, ed. Paul Szarmach (New York, 2000), 395-418. 3. Biography Main texts Frank Barlow (ed. and trans.), The Life of Edward who Rests at Westminster (1st edn Edinburgh, 1962; 2nd edn Oxford, 1992) A. Campbell (ed. and trans.) Encomium Emmae Reginae (London, 1949) M. Winterbottom and R.M. Thomson (eds.), William of Malmesbury: Saints‟ Lives (Oxford, 2002) William of Malmesbury‘s Latin Life of St Wulfstan was based on a lost Old English life of Wulfstan bishop of Worcester by the Anglo-Saxon writer Colman. Studies Barlow, Frank Edward the Confessor (London, 1970) Mason, Emma St Wulfstan of Worcester, c. 1008-1095 (Oxford, 1990) Rumble, Alexander (ed.), The Reign of Cnut, King of England, Denmark, and Norwy (London, 1994) Stafford, Pauline Queen Emma and Queen Edith. Queenship and Women‟s Power in EleventhCentury England (Oxford, 2001) [This paperback has a very useful bibliography] 4. Hagiography: Anonymous Old English Saints‘ Lives 4. Hagiography: Anonymous Old English Saints‘ Lives Whatley, E. G. ‗Late Old English Hagiography, c. 950-1150.‘ Hagiographies: histoire internationale de la littérature; hagiographique latine et vernaculaire en Occident des origines à 1550 ed. Guy Phillippart, vol. 2 (Turnhout, 1994), pp. 429-99.

115

Hugh Magennis (ed.) The Old English Life of Saint Mary of Egypt (Exeter, 2002) [with parallel translation] For a discussion, see essay by Andy Orchard in Donald Scragg, The Old English Life of Mary of Egypt (Western Michigan University, 2005) Elaine Treharne (ed.) The Old English Life of St Nicholas (Leeds, 1997) [with translation at the back of the book] The story of Euphrosyne is found (even though it is anonymous) in the anthology edited by W.W. Skeat, Ælfric's Lives of Saints, Early English Text Society original series 76, 82, 94, 114 (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1881-1900) [with parallel translation] [For a discussion see Paul E. Szarmach, Holy Men and Holy Women: Old English Prose Saints' Lives and their Contexts. Albany: State University of New York Press, 1996.] The Story of Joseph For the different texts, see the two OE versions as edited by Crawford and Neil Ker in Samuel J. Crawford (ed.) The Old English Version of the Heptateuch, Early English Text Society vol. 160 (London, 1969) Daniel Anlezark, Reading ―The Story of Joseph‖ in MS Cambridge, Corpus Christi College 201‘. The Power of Words: Anglo-Saxon Studies Presented to Donald G. Scragg on his Seventieth birthday ed. Hugh Magennis and Jonathan Wilcox (Morgantown, 2006), 61-94 Mary P. Richards, ‗Fragmentary Versions of Genesis in Old English Prose: Context and Function‘, in Barnhouse and Withers, Old English Hexateuch: Aspects and Approaches, pp. 145-163 Benjamin Withers, ‗Unfulfilled Promise: The Rubrics of the Old English Prose Genesis‘, ASE 28 (1999), 111-39. The romance of Apollonius (the first version of the Pericles story) P. Goolden (ed.) The Old English „Apollonius of Tyre‟ (Oxford, 1958); for a translation see the parallel text edition by Elaine Treharne (ed.) Old and Middle English c.890-c.1450: An Anthology, 3rd edition (Oxford, 2010). Elizabeth Archibald, Apollonius of Tyre; Medieval Themes and Variations (Cambridge, 1991) 5. Word and Image Janet Backhouse, D.H. Turner and Leslie Webster, The Golden Age of Anglo-Saxon Art 966-1066 (London, 1984) [What kinds of art flourished in this period? Why?] For some colour pictures of manuscripts, see Michelle Brown, Manuscripts from the Anglo-Saxon Age (London, 2009) The Hexateuch Rebecca Barnhouse and Benjamin C. Withers (eds.), The Old English Hexateuch: Aspects and Approaches (Kalamazoo: Medieval Institute Publications, 2000). Benjamin C. Withers, The Illustrated Old English Hexateuch, Cotton Claudius B.iv. The Frontier of Seeing and Reading in Anglo-Saxon England (London: British Library, 2007). The Bayeux Tapestry David M. Wilson, The Bayeux Tapestry (London: Thames and Hudson, 2004) 116

6. The Languages of Poetry Beechy, Tiffany, The Poetics of Old English (Farnham: Ashgate, 2010) Bredehoft, Thomas, ‗Ælfric and Late Old English Verse‘, Anglo-Saxon England 33 (2004), 77-107 Lapidge, Michael ‗A Survey of the Anglo-Latin Background‘ in S.B. Greenfield and D.G. Calder, A New Critical History of Old English Literature (New York, 1986), pp. 5-37. Orchard, Andy, ‗After Aldhelm: The Teaching and Transmission of the Anglo-Latin Hexameter‘, The Journal of Medieval Latin 2 (1992), 96-133. Pasternack, Carol Braun, The Textuality of Old English Poetry (Cambridge: CUP, 1995) Townend, Matthew, Language and History in Viking Age England. Linguistic Relations between Speakers of Old Norse and Old English (Turnhout: Brepols, 2002)

AFTER CHAUCER Dr Helen Barr ([email protected]) What does it mean to write - or to read - ‗After Chaucer‘? This course will explore how Chaucer‘s reputation was constructed in his lifetime and after his death by ‗Chaucer himself‘, by near contemporaries, and by academic critics. Writing after Chaucer produced many texts considered to be written so strikingly in the manner of Chaucer that they were included in some of the best Chaucer manuscripts. Ever since, they have hovered around the margins of the Chaucerian canon. To consider ‗After Chaucer‘ in all its senses the course will focus on the following texts: The Prologue to the Tale of Beryn; Lydgate‘s Siege of Thebes; The Cuckoo and The Nightingale; The Tale of Gamelyn; The Floure and the Leaf, and The Assembly of Ladies. These works will be studied alongside those ‗authentic‘ Chaucer texts with which they are in dialogue; chiefly Fragment A of The Canterbury Tales, The Parlement of Fowles and The Legend of Good Women.

LITERATURE, DISSIDENCE AND INTELLECTUAL HISTORY IN LATEMEDIEVAL ENGLAND Dr Kantik Ghosh, Trinity ([email protected]) The latter half of the fourteenth and the first half of the fifteenth centuries in England witnessed an extraordinarily rich and diverse literary creativity in a range of genres, both inherited and novel. This discursive and generic fragmentation and innovation was accompanied by and in part the result of an explosive ecclesiastical politics (the papal schism; various heresies, both in England and on the Continent, preeminently those associated with John Wyclif in England and Jan Hus in Bohemia; conciliar negotiations at Constance and Basel; ‗anticlericalism‘ of various kinds) as well as a burgeoning lay intellectual ambition outside the traditional Latinate domain of the arts and theology faculties of Oxford, Paris and a handful of other European universities. This C-course will examine a range of writing – polemical, poetic, homiletic, exegetic -- produced in England (primarily in English, but also taking into account Latin texts of major relevance): the works of Wyclif and of his followers (e.g. Of the Truth of Sacred Scripture; English Wycliffite Sermons; tracts relating to translation into the vernacular; various polemical tracts dealing with aspects of ecclesiology and philosophical theology); the works of the hereticated bishop, Reginald Pecock; poetry directly addressing contemporary concerns relating to ecclesiastical politics and academic learning (e.g. ‗Piers Plowman tradition‘; Court of Sapience). It will seek to understand how intellectual labour and identity are reconfigured in an environment when university learning merges 117

pervasively into the sphere of broader cultural negotiations encompassing political dissidence, ecclesiastical critique, theological scepticism and poetic ambition. Scholarly work – of recent decades and ongoing -- on Wycliffism in particular and on the early fifteenth century in general has been fundamentally reshaping our understanding of late-medieval England, and this course will seek to offer an informed introduction to the field. Themes: Reading for each week will address the issues of socio-political dissidence, intellectual history and English literature in a variety of genres. Week 1: Introduction and orientation: themes and critical issues This class will begin with individual c.15-minute presentations on issues and problems raised by vacation reading. When preparing for this session, you will find it helpful to focus on particular questions raised by your reading, e.g. what relationship(s) seem to have subsisted between learning, especially biblical learning, and dissent, whether in medieval polemics or practice or both? What might be the problems/opportunities afforded by doing intellectual, particularly theological, work in the vernacular? What opportunities does poetry or the dialogic form afford vis-à-vis homiletics or polemical tracts? How is the role of exegesis theorized, and how is exegesis practised? Week 2: The Bible, learning, translation and dissidence: Prologue to the Wycliffite Bible; selected English Wycliffite Sermons; tracts on Bible translation Classes in weeks 2-5 will begin with short presentations (5-10 minutes each) on particular issues relating to the set reading. What kinds of intellectual identity are assumed or shaped by the Prologue to the Wycliffite Bible? How do the Prologue and the Sermons understand the task of the exegete and the translator? To what extent do the Prologue and the English Wycliffite sermons illuminate one another, and how helpful is it to consider them as ‗dissident‘ texts? What are the larger cultural implications of the debate over Bible translation? How do such texts situate themselves vis-à-vis the medieval university and clergie? Week 3: Dialogic dissent: The Testimony of William Thorpe; Four Wycliffite Dialogues; Reginald Pecock‘s The Book of Faith How do we interpret the literary forms chosen by authors such as Thorpe and Pecock? How diversely is the dialogic form used? What distinctions or overlaps can we identify between thinkers writing on opposite sides of doctrinal and institutional divides? Week 4: The laicization of learning: De Oblacione Jugis Sacrificii; The Lanterne of Li3t; more Reginald Pecock What are the implications of the transmission of specialized academic learning in the vernacular? How are the interrelationships of Latin and English, of clergie and popular religion, reconfigured? What kinds of academic techniques and methods are presented in Wycliffite writings, and in those of Pecock? How does Wycliffism shape, and how is it shaped by, the larger literary-intellectual context of the late-middle ages? Week 5: Learning, dissent and poetics: Piers Plowman, B. VIII-XIII; Mum and the Sothsegger; Court of Sapience Langland, and to an extent poems in the ‗Piers Plowman tradition‘, weave fragments from learned discourses into a distinctive poetic idiolect. What is at stake in their juxtaposition and interrogation of different learned idioms, and in their evocations of the vulnerability of pedagogic and 118

ecclesiastical institutions? How do these experiments with learning and poetics compare with Wycliffite products in other genres? Do they adopt similar kinds of scepticism towards the uses to which learning can be put? How do we read The Court of Sapience in a post-Arundelian context? Week 6: Overview/retrospective Teaching and assessment: students will be required to make presentations during seminars.

1550-1700 Hilary Term

EARLY MODERN UNDERWORLDS Dr Margaret Kean ([email protected]) This course will foreground the importance of the spatial imagination in the early modern period for the consideration of key theological, political, cultural and textual issues. Ghosts, gods and devils came up from the underworld; classical heroes, political enemies and the souls of the damned went down. Meantime, the majority of early modern Englishmen and women worried about their own intermediate position on a vertical axis of salvation/damnation. Bearing this early modern cartography in mind, we will review the varied appropriations of hell by early modern writers and consider the placement of hell within both the structure of their arguments and the composition of their texts. Some of the most rousing sermons from the period deal with this topic but a rhetorical exposition of the secrets and torments of hell was heard far beyond the pulpit. The energy attached to this locale not only spills onto the public stage in this period but also invigorates early modern epic in ways which stimulate debate and prompt the questioning of received ideas. In doctrinal debate, popular belief and also in erudite literary compositions, knowledge gained from the underworld is seen as a valuable investment but dislocation, dislocation and displacement are necessarily part of this investigation. As a topos hell accommodates contradictory significations, a place both of authoritarian regulation and also of transgressive activities. Contradiction and controversy will be a mainstay of our course discussions as we look at some of the compositional, doctrinal, political, stylistic and emotive recourses made in this period to inherited concepts and imagery relating to the underworld. Debates over political events, doctrinal disputes, reading methods and reception history will all be areas for investigation; so too the counterpointing of classical and Christian ideas in the period. According to one of our authors, ―They say that hell is but mere poetry‖. We shall see. Recourse to the imagery of hell is remarkably common in the literature of this period – those interested in taking this course can begin their study almost anywhere and, of course, the wider the background reading the better. In the seminars we will survey a wide range of texts including plays, sermons, polemics and epics. Please note that a working knowledge of the structure of Virgil‘s Aeneid; Spenser‘s Faerie Queene; and Milton‘s Paradise Lost is required and those taking this course should be sure to have acquired this in advance. Week 1: Staging Hell Thomas Kyd Spanish Tragedy ; William Shakespeare Hamlet ; Thomas Lodge & Robert Greene A Looking Glasse for London; Thomas Dekker Newes from Hell (1606) JG Harris & N Korda, eds., Staged properties in early modern English drama (2002) Andrew Gurr & Mariko Ichikawa Staging in Shakepeare‟s Theatres (2000) Andrew Gurr Shakespeare‟s Opposites: The Admiral‟sCompany 1594-1625 (2009) 119

Lukas Erne Beyond The Spanish Tragedy: a study of the works of Thomas Kyd (2001), esp. pp.51-9 [for the medieval background] Clifford Davidson & Thomas H. Seiler, eds.: The Iconography of Hell (1992) Week 2: Gunpowder, treason and so very many diabolical plots James I His majesty‟s speech in the last session of Parliament, concerning the Gunpowder plot (1605) in The Harleian Miscellany III, 15; William Shakespeare Macbeth (porter scene II iii); Richard Smith The powder Treason (1615); Deo trin-uni Britanniae bis ultori (1623); Hell‟s Hulie Burlie (1644); A Trance, or News from Hell (1649) Mark Nicholls, Mark, Investigating Gunpowder Plot (1991) Daniel Dodson, ‗Allusions to the Gun Powder Plot in Dekker‘s Whore of Babylon‘, N&Q 6 (1959) John Watkins ‗Out of her Ashes May a Second Phoenix Rise‘: James I and the Legacy of Elizabethan anti-Catholicism‘ in Arthur F. Marotti, ed., Catholicism and Anti-Catholicism in Early Modern English Texts (1999) Sharon Achinstein Milton and the Revolutionary Reader (1994), esp chp 5 Nathan Johnstone The Devil and Demonism in Early Modern England (2006), chp 7 Week 3: The Horrors and the Humour of Hell Anon. Grim the Collier of Croydon ; John Donne Ignatius His Conclave (1611); Christopher Love Hell‟s Terror: or a treatise of the torments of the damned, As a preservation against security (1653); John Bunyan A Mapp Shewing the Order & Causes of Salvation & Damnation (1663?; 1692) C.A. Patrides ‗Renaissance and Modern Views on Hell‘ Harvard Theological Review 57 (1964). Keith Thomas The ends of life: roads to fulfilment in early modern England (2009), pp226-235 Edward Ingebretsen Maps of Heaven, Maps of Hell: religious terror as memory from the Puritans to Steven King (1996) Week 4: Historical Visions Edmund Spenser The Faerie Queene (1596) I iv,v,xi (House of Pride, Despair); II vii (Cave of Mammon); John Milton Paradise Lost (1674) Books I,II,VI, X, XI, XII A.C Hamilton The Spenser Encyclopedia (1990) Carol V Kaske Spenser and Biblical Poetics (1999) John N King Spenser‟s Poetry and the Reformation Tradition (1990) Kate McLoughlin Authoring War: the literary representation of war from The Iliad to Iraq (2011) Week 5: Moving between Worlds : translations of Virgil John Boys Aeneas his descent into Hell (1661); Cataplus or Aeneas his descent to hell. A mock poem... in English burlesque (1672); John Philips Maronides (1678); John Dryden The Works of Virgil (1697)

120

Colin Burrow ‗Virgil in English Translation‘ in Charles Martindale, ed., The Cambridge Companion to Virgil (1997) Paul Hammond Dryden and the Traces of Classical Rome (1999) John Barnard ‗Dryden, Tonson and the Patrons of The Works of Virgil (1697)‘ in Paul Hammond & David Hopkins,eds., John Dryden: Tercentenary Essays (2000) Ronnie H Terpening Charon and the Crossing : ancient, medieval, and Renaissance transformations of a myth (1985) Raymond J Clark Catabasis: Vergil and the Wisdom Tradition (1979) Week 6: The Metaphysics of Hell Christopher Marlowe Dr Faustus ; Richard Overton Man Wholly Mortal (1655); John Milton Paradise Lost (1674) I & II Intro & notes in David Bevington,ed., Doctor Faustus A- and B- Texts [The Revels Plays] (1993) John Cox The Devil and the Sacred in English Drama 1350-1642 (2000) D.P. Walker The Decline of Hell: seventeenth- century discussions of eternal torment (1964) Philip C. Almond Heaven and Hell in Enlightenment England (1994)

REWRITING LUCRETIUS: MATERIALISM AND POETRY IN THE SEVENTEENTH CENTURY Professor David Norbrook ([email protected]) This course will explore the way some English poets responded to Lucretius‘s De rerum natura. This philosophical epic disconcertingly combined poetic mastery with a frontal challenge to received beliefs about the divine role in designing and sustaining the universe, the immortality of the soul and the superiority of humans to animals. The course will explore the early modern reception of Lucretius as a complicated process of resistance, often through the invented caricature of the ‗atheist‘ or ‗Epicure‘, and covert assimilation. It will focus in particular on the midseventeenth century, when the new science turned increasingly to the atomistic basis of his philosophy and Lucretius‘s unconventional religious, ethical and political views took on a new plausibility: this was when the first translations at last appeared into English and other European languages. We shall explore ways in which a range of writers including Milton, Dryden, John Evelyn, Margaret Cavendish, Aphra Behn, Lucy Hutchinson, and the Earl of Rochester engaged with Lucretius in poetic debates which remarkably anticipate many of today‘s controversial issues, from intelligent design to ecology and animal rights. We shall also ask why so many women writers took a particular interest in Lucretius, and how this reflects on current debates about gender and science. We shall ask how what impact Lucretius‘s wholly secular account of the origins of government had on a political universe where rival theories of government tended to assume a divine sanction. We shall examine the complex interplay of philosophy and poetry as seventeenthcentury writers, alert to a new vogue for celebrating ‗matter‘ above‘ words‘, translated a poet who took delight in transforming Epicurus‘s austere philosophy into rich verse. At a more theoretical level, the classes will offer Lucretian materialism as a useful point of reference for exploring the widely differing uses of ‗materialism‘ in current critical debates, from Timpanaro to

121

postmodernists. No prior knowledge of Lucretius or of Latin will be required, though guidance will be offered for those who wish to engage with the Latin. The foundational text for the class is of course Lucretius‘s De rerum natura, and students will be expected to use the Loeb edition with its prose English translation as well as any other preferred translation. After an introductory survey the class will proceed week by week to explore the themes raised by particular sections of the De rerum natura and the way these were taken up by seventeenth-century writers. The main texts to be considered will be Milton, Paradise Lost; Margaret Cavendish, Poems, and Fancies and selections from other writings; Lucy Hutchinson, Order and Disorder and Lucretius translation; Aphra Behn, selected poems including ‗To the unknown Daphnis on his Excellent Translation of Lucretius‘; John Wilmot, Earl of Rochester, ‗A Satire against Reason, and Mankind‘ and other poems; Hobbes, Leviathan, chapter 12. To focus class discussion, a course packet will be provided with extensive selections for each week. Week 1: The gods, religion and atheism Week 2: Nature Week 3: Mortalism, ethics and the Epicure. Week 4: Gender and sexuality Week 5: Politics Week 6: The sublime

AUTHORS, MISCELLANEITY AND LYRIC POETRY Dr Philip West ([email protected]) This C-course investigates the proposition that the variety of ordering arrangements of lyric poems within early modern anthologies, miscellanies, and single-author collections is one of the most important yet under-appreciated features of early modern literary culture. It also offers an opportunity to see what light can be shone on the history of reading by attending to poetic groupings and collections. We will test this idea in a series of seminars focussed on the material forms of collections – manuscript and print anthologies (Tottel; England's Helicon; Wit's Recreations), pseudonymous and authorial collections (Spenser, Jonson, Herrick, Shirley) and posthumously printed editions (Donne, Herbert, Carew) – and also by asking what new conceptual possibilities for poetic expression were opened up by poets' and readers' use of numerological, architectural, sequential, thematic, and biographical structures and models. Poets, readers, scribes, compilers, booksellers, and even the odd plagiarist, will feature as we explore what happened to individual poems when they joined a group, willingly or otherwise. Along the way we will consider how poetics and notions of authorship developed through an engagement with the idea of collecting and miscellanies, and how readers and scribes exercised their own authority over texts for better or worse. With the rise of printed anthologies (such as Tottel's Miscellany and England's Helicon) and the habit of making manuscript verse collections, the later sixteenth and earlier seventeenth century saw an unprecedented circulation of poems arranged into various kinds of orderings by various kinds of hands. The hands in question might belong to individual poets of genius, such as Ben Jonson, whose Epigrams and The Forest (part of his Works, 1616) asked new and difficult questions of their readers and revitalised the art of poetic ordering; or they might be the work of a junior or senior member of an Oxford college, gleaning the latest scurrilous verses or skit on 122

current events for a manuscript book for private viewing by a coterie. Both compilations might in turn be rearranged (or indeed ransacked) in the service of a bookseller keen to capitalize on popular taste and a desire for elite culture by publishing a 'recreational' or instructional anthology: The Academy of Complements (1650) is a well-known example. For many readers, printed anthologies and manuscript miscellanies were the main source of poetry: cheaper and more readily available than expensive single-author collections, they thrived in ways which often defy our sense of the literary canon. But whether high or low, authorial or editorial, ground-breaking or quotidian, poetic collecting in this period has much to tell us about early modern authorship, genres, developments in style and rhetoric, popular taste, and the history of reading. Week 1 How did readers collect poems in sixteenth-century Britain? What was the role of manuscript culture in developing a sense of the order of poetry, and how does the pivotal intersection of print (Tottel and its imitators) change the scene? What role did education and classical literature play? How important were collectable lyric poems to a literary culture that prized substantial genres such as epic? (Henrician manuscript culture; Tottel's Miscellany; the Greek Anthology; epigram culture)? Week 2 Focussing on verse miscellanies and studies in the history of reading, we will ask how humanist habits of reading influenced collecting and ordering of verse, and consider specific readers and scribes as recompilers of poetry. How did commonplacing and the systematic dismembering techniques of rhetorical education sit with the idea of larger poetic structures such as sonnet sequences? How strongly or loosely coupled were poems to their structural contexts? How, if at all, did readers respond to collections and large-scale effects rather than to individual poems and local moments of rhetorical brio? (Sidney, Spenser, Gascoigne, Master F.J. and Hundreth Sundry Flowres, Greville.) Week 3 Jonson's Works (1616) printed for the first time two of the most exciting and challengingly 'collected' works of early modern poetry: the 133 Epigrams, and 15 poems of The Forest. How did Jonson arrange and deploy these texts that he had been writing for almost twenty years? What changes did he make when he put them together? We will look in detail at the place of ordering and sequence in the construction of these two hugely influential books, and at Jonson's critical thoughts on poetic arrangement and on the genres (epigram, verse letter, satire) he promoted to the exclusion of other 'collectables' like sonnets. (Jonson, Epigrams and The Forest, with reference to Underwood). Week 4 This seminar focuses on two of the most important models of the poetic collection to emerge in the early seventeenth century: Herbert's The Temple and Donne's Poems, both printed posthumously in 1633. We will compare the architectural, miscellany-based, and biographical models which print brought to these books, and compare evidence from manuscript witness and the lives of the two authors. How does Herbert's evident concern with how his poetry should be received and used compare with Donne's apparent – but perhaps disingenuous – carelessness? How should the posthumous interference of both men's literary editors be seen, and what can it tell us about poetic collections? (Donne, Herbert, Carew.)

123

Week 5 This seminar looks at the generation of poets after Jonson, and particularly on how they made the transition from manuscript miscellany to printed collectivity. Alongside the political revolution of the 1640s came a publishing revolution, as poets such as Milton, Herrick, and James Shirley found themselves gathering and ordering poems for the press. What differences did print make to the way they revised and arranged their work? And what attitudes to authorship and their 'intellectual property' did they show? (Milton's Poems (1645), Shirley's Poems &c (1646), and Herrick, Hesperides (1648).) Week 6 In the last seminar we will look at how printed anthologies had changed in the century since Tottel, and consider the curious relationship between high and low culture that they embody. Witty miscellanies were one of the hits of the 1640s and 50s, and they laid the ground for the more famous Restoration collections of public verse and witty compliment. Yet their texts were often anything but 'new': they might derive from 1630s university manuscripts, or from printed editions of the 1640s. Who read such collections, and why? What impact did the Civil Wars, and the shifting fortunes of press censorship, have on what was anthologised? (Wit's Recreations; The Harmony of the Muses; songbooks; Herrick's Hesperides; Pick, Festum Voluptatis, and other plagiaristic works).

1660-1830 Hilary Term

SENSES OF HUMOUR FROM WORDSWORTH TO ELIOT Dr Matthew Bevis ([email protected]) On meeting Wordsworth for the first time, William Hazlitt noticed something he hadn‘t expected to find: ‗a convulsive inclination to laughter about the mouth, a good deal at variance with the solemn, stately expression of the rest of his face‘. What might this odd mixture of high spirits and solemnity entail for the study of poetry from Romanticism to Modernism? This C-course option examines how emerging philosophical and cultural discussion about the causes, nature and aims of humour can enrich our understanding of poetry in the period. We will study how relations between the bardic and the ludic are developed as poets re-work traditional genres and modes (ballad, lyric, and satire) by allowing other tones and styles – varieties of mock-heroic, nursery rhyme and parody – to permeate their writing. We will also explore poets‘ responses to popular forms of entertainment (the carnival and the pantomime; cartoons and caricatures; music-hall acts and circus-clowns). Writing one hundred years after Hazlitt, T. S. Eliot observed that ‗from one point of view, the poet aspires to the condition of a music-hall comedian‘. This course will attempt to trace how this point of view could have been arrived at, and will consider what poets enjoy – and risk – when they tell a joke, indulge in bathos, talk nonsense, or otherwise intimate that they are speaking with a forked tongue. Preliminary reading On social and historical debates about humour in the period: Stuart Tave, The Amiable Humorist (1967), R. B. Martin, The Triumph of Wit: A Study of Victorian Comic Theory (1974) and R. B. Henkle, Comedy and Culture: 1820-1900 (1980). Broader studies: John Morreall, ed., The Philosophy of Laughter and Humour (1987), Ted Cohen, Jokes: Philosophical Thoughts on Joking Matters (1999), Simon Critchley, On Humour (2002), Matthew Bevis, Comedy: A Very Short Introduction (2012). See also ‗recommended general reading‘ at the end of this document for more material.

124

Week 1: Child‘s Play Primary reading William Wordsworth, Lyrical Ballads, with Other Poems (1800) + parodies of Wordsworth by J. K. Stephen, James Smith, John Keats, Catherine Fanshawe, James Hogg, J. H. Reynolds, Lord Byron, Walter Savage Landor and Hartley Coleridge (all available in Parodies: An Anthology from Chaucer to Beerbohm and After, ed. Dwight Macdonald (1960), pp.73-97 Initial secondary reading David Hartley, ‗Of Wit and Humour‘ in Observations on Man (1749) Immanuel Kant, section on laughter and humour from Critique of Judgment (1790) Friedrich Schiller, ‗On Naïve and Sentimental Poetry‘ (1795-6) Week 2: The Truth in Masquerade Primary reading Lord Byron, Beppo (1818) and The Vision of Judgment (1822) Initial secondary reading Friedrich Schlegel, selections from Critical Fragments (1797) and Athenaeum Fragments (1798) William Hazlitt, ‗On Wit and Humour‘ in Lectures on The English Comic Writers (1819) Mikhail Bakhtin, ‗Carnival Laughter and Ambivalence‘, in The Bakhtin Reader, ed. Morris (1994) Week 3: High Spirits Primary reading Christina Rossetti, Goblin Market and Other Poems (1862) – ‗Winter: My Secret‘, ‗Fata Morgana‘, ‗No, thank you, John‘, ‗A Testimony‘, ‗Amen‘ , ‗Twice‘ + Sing-Song: A Nursery Rhyme Book (1872) Emily Dickinson, selections from Poems (wr. 1852-86, pub. 1890-91) Initial secondary reading Ralph Waldo Emerson, ‗The Comic‘ (1843) Soren Kierkegaard, selected comments on humour and religion from Concluding Unscientific Postscript (1846) Suzanne Juhasz, ed., Comic Power in Emily Dickinson (1993) Peter Berger, ‗Toward a Theology of the Comic‘, Redeeming Laughter: The Comic Dimension of Human Experience (1997), pp. 187-216

125

Week 4: Laughable Lyrics Primary reading Edward Lear, Book of Nonsense and More Nonsense (1862), Nonsense Songs and Stories (1871) and Laughable Lyrics (1877) A.E. Housman, selections from his light verse (wr. 1867-78) + A Shropshire Lad (1896) Initial secondary reading G. K. Chesterton, ‗A Defense of Nonsense‘ in The Defendant (1901) George Orwell, ‗Nonsense Poetry‘ in Collected Essays, Journalism and Letters, vol. 4 (1968) Hugh Haughton, ed., introduction to The Chatto Book of Nonsense Poetry (1988) Susan Stewart, Nonsense: Aspects of Intertextuality in Folklore and Literature (1979) Week 5: Light Relief Primary reading W. S. Gilbert, The Bab Ballads (1862-79) Rudyard Kipling, Departmental Ditties (1886) + Barrack-Room Ballads and Other Verses (1892) Initial secondary reading Alexander Bain, ‗The Ludicrous – Causes of Laughter‘ in The Emotions and The Will (1859) Sigmund Freud, ‗Humour‘ (1927) in The Penguin Freud Reader, ed. Phillips (2006) David Bromwich, ‗Kipling‘s Jest‘ in A Choice of Inheritance: Self and Community from Edmund Burke to Robert Frost (1989) Week 6: Serious Fun Primary reading T. S. Eliot, Inventions of the March Hare: Poems 1909-1917, ed. Ricks (1996), Prufrock and Other Observations (1917) and Old Possum‟s Book of Practical Cats (1939) Initial secondary reading: Charles Baudelaire, ‗On the Essence of Laughter‘ (1855) Henri Bergson, Laughter: An Essay on the Meaning of the Comic (1900) T. S. Eliot, ‗Caricature‘ in London Letter, May 1921, ‗The Romantic Englishman, The Comic Spirit, and The Function of Criticism‘, both in Lawrence Rainey, ed., The Annotated Waste Land, 2nd edn (2005) T. S. Eliot, ‗Marie Lloyd‘, Selected Essays (1950)

126

Recommended General Reading Some discussions of humour, laughter and comedy from c. 1750 to c. 1920 David Hartley, Observations on Man (1749), Pt. 1, ch. 4 Francis Hutcheson, Reflections Upon Laughter (1750) James Beattie, ‗On Laughter and Ludicrous Composition‘, in Essays (1776) Joseph Priestley, A Course of Lectures on Oratory and Criticism (1777), lecture 24 Immanuel Kant, Critique of Judgement (1790), Bk. 2, sec. 54 Friedrich Schlegel, Critical Fragments (1797) and Athenaeum Fragments (1798) Jean-Paul Richter, School for Aesthetics (1803) August Wilhelm von Schlegel, Lectures on Dramatic Art and Literature (1809), lecture 13 Samuel Taylor Coleridge, ‗On Wit and Humor‘ in Coleridge‟s Miscellaneous Criticism, ed. Raysor (1936) Arthur Schopenhauer, The World as Will and Idea (1818), Bk. 1, ch. 13 William Hazlitt, ‗On Wit and Humour‘, in Lectures on the English Comic Writers (1819) G. W. F. Hegel, Aesthetik (1819), ‗Dramatic Poetry‘, sec. 3 and ‗Final Summary‘ Thomas Carlyle, ‗Jean Paul Richter‘ (1827) in Critical and Miscellaneous Essays, vol 1 Ralph Waldo Emerson, ‗The Comic‘ (1843) Soren Kierkegaard, Concluding Unscientific Postscript (1846) Leigh Hunt, Wit and Humour (1848) Charles Baudelaire, ‗On the Essence of Laughter, and On the Comic in the Plastic Arts‘ (1855) George Eliot, ‗German Wit: Heinrich Heine‘ (1856 Alexander Bain, The Emotions and The Will (1865), ch. 14 Herbert Spencer, ‗The Physiology of Laughter‘ in Essays (1868-74) Charles Darwin, The Expression of the Emotions in Man and Animals (1872), ch. 8 George Meredith, On the Idea of Comedy and the Uses of the Comic Spirit (1877) Friedrich Nietzsche, The Birth of Tragedy (1872), Sec. vii, and Gay Science (1887) Henri Bergson, Laughter (1900) James Sully, An Essay on Laughter (1902) Sigmund Freud, The Joke and Its Relation to the Unconscious (1905) + ‗Humour‘ (1927) Francis M. Cornford, The Origin of Attic Comedy (1914)

127

Luigi Pirandello, Humour (1908/1920) Anthologies of primary material Paul Lauter, ed., Theories of Comedy (1964) W. K. Wimsatt, ed., The Idea of Comedy (1969) John Morreall, ed., The Philosophy of Laughter and Humour (1987) Wylie Sypher, ed. Comedy (1956) – see also the Appendix Kathleen Wheeler, ed., German and Aesthetic Literary Criticism: The Romantic Ironists (1984) J. Figueroa-Dorrego and C. Larkin-Galinanes, eds., A Source Book of Literary and Philosophical Writings About Humour and Laughter (2009) Thomas C. Oden, ed., The Humor of Kierkegaard: An Anthology (2004) Introductions and Overviews D. J. Palmer, ed., Comedy: Developments in Criticism (1984) John Morreall, Comic Relief: A Comprehensive Philosophy of Humor (2009) T. G. A. Nelson, Comedy: An Introduction (1990) Andrew Stott, Comedy (2005) Jimmy Carr and Lucy Greeves, The Naked Jape: Uncovering the Hidden World of Jokes (2006) Maurice Charney, Comedy High and Low: An Introduction to the Experience of Comedy (1978) Howard Jacobson, Seriously Funny: From the Ridiculous to the Sublime (1997) Philosophy / Theory / Psychoanalysis Sigmund Freud, The Joke and Its Relation to the Unconscious, trans. Joyce Crick (Penguin, 2002) Simon Critchley, On Humour (2002) Susan Langer, ‗The Comic Rhythm‘ in Feeling and Form (1953) Giorgio Agamben, ‗Comedy‘, in The End of The Poem: Studies in Poetics (1999) Christopher Bollas, ‗Cracking Up‘ in Cracking Up: The Work of Unconscious Experience (1995) Ted Cohen, Jokes: Philosophical Thoughts on Joking Matters (1999) Adam Phillips, ‗Jokes Apart‘, Promises, Promises (2000); ‗On Being Laughed At‘, Equals (2002) John Lippit, ‗Humour‘, in A Companion to Aesthetics, ed. Cooper (1992) Thomas Nagel, ‗The Absurd‘, in Mortal Questions (1991) Mary Douglas, ‗Do Dogs Laugh?‘ and ‗Jokes‘ from Implicit Meanings: Selected Essays in Anthropology (1999) Noel Carroll, ‗Humour‘ in The Oxford Handbook of Aesthetics, ed. Levinson (2003) 128

Arthur Koestler, ‗The Jester‘ in The Act of Creation (1964) Eric Griffiths, ‗Ludwig Wittgenstein and the comedy of errors‘, in Cordner, Holland and Kerrigan, eds., English Comedy (1994) Mikkel Borch-Jacobsen, ‗The Laughter of Being‘ in Bataille: A Critical Reader (1998) Paulo Virno, Multitude (2008) – Part II, ‗Jokes and Innovative Action‘ Sianne Ngai, ‗Stuplimity‘ in Ugly Feelings (2004) Theodor Adorno, ‗Is Art Lighthearted?‘ in Notes to Literature, vol 2 (1992) Alenka Zupancic, The Odd One In: On Comedy (2008) Agnes Heller, Immortal Comedy: The Comic Phenomenon in Art, Literature, and Life (2005) Peter Berger, Redeeming Laughter: The Comic Dimension of Human Experience (1997) Social and Cultural History Jan Bremmer and Herman Roodenberg, ed., A Cultural History of Humour from Antiquity to the Present Day (1997) Michael Billig, Laughter and Ridicule: Towards a Social Critique of Humour (2005) Stuart Tave, The Amiable Humorist: A Study in the Comic Theory and Criticism of the Eighteenth and Early Nineteenth Centuries (1967) R.B. Henkle, Comedy and Culture: 1820-1900 (1980) R. B. Martin, The Triumph of Wit: A Study of Victorian Comic Theory (1974) Jennifer A. Wagner-Lawlor, ed. The Victorian Comic Spirit: New Perspectives (2000) Herbert Tucker, ed., Blackwell Victorian Literature and Culture Companion (1999), pp. 349-54 Forms, Figures, Tones, Modes Northrop Frye, ‗The Mythos of Winter: Irony and Satire‘, in The Anatomy of Criticism (1957) Robert C. Elliott, The Power of Satire: Magic, Ritual, Art (1960) Dustin Griffin, Satire: A Critical Reintroduction (1994) Michele Hannoosh, Baudelaire and Caricature (1992) Jonathan Culler, ed., On Puns (1988) Simon Dentith, Parody (2000) Michele Hannoosh, Parody and Decadence: Laforgue‟s “Moralites Legendaires” (1989) Claire Colebrook, Irony (2003) Keston Sutherland, Stupefaction: A Radical Anatomy of Phantoms (2011) Sarah Crangle and Peter Nicholls, ed., On Bathos: Literature, Art, Music (2010)

129

D. W. Winnicott, Playing and Reality (1971) Brian Sutton Smith, The Ambiguity of Play (2001) Wayne Booth, A Rhetoric of Irony (1974) [see also William Empson‘s review of this book in ‗The Voice of the Underdog‘ in Argufying, ed. Haffenden (1987)] W. H. Auden. ‗Notes on the Comic‘ in The Dyer‟s Hand and other Essays (1962) Popular Culture David Mayer, Harlequin in His Element: English Pantomime (1970) C. McPhee and N. Orenstein, Infinite Jest: Caricature and Satire from Leonardo to Levine (2011) Barry Faulk, Music Hall and Modernity (2004) Carolyn Williams, Gilbert and Sullivan: Gender, Genre, Parody (2010) Brenda Assael, The Circus and Victorian Society (2005) Ann Featherstone and Jacky Bratton, The Victorian Clown (2006) Enid Welsford, The Fool: His Social and Literary History (1968) Dennis Denisoff, Aestheticism and Sexual Parody 1840-1940 (2006) Laughing and Smiling Robert Provine, Laughter: A Scientific Investigation (2000) Angus Trumble, A Brief History of The Smile (2004) Helmuth Plessner, Laughing and Crying (1970) Ronald de Sousa, ‗When is it wrong to laugh?‘, in The Rationality of Emotion (1987) Bennett and Royle, ‗Laughter‘ in An Introduction to Literature, Criticism and Theory (1999) David Appelbaum, ‗Laugh‘, in Voice (1990) Norman Holland, Laughing: A Psychology of Humour (1982) V. S. Ramachandran, Phantoms in the Brain (2005), chapter 10 Anna Parvulescu, Laughter: Notes on A Passion (2010) Special issue on ‗Laughter‘, Modern Language Notes, vol. 102 (1987) Helen Cixous, ‗The Laugh of the Medusa‘ in New French Feminism (1990) Brian Boyd, ‗Laughter and Literature: A Play Theory of Humor‘, in Philosophy and Literature, 28 (2004), 1-22

130

1660-1830 Hilary Term

ROMANTICISM, REGIONALISM, PLACE Professor Fiona Stafford ([email protected]) The course will explore the literature of the Romantic period through its growing concern with place. From the Lake District to London, from Hampshire to the Highlands, from Kilmarnock to Connemara, from the Borders to the Fens, the new awareness of the regional origins of poems, novels, essays and reviews was widespread. Seminars will not only consider the self-grounding strategies of contemporary authors, their categorisation in 'Schools', the impact of provincial publishing and libraries, the parallels with visual artists, but also the ways in which different landscapes, geographical features, natural history and distinctive human communities were represented by those who lived there and those who visited. In addition to work on specific poets or groups of writers (for example Wordsworth, Burns, Clare, Austen, White, Scott, Hogg, Edgeworth, Owenson, Lamb, Dickens), topics for special study might include Borders, river poems, tours, walking, reviewing culture, the pastoral, the regional novel, the city, coastlines. Primary Reading Jane Austen, Emma, Persuasion James Boswell, The Journal of a Voyage to the Hebrides with Samuel Johnson Robert Burns, Poems, Chiefly in the Scottish Dialect John Clare, Selected Poems, The Shepherd‟s Calendar George Crabbe, The Borough Dickens, Sketches by Boz, Oliver Twist, David Copperfield. Maria Edgeworth, The Absentee William Gilpin, Observations relative to Picturesque Beauty Thomas Gray, ‗The Bard‘ James Hogg, The Shepherd‟s Calendar, Winter Evening Tales, Confessions of a Justified Sinner Samuel Johnson, A Journey to the Western Islands of Scotland James Macpherson, The Poems of Ossian Lady Morgan, The Wild Irish Girl Walter Scott, Redgauntlet, Minstrelsy of the Scottish Border Tobias Smollett, The Expedition of Humphry Clinker Gilbert White, The Natural History of Selborne Dorothy Wordsworth, Recollections of a Tour Made in Scotland William Wordsworth, Lyrical Ballads; Poems in Two Volumes; The Prelude Secondary Reading Anderson, Benedict, Imagined Communities

131

Andrews, Malcolm, The Search for the Picturesque Bate, Jonathan, Romantic Ecology, The Song of the Earth Colley, Linda, Britons: Forging the Nation, 1707-1837 Crawford, Robert, Devolving English Literature Cresswell, Tim, Place. Draper, R., The Literature of the Region Hobsbawm, E. and Ranger, T. (eds), The Invention of Tradition Kiberd, Declan, Irish Classics Leerssen, Joep, Remembrance and Imagination Pittock, Murray, Scottish and Irish Romanticism Stafford, Fiona, Local Attachments Trumpener, Katie, Bardic Nationalism Williams, Raymond, The Country and the City

THE FICTION OF FANTASY 1660-1785 Professor Ros Ballaster ([email protected]) This course will test the apparently simple hypothesis that fictions of fantasy from the emergence of the fairy tale in Europe onward signal a consistent resistance to the ‗rise‘ of realism and the novel. We will look not only at eighteenth-century theorising of ‗faery‘ and ‗fantasy‘ but also the modern theoretical frameworks of structuralism (Todorov) and the psychoanalytic move which returns fantasy to the real (Zizek). Each session will explore a specific ‗fantasy‘ genre considering work by writers in English who experiment with forms such as the fairy and oriental tale they identified as originating in absolutist cultures (French, Ottoman, Persian, Mughal). We will ourselves travel from the more obviously fantastic regions of fairy and ancient Orient to the ‗pseudo-realism‘ of the imaginary voyage which draws on the traditions of travel writing and the ‗hyper-realism‘ of the it-narrative or narrative of ‗circulation‘. We conclude with a discussion of the traces and play of the ‗fantastic‘ in the most comprehensive, experimental and allusive of eighteenth-century experiments in mimesis of a real ‗life‘, Laurence Sterne‘s Tristram Shandy. 1.

Imaginative forays past and present

John Dryden, preface to King Arthur; or the British Worthy (1691); Joseph Addison, Spectator papers on ‗The Pleasures of Imagination‘ and especially no. 419 ‗On the fairy way of writing‘; Tzvetan Todorov, The Fantastic; Slavoj Zizek, ‗Fantasy as a Political Category‘ 2.

Fairy tales

Lady Mary Wortley Montagu, ‗Princess Docile‘ (in Lady Mary Wortley Montagu: Romance Writings, ed. Isobel Grundy, 1996) ; Samuel Johnson ‗The Fountains‘ (1766 in Anna Williams Miscellanies); Horace Walpole, ‗The Dice Box‘ in Hieroglyphic Tales (composed 1757; pub. 1785)

132

See Marina Warner, From the Beast to the Blonde: on Fairy-Tales and their Tellers (London: Chatto and Windus, 1994) 3.

The oriental tale

Robert Mack ed., Oriental Tales (includes short novels by John Hawkesworth, Maria Edgeworth, Clara Reeve and Frances Sheridan) (Oxford UP, 1992); Samuel Johnson, The History of Rasselas, Prince of Abissinia (1759); William Beckford, Vathek (1786). See: ‗Introduction‘ to Ros Ballaster ed., Fables of the East: Selected Tales 1662-1785 (Oxford UP, 2005) and/or Fabulous Orients: Fictions of the East in England 1662-1785 (Oxford UP, 2005); Srinivas Aravamudan, Enlightenment Orientalism: Resisting the Rise of the Novel (Chicago UP, 2012), esp. Ch. 5; and Marina Warner, Stranger Magic: Charmed States & the Arabian Nights (Chatto and Windus, 2011), esp. Pt IV. 4.

The imaginary voyage

Margaret Cavendish, Duchess of Newcastle, The Blazing World (1666; available in Broadview collection Paper Bodies or in Kate Lilley ed. The Blazing World and Other Writings from Penguin); Daniel Defoe Robinson Crusoe (1719); Jonathan Swift ‗Gulliver‟s Travels (1726). See Christine Rees, Utopian Imagination and Eighteenth-Century Fiction (Longman, 1996) and Louis Marin, ‗The Frontiers of Utopia‘ in Utopias and the Millenium, eds. Krishnan Kumar and Stephen Ban (London: Reaktion Books, 1993), 1-17. 5.

The ‗it‘ novel/novel of circulation

Frances Coventry, The History of Pompey the Little: or, the Life and Adventures of a Lap-dog (1751; ed. Robert Adams Day, London 1974); Helenus Scott, The Adventures of a Rupee (1781); See Freya Johnston, ―Little Lives: An Eighteenth-Century Sub-Genre‖, Cambridge Quarterly 2003 32: 143-160 and Susan Stewart On Longing: Narratives of the Miniature, the Gigantic, the Souvenir, the Collection (Durham NC: Duke University Press, 1993). 6.

Traversing the fantasy?

Laurence Sterne, Tristram Shandy vols 1 and 2 (1759-60). See Carol Watts, ‗The Lunacy in the Cosmopolis: 1759‘, in her The Cultural Work of Empire: The Seven Years War and the Imagining of the Shandean State (Edinburgh University Press, 2007) Aims 1) to develop an awareness of a range of fantasy writing and the historical specificity of generic norms in the period 2) to encourage critical engagement with dominant interpretations and theoretical understandings 3) to provide a grounding in primary materials that will make possible independent and original work in the field Objectives 1) to encourage debate and discussion between participants and collaborative research work 2) to provide opportunities for critical writing in the field to promote the discovery and shaping of research agendas on an individual/collective basis.

133

1660-1830 Hilary Term

SAMUEL JOHNSON Dr Freya Johnston ([email protected]) Background Reading Walter Jackson Bate, Samuel Johnson (1977) Bertrand H. Bronson, Johnson Agonistes and Other Essays (1946; repr. 1966) James Clifford, Young Sam Johnson (1955) -------------------, Dictionary Johnson (1975) Greg Clingham and Philip Smallwood, eds., Samuel Johnson After 300 Years (2009) Robert DeMaria, Samuel Johnson: A Critical Biography (1995) --------------------, Samuel Johnson and the Life of Reading (2009) Donald Greene, The Politics of Samuel Johnson, rev. edn (1989) Isobel Grundy, Samuel Johnson and the Scale of Greatness (1986) Jean H. Hagstrum, Samuel Johnson‟s Literary Criticism, 2nd edn (1967) Lawrence Lipking, Samuel Johnson: The Life of an Author (1998) Jack Lynch, ed., Samuel Johnson in Context (2011) John Wain, Samuel Johnson (1974) W. K. Wimsatt, Jr, The Prose Style of Samuel Johnson (1941) For other bits and pieces, see Jack Lynch, ed., The Age of Johnson (published annually), plus there are many Johnson texts, snippets, and useful critical resources available online: http://andromeda.rutgers.edu/~jlynch/Johnson/ Week 1: Poetry Primary Reading London: A Poem (1738) The Vanity of Human Wishes (1749) Niall Rudd, ed., Johnson‟s Juvenal (1981) ‗On the Death of Dr. Robert Levet‘ (1783) Further Reading D.V. Boyd, ‗Vanity and Vacuity: A Reading of Johnson's Verse Satires‘, ELH, 39 (1972), 387-403 T. S. Eliot, ‗Introduction‘ to London and The Vanity of Human Wishes, in English Critical Essays, ed. Phyllis M. Jones (1933); repr. in The New Penguin Companion to English Literature, IV: From Dryden to Johnson, ed. Boris Ford (1982), pp.228-34

134

David Nichol Smith, ‗Johnson‘s Poems‘, in New Light on Dr. Johnson: Essays on the Occasion of His250th Birthday, ed. Frederick W. Hilles (1959), pp.9-17 David Nichol Smith, ‗The Heroic Couplet — Johnson‘, in Some Observations on Eighteenth Century Poetry (1937), pp.31-55 David F. Venturo, Johnson the Poet: The Poetic Career of Samuel Johnson (1999) Week 2: Biography Primary Reading An Account of the Life of Richard Savage (1744) Rambler 60 (1750) Idler 84 (1759) ‗Life of Cowley‘, ‗Life of Pope‘, ‗Life of Milton‘, ‗Life of Watts‘, ‗Life of Blackmore‘ (1779-81) Further Reading Richard Holmes, Dr Johnson & Mr Savage (1993) Robert Folkenflik, Samuel Johnson, Biographer (1978) Harriet Kirkley, ed., A Biographer at Work: Samuel Johnson's Notes for the 'Life of Pope' (2002) Catherine N. Parke, Samuel Johnson and Biographical Thinking (1991) Christine Rees, Johnson‟s Milton (2010) Donald Stauffer, The Art of Biography in Eighteenth-Century England (1970) Clarence Tracy, The Artificial Bastard: A Biography of Richard Savage (1953) Week 3: Lexicography and Shakespeare Primary Reading A Dictionary of the English Language (1755)—Preface and selected entries Johnson on Shakespeare, ed. Arthur Sherbo, vols. VII and VIII of The Yale Edition of the Works of Samuel Johnson (1968)—Preface and selected notes NB Sherbo reproduces only Johnson‘s notes, not the texts of the plays. You can consult Johnson‘s eight-volume Works of William Shakespeare in a facsimile (AMS Press) or online, via ECCO. Further Reading Dictionary: Robert DeMaria, Johnson‟s Dictionary and the Language of Learning (1986) Jack Lynch and Anne McDermott, eds., Anniversary Essays on Johnson's Dictionary (2005) Allen Reddick, The Making of Johnson's Dictionary (1990)

135

W. K. Wimsatt, Jr, Philosophic Words: A Study of Style and Meaning in the „Rambler‟ and Dictionary of Samuel Johnson (1948; repr. 1968) Shakespeare: Simon Jarvis, Scholars and Gentlemen: Shakespearian Textual Criticism and Representations of Scholarly Labour, 1725-1765 (1995) G. F. Parker, Johnson‟s Shakespeare (1989) Arthur Sherbo, Samuel Johnson, Editor of Shakespeare (1956) Week 4: Journalism Primary Reading Selections from The Rambler (1750-52): nos. 1, 2, 23, 47, 121, 137, 208 Selections from The Adventurer (1753): nos. 67, 84, 85 Selections from The Idler (1758-60): nos. 1, 39, 103 Further Reading Philip Davis, In Mind of Johnson: A Study of Johnson the Rambler (1989) Paul Fussell, Samuel Johnson and the Life of Writing (1972) John Wiltshire, Samuel Johnson in the Medical World: The Doctor and the Patient (1991) W. K. Wimsatt, Jr, Philosophic Words: A Study of Style and Meaning in the „Rambler‟ and „Dictionary‟ of Samuel Johnson (1948; repr. 1968) Week 5: Fiction Primary Reading Rambler 4 (1750) The Vision of Theodore, the Hermit of Tenerife (1748) The History of Rasselas, Prince of Abyssinia (1759) Further Reading Emrys Jones, ‗The Artistic Form of Rasselas‘, Review of English Studies, New Series, Vol. 18, No. 72 (1967), 387-401 Carey McIntosh, The Choice of Life: Samuel Johnson and the World of Fiction (1973) Robert G. Walker, Eighteenth-Century Arguments for Immortality and Johnson‟s Rasselas (1977)

136

Week 6: Johnson‘s Afterlives Primary reading Selections from: O M Brack, Jr., and Robert E. Kelley, eds., The Early Biographies of Samuel Johnson (1974) James Boswell, Boswell‟s London Journal, 1762-3, ed. Frederick A. Pottle (1950) Boswell‟s Life of Johnson [1791], ed. G. B. Hill and L. F. Powell, 6 vols., 2nd edn (1971) Hester Thrale, Thraliana: The Diary of Mrs. Hester Lynch Thrale, Later Mrs. Piozzi, 1776-1809, ed. Katherine C. Balderston, 2 vols., 2nd edn (1951), vol. I [1776-84] -----------------, Anecdotes of the late Samuel Johnson, LL.D. during the last twenty years of his life [1786], ed. S. C. Roberts (1980) Further reading James L. Clifford, Hester Lynch Piozzi (Mrs. Thrale), 2nd edn (1968) Paul Fussell, ‗The Force of Literary Memory in Boswell‘s London Journal‘, SEL, 2 (1962), 351-7 William McCarthy, Hester Lynch Piozzi: Portrait of a Literary Woman (1985) Frederick S. Kiley, ‗Boswell‘s Literary Art in the London Journal‘, College English, 23 (1962), 629-32 Bruce Redford, Designing the Life of Johnson (2002)

ROMANTIC LIFE-WRITING Professor Lucy Newlyn ([email protected]) This course will explore how writers in the Romantic period fashioned themselves, their lives, and their times, using the confessional and autobiographical modes which became popular during the eighteenth century. Texts studied will include confessional narratives; slave narratives; literary autobiographies; journals and notebooks; public and private letters. Class discussion will focus on the ways in which ‗self‘ is understood and configured in writing; how time, process and memory are handled in narrative; how the reader (or the reading- public) is imagined and addressed; the line of demarcation separating ‗public‘ and ‗private‘ lives; the secularisation of confessional narratives; the components of ‗fiction‘ and ‗history‘ in autobiography; and the importance of journals and letters as species of life-writing. Students are encouraged to write close critical commentaries, using a range of methodologies. One or two short papers are read at each seminar. In the final seminar, students give a presentation on the subject they have chosen to write about for their 5,000-7,000 word essay, to be submitted in tenth week of Hilary term. The plan for seminars, which focus on grouped texts, is outlined below, and a preliminary reading list is also provided. Week 1: Letters from Abroad Helen Maria Williams, Letters written in France (1790) 137

Mary Wollstonecraft, Letters written in Sweden, Norway and Denmark (1796) and Letters to Imlay (1798) Week 2: Slave Narratives Olaudah Equiano, The Interesting Narrative (1789) Mary Prince, The History of Mary Prince (1831) Week 3: Intertwined Lives William Wordsworth, The Prelude (1799 and 1805) and Home at Grasmere (1800) Dorothy Wordsworth, The Grasmere and Alfoxden Journals (1798-1802) Samuel Taylor Coleridge, Biographia Literararia (1817) Week 4: Confessions Jean Jacques Rousseau, Confessions (1781-8) Thomas De Quincey, Confessions of an English Opium Eater (1821) William Hazlitt, Liber Amoris (1823) Week 5: Literary Lives John Keats, Letters John Clare, Autobiographical Writings Leigh Hunt, Autobiography (1850) Week 6: Presentations Primary Reading Please note: A knowledge of Bunyan‘s Grace Abounding, Defoe‘s Moll Flanders, Sterne‘s Tristram Shandy and Rousseau‘s Confessions is a pre-requisite for taking this course. John Bunyan, Grace Abounding to the Chief of Sinners, ed Roger Sharrock (Oxford University Press, 1966) Samuel Taylor Coleridge, Biographia Literaria ed James Engell and Walter Jackson Bate (Collected Coleridge: 2 vols., 1983) Thomas De Quincey, Confessions of an English Opium Eater and other Writings, ed Grevel Lindop (O.U.P., 1985) Olaudah Equiano, The Interesting Narrative and Other Writings, ed with an introd. Vincent Carretta ( Penguin, 1995) William Godwin, Memoirs of the Author of a Vindication of the Rights of Woman, ed Pamela Clemit and Dina Luria Walker (Broadview Press, 2001) William Hazlitt, Liber Amoris, introd. by Michael Neve (Hogarth, 1985) Mary Prince, The History of Mary Prince, ed Sarah Salih (Penguin, 2000) 138

Jean Jacques Rousseau, Confessions, ed and introd. P.N. Furbank (Everyman, 1992) Helen Maria Williams, Letters written in France, ed. Neil Fraistat and Susan L. Lanser (Broadview Literary Texts, 2001) Mary Wollstonecraft, Letters written in Sweden, Norway and Denmark; The Works of Mary Wollstonecraft, ed. Janet Todd and Marilyn Butler (Pickering and Chatto, 1989) vol. 6. Dorothy Wordsworth, The Grasmere and Alfoxden Journals ed. Pamela Woof (Oxford World‘s Classics, 2002) William Wordsworth, The Prelude: 1799, 1805 and 1850 eds. Jonathan Wordsworth, M.H. Abrams and Stephen Gill (Norton: New York, 1979) Selected Secondary Reading Linda Anderson Autobiography (Routledge, 2001) Shari Benstock, The Private Self: Theory and Practice of Women‟s Autobiographical Writing (Routledge, 1988) Frederick Garber, Self, Text, and Romantic Irony Paul Jay, Being in the Text: Self-Representation from Wordsworth to Roland Barthes Sheila M Kearns, Coleridge, Wordsworth, and Romantic Autobiography (Fairleigh Dickinson University Press, 1995) Tom Keymer, ‗Sterne and Romantic Autobiography‘ in The Cambridge Companion to English Literature 1740-180 (Cambridge, 2004) Felicity Nussbaum, The Autobiographical Subject: Gender and Ideology in Eighteenth Century England (Johns Hopkins University Press, 1989) David G. Riede, Oracles and Hierophants: Constructions of Romantic Authority (Cornell University Press, 1991) William Spengemann, The Forms of Autobiography (Yale University Press, 1980) Jeremy Tambling, Confession: Sexuality, Sin, the Subject (Manchester, 1990) James Treadwell, Autobiographical Writing and British Literature, 1783-1834 (Oxford University Press, 2005) Paul De Man, ‗Autobiography as De-facement‘, MLN 94:5, December 1979, 919-930

139

1800-1914 Hilary Term

SCIENCE, PHILOSOPHY, AND POPULAR FICTION 1880-1910 Dr John Sloan ([email protected]) This course will examine the influence of scientific and philosophical ideas on popular fiction in the period from 1880 to 1910. Each week we will explore how popular authors introduced the reading public to new ideas and ways of thinking about and constructing reality through their fiction. Attention will be to their detailed knowledge and imaginative adaptation of scientific and philosophical discourses, with students invited to consider in particular Robert Louis Stevenson (Psychology), H. G. Wells (Biology and Ecology), Sir Arthur Conan Doyle (Forensic Science and Medicine) and Oscar Wilde (Spencerian Evolutionism and Ethics). Preliminary Reading Rick Rylance, Victorian Psychology and British Culture 1850-1880 (2000), which deals with developments in the period up to 1880; students should read Part 1 on 'The Discourse of the Soul', 'The Discourse of Philosophy', 'The Discourse of Physiology and General Biology' and 'The Discourse of Medicine'. George Levine, Darwin Among the Novelists: Patterns of Science in Victorian Fiction (1998); the first two chapters provide a useful general overview of the connections between the Victorian novel and Victorian science. Peter Martin, The Vital Science: Biology and the Literary Imagination 1860-1900 (1984) Christine Ferguson, Language, Science, and Popular Fiction in the Victorian Fin-de-Siecle (2006) John Glendening, The Evolutionary Imagination in the Late Victorian Novel: The Entangled Bank (1988) Anne Stiles, ed., Neurology and Literature 1860-1920 (2007) Ronald R. Thomas, Detective Fiction and the Rise of Forensic Science (1999) Laurence Frank, Victorian Detective Fiction and the Nature of Evidence: The Scientific Investigations of Poe, Dickens and Doyle (2003) Joseph Carroll, Literary Darwiniam: Evolution, Human Nature and Literature (2004) As preliminary reading, students might also usefully read Herbert Spencer's First Principles (1867) and James Hutchison Stirling's translation of Albert Schwegler's Handbook of the History of Philosophy (1867), used by students in the period; also useful is Sally Shuttleworth and Jeremy Bourne Taylor (eds.), Embodied Selves: An Anthology of Psychological Texts 1830-1900 (1998). [Further reading on individual writers will be provided later]

140

1800-1914 Hilary Term

DICKENS Dr Robert Douglas-Fairhurst ([email protected]) On the first centenary of Dickens‘s death in 1970, F. R. and Q. D. Leavis published Dickens the Novelist, a collection of essays that was at once a celebration and a public recantation. ‗Our purpose‘, they wrote, ‗is to enforce as unanswerably as possible the conviction that Dickens was one of the greatest of creative writers‘. As the bicentenary of Dickens‘s birth approaches in 2012, this C course aims to reconsider Dickens‘s aims and techniques as a novelist, by measuring a number of major fictional works against some of the other forms in which he wrote. A full critical bibliography will be provided at the first seminar, although participants may find it helpful if they have familiarized themselves with some of the following: John Forster, The Life of Charles Dickens (1872-4), edited with notes by A. J. Hoppé (1966). Modern biographies include those by Edgar Johnson, Peter Ackroyd, Fred Kaplan, and most recently Michael Slater. Philip Collins, Dickens: The Critical Heritage (1971) and Stephen Wall (ed.), Dickens: A Critical Anthology (1970): two excellent anthologies that show Dickens‘s critical reception from the 1830s onwards. David Paroissien (ed.), A Companion to Charles Dickens (Blackwell Companions to Literature and Culture 51) (2008). Other cross-sections through Dickens‘s career include The Cambridge Companion to Charles Dickens and Paul Schlicke (ed.), The Oxford Reader‟s Companion to Dickens (1999), which offers a generous selection of short survey accounts of various topics. Introductions to the Victorian novel include the following: Francis O‘Gorman (ed.), The Victorian Novel (2002) Gail Marshall, Victorian Fiction (2002) J Hillis Miller, The Form of Victorian Fiction (1968) Patrick Brantlinger and William B. Thesing (ed.), A Companion to the Victorian Novel (2002) E. D. Ermath, The English Novel in History, 1840-1895 (1997)

ROMANTIC CLASSICISM Dr Nicholas Halmi ([email protected]) Romantic classicism is diverse in its manifestations and hence difficult to conceptualize. This course will explore the intense appeal and multiple uses of classical Greece and Rome—or more precisely, of the idea of them—in poetry and prose from the time of Winckelmann (generally considered the founding figure of Romantic Hellenism and of modern art history) to the second generation of English Romantic poets. As Marx observed in the introduction to the Grundrisse (1857), ‗The difficulty is not in grasping the idea that Greek art and poetry are bound up with certain forms of social development, but rather in understanding why they still constitute for us a source of aesthetic enjoyment and in certain respects prevail as the standard and model beyond attainment.‘ Particular topics of consideration will include the paradoxical relationship between antiquarianism and the notion of a classical revival; the ambiguous erotics and politics of the reception of classical art and culture; the connection between Hellenism and Orientalism; and syncretism and the poetic rediscovery of the classical gods. Authors to be read include:

141

Week 1: Primitivism - Pope and Thomas Blackwell Week 2: Erotic Ekphrasis - J. J. Winckelmann and Keats Week 3: Ruins - C.F. Volney, Anna Barbauld, and Lord Byron Week 4: Parthenon Marbles Controversy - Hazlitt and Keats Week 5: Syncretic Classicism - Keats and Shelley Week 6: Philhellenism - Byron and Shelley

JOSEPH CONRAD AND NINETEENTH-CENTURY CONTEXTS Dr Sue Jones ([email protected]) This course will explore Conrad as a writer working between fin de siècle aesthetics and modernist narratology, but whose influences can also be traced much further back in the nineteenth century. We will examine the fiction and non-fictional prose written between 1895-1914, taking into account the contexts of Romanticism and nineteenth-century scientific thought as well as looking forward to the twentieth-century register of Conrad‗s work. Conrad and (Polish) Romantic contexts Focussing on Lord Jim; ‗Amy Foster‘; Under Western Eyes; Chance, this seminar explores the often neglected background to Conrad‘s work arising from his Polish Romantic literary and political heritage. We shall consider the ways in which this context informed Conrad‘s work from his early enquiries into the role of the hero, the representation of the nation state, the conflicts of national and individual identities, to the later discussions of women‘s roles and women‘s suffrage in the first decades of the twentieth century. The Imprint of Darwinism This seminar explores the pervasive impact of Darwinian thought, of Spenser, Huxley, and discussions of degeneration (including Nordau) on Conrad‘s fiction, focussing on Heart of Darkness, Lord Jim, ‗Falk‘; The Secret Agent; ‗The Secret Sharer‘. Proto-modernist aesthetics The seminar traces Conrad‘s development of sceptical narrative strategies from his earliest encounters with Paterian aesthetics, French realism, literary impressionism and symbolism to the development of the unreliable narrator and the impact of Schopenhauer and Nietzsche on his work. We will add The Nigger of the Narcissus and Nostromo to the repertoire for this discussion. Conrad and Fictions of Empire In this seminar we focus on Conrad‘s uneasy relationship to ‗imperial‘ romance (in works ranging from Almayer‟s Folly, ‗Karain‘, An Outcast of the Islands to Heart of Darkness, Lord Jim and Nostromo) showing the ways in which the author‘s critique of colonialism draws on the model of ‗boy‘s own‘ adventure (from Marryat and Henty to Haggard and Stevenson) while deconstructing the genre‘s representational codes.

142

Select Bibliography Where appropriate use the extant volumes of The Cambridge Edition of the Works of Joseph Conrad (prose works and Letters). Otherwise, use the Dent Collected Edition, or Oxford‘s World‘s Classics (although many Penguin and other publishers‘ volumes have excellent introductions). Biography Frederick R. Karl, Joseph Conrad: The Three Lives (New York: Farrar, Straus, and Giroux, 1979). Zdzislaw Najder, Joseph Conrad: A Chronicle (Cambridge: CUP, 1983). John Stape, The Several Lives of Joseph Conrad (London and New York: Heinemann, 2007). Polish Romanticism Biographies above, and John Batchelor, The Life of Joseph Conrad: A Critical Biography (Oxford: Blackwells, 1993). . . . Lord Jim: A Tale (Oxford: OUP, 1983), particularly good on the Polish background. Zdzisław Najder, Conrad Under Familial Eyes (Cambridge: CUP,

1983).

Martin Ray, Joseph Conrad: Interviews and Recollections (London: Macmillan, 1990). Susan Jones, Conrad and Women (Oxford: OUP, 1999), chapter 2. Gustav Morf, The Polish Heritage of Joseph Conrad (London: Sampson Low, 1930) Adrzej Busza, Conrad's Polish Literary Background (MA thesis), Antemurale 10 (1966). Richard Niland, Conrad and History (Oxford: OUP, 2010). Conrad and Darwin [Background: Gillian Beer, Darwin‟s Plots (1983); George Levine, Darwin and the Novelists: Patterns of Science in Victorian Fiction (1988); Levine, Realism, Ethics and Secularism (2008)] Allan Hunter, Joseph Conrad and the Ethics of Darwinism: The Challeges of Science (London: Croom Helm, 1983). Redmond O‘Hanlon, Joseph Conrad and Charles Darwin: The Influence of Scientific Thought on Conrad‟s Fiction (Edinburgh: Salamander Press, 1984). Mark Wollaeger, Joseph Conrad and the Fictions of Skepticism (Stanford, Cal.: Stanford UP, 1990) Narratology Ian Watt, Conrad in the Nineteenth Century (Berkeley: U of California, 1981). Cedric Watts, The Deceptive Text: An Introduction to Covert Plots (Harvester Wheatsheaf, 1984). Edward Said, 'Conrad: The Representation of Narrative', The World, the Text, and the Critic (Cambridge, Mass: Harvard UP, 1983), 90-110. Jakob Lothe, Conrad's Narrative Method (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1989). Jeremy Hawthorn, Joseph Conrad: Narrative Technique and Ideological Commitment. London: Edward Arnold, 1990.

143

J. Hillis Miller, on Lord Jim in Fiction and Repetition: Seven English Novels (Oxford: Blackwell, 1982). Daphna Erdinast –Vulcan, Joseph Conrad and the Modern Temper (Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1991). John G. Peters, Conrad and Impressionism (Cambridge: CUP, 2001). Paul Wake, Conrad‟s Marlow (Manchester: Manchester UP, 2007). Conrad and Empire Writing Frederic Jameson, 'Romance and Reification' in The Political Unconscious (1981). Benita Parry, Conrad and Imperialism: Ideological Boundaries and Visionary Frontiers (London: Macmillan, 1983). Andrea White, Joseph Conrad and the Adventure Tradition: Constructing and deconstructing the Imperial Subject (Cambridge: CUP, 1993). Christopher GoGwilt, The Invention of the West: Joseph Conrad and the Double-Mapping of Europe and Empire (Stanford: Stanford UP, 1995). Gail Fincham and Myrtle Hooper (eds.) Under Postcolonial Eyes: Joseph Conrad After Empire. Rondesbosch: University of Cape Town Press, 1996). Robert Hampson, Cross-cultural Encounters in Joseph Conrad‟s Malay Fiction (London: Palgrave, 2000). Linda Dryden, Joseph Conrad and the Imperial Romance. Basingstoke: Macmillan, 2000). Linda Dryden (ed.), Robert Louis Stevenson and Joseph Conrad: Writers of Transition (Lubbock: Texas Tech UP, 2009).

1900-present Hilary Term

LIFE WRITING Professor Hermione Lee ([email protected]) The option examines life-writings (biography, autobiography, memoirs, letters, diaries) over a broad period; texts will be drawn mainly from literary life-writing and from the modern period, but students wishing to discuss examples from earlier periods or of Lives of non-literary figures will be able to do so. The course will start with a broad discussion of the history, practices and strategies of the ―life-writing‖ genre, and will look at five different approaches, with examples: family narratives, especially children writing about parents; women‗s lives, especially autobiographies; diaries and letters, and how they are made use of in biography, especially in relation to memory and authenticity; the relationship between ―life‖ and ―work‖ in literary biography. Students will be able to write an essay on a topic of their choice which may go outside the selected texts for the seminars, and there will be an opportunity to discuss your choice of topics. Here is a general introductory reading list. Reading you may find particularly useful or inspiring is in bold. It would also be extremely advantageous to have read one, or two, large-scale biographies of your own choice. Possible examples might be Claire Tomalin‘s life of Pepys, Hardy or Jane Austen, Leon Edel‘s one-volume version of his life of Henry James, Richard Ellmann‘s life of James Joyce, Jenny Uglow‘s life of Elizabeth Gaskell, Hogarth, Bewick, or The Lunar Men, Richard Holmes‘s life of Shelley or two-volume life of Coleridge, Roy Foster‘s two-volume life of W.B.Yeats, Judith Thurman‘s life of Colette, Patrick French‘s life of V.S.Naipaul, or my life of Virginia Woolf or Edith Wharton (not mandatory!).

144

Altick, Richard, Lives and Letters: A History of Literary Biography in England and America, Knopf, 1966 Backscheider, Paula, Reflections on Biography, New York, Oxford University Press, 1999 Barnes, Julian, Flaubert‟s Parrot, Cape, 1984 Batchelor, John, ed, The Art of Literary Biography, Clarendon Press, 1995 Boswell, James, Boswell‟s Life of Johnson, ed. R.W.Chapman, Oxford World‘s Classics Byatt, Antonia, Possession, Chatto & Windus, 1990 Caspar, Scott, Constructing American Lives, University of Carolina, 1999 Clifford, James, Biography as an Art: Selected Criticism, 1590-1960, Oxford University Press, 1962 Cubitt, Geoffrey, and Warren, Allen, Heroic Reputations and Exemplary Lives, Manchester University Press, 2000 Donaldson, Ian, et al, Shaping Lives: Reflections on Biography, Australian National University Press, 1992 Edel, Leon, Writing Lives: Principia Biographia, Norton, 1984 Ellis, David, ed, Imitating Art: Essays in Biography, Pluto Press, 1993 Ellis, David, Literary Lives: biography and the search for understanding, Oxford, OUP, 2000 Empson, William, Using Biography, Chatto & Windus, 1984 Epstein, William H, ed, Contesting the Subject: Essays in the Postmodern Theory and Practice of Biography and Biographical Criticism, Purdue University Press, 1991 Foster, Roy, W.B.Yeats, A Life, Vol I, ―The Apprentice Mage: 1865-1914", (especially ―Introduction‖); Vol 2, ―The Arch-Poet, 1915-1939", Oxford University Press, 1997, 2003 France, Peter, and St Clair, William, eds, Mapping Lives: The Uses of Biography, British Academy and Oxford University Press, 2002 Gittings, Robert, The Nature of Biography, Heinemann, 1978 Gould, Warwick, and Staley, Thomas, eds, Writing the Lives of Writers, Macmillan, 1998 Hamilton, Ian, Keepers of the Flame: Literary Estates and the Rise of Biography, Hutchinson, 1992, Pimlico, 1993 Heilbrun, Carolyn, Writing a Woman‟s Life, 1988, Ballantyne Books, 1989 Holmes, Richard, Footsteps: Adventures of a Romantic Biographer, Hodder & Stoughton, 1985, Penguin, 1986, Flamingo, 1994; Dr Johnson & Mr Savage, Hodder & Stoughton, 1993; Sidetracks, Hodder & Stoughton, 2000. Holroyd, Michael, Works on Paper: The Craft of Biography and Autobiography, Little, Brown, 2002 Homberger, Eric, and Charmley John, eds, The Troubled Face of Biography, St Martin‘s Press, 1988 James, Henry, The Aspern Papers, ―The Real Right Thing‖, ―The Birthplace‖, ―The Death of the Lion‖ in The Complete Tales of Henry James, ed Leon Edel, Rupert Hart Davis, 1962-4

145

Johnson, Samuel, The Rambler, No 60 (On Biography), 13 October 1750; The Idler, No 84, 24 November 1759; The Life of Savage in Lives of the English Poets, Oxford University Press, 1977 Kendall, Paul Murray, The Art of Biography, Allen & Unwin, 1965 Lee, Hermione, Biography: A Very Short Introduction, Oxford University Press, 2009; Body Parts: Essays on Life-Writing, Chatto & Windus, 2005; Virginia Woolf, Chatto & Windus, 1996, Viking, 1997 [Chapter One]; Edith Wharton, Chatto & Windus, 200 Marcus, Laura, Auto/Biographical Discourses: Theory, Criticism, Practice, Manchester University Press, 1994 Malcolm, Janet, The Silent Woman, 1994, Granta, 2005; Reading Chekhov, Granta, 2003; Two Lives: Gertrude and Alice, Yale, 200 Maurois, André, Aspects of Biography, Cambridge University Press, 1929 Meyers, Jeffrey, ed, The Craft of Literary Biography, Macmillan, 1985; The Biographer‟s Art: New Essays, Macmillan, 1989 Miller, Lucasta, The Brontë Myth, Vintage, 2002 Nadel, Ira Bruce, Biography: Fiction, Fact and Form, Macmillan, 1984 Newey, Vincent, and Shaw, Philip, eds, Mortal Pages, Literary Lives, Scolar Press, 1996 Nicolson, Harold, The Development of English Biography, The Hogarth Press, 1928 O‘Connor, Ulick, Biographers and the Art of Biography, Quartet Books, 1993 Salwak, Dale, ed, The Literary Biography: Problems and Solutions, Macmillan, 1996 Sisman, Adam, Boswell‟s Presumptuous Task, Hamish Hamilton, 2000 Strachey, Lytton, Eminent Victorians, Chatto & Windus, 1918 Wagner-Martin, Linda, Telling Women‟s Lives: The New Biography, Rutgers University Press, 1994 Woolf, Virginia, ―I am Christina Rossetti‖ (1930), ―Walter Sickert‖ (1934); ―The New Biography‖ (1927), ―The Art of Biography‖ (1939). These essays can be found either in Virginia Woolf, Collected Essays, ed L.Woolf, Chatto & Windus, 1996-7, 4 Vols, or in The Essays of Virginia Woolf, ed A.McNeillie, Hogarth Press, 4 Vols, 1994 -. It would also be helpful to have read Woolf‘s Orlando, 1928; Flush, 1933, and her ―Sketch of the Past‖ in Moments of Being, University of Sussex Press, 1986, rev. by Hermione Lee, Pimlico, 2002

LATE MODERNIST POETRY IN AMERICA AND BRITAIN Dr Michael Whitworth ([email protected]) The history of modernist poetry does not end in 1939, or in 1945. As modernism in the tradition of Yeats and Eliot was institutionalized by the New Criticism, poetry in the tradition of Ezra Pound and William Carlos Williams took a distinctive trajectory. This C course will consider poems and prose statements by American poets (primarily those of the ‗Black Mountain School‘ – Charles Olson, Robert Creeley, and Ed Dorn -- but also William Carlos Williams), and by a later generation of British poets who drew upon their work (primarily those associated with the ‗Cambridge School‘ -- J. H. Prynne, Andrew Crozier, and Douglas Oliver). It will consider ideas of modernity and of poetic form, the idea and practice of lyric, geography, gender, and science. It will also consider the

146

ways in which the late modernists continued modernist practices, and the respects in which their notions of poetry and its place in society were at variance from those of the newly canonical high modernists. Primary Reading: Poetry Allen, Donald, ed. The New American Poetry (1960). Concentrate on the poems and prose statements by Charles Olson (especially ‗The Kingfishers‘), Robert Duncan, Denise Levertov, Robert Creeley, and Edward Dorn; it would also be valuable to look at the selection of Frank O‘Hara‘s poems. Crozier, Andrew. An Andrew Crozier Reader, ed. Ian Brinton (2012). ---, and Tim Longville, eds. A Various Art (1987). Out of print, but obtainable cheaply secondhand. Concentrate on the poems by J.H.Prynne, Douglas Oliver, and Andrew Crozier. Dorn, Edward. ‗Idaho Out‘ (Geography [1965]), ‗The North Atlantic Turbine‘ [i.e., ‗Thesis‘, ‗The First Note‘, ‗England‘, and ‗A Theory of Truth‘ (The North Atlantic Turbine [1967]); reprinted in The Collected Poems (1983). Olson, Charles. The Maximus Poems, ed. George F. Butterick (1983). We won‘t be studying the Maximus Poems in full, but you should acquaint yourself with more than the selection in Allen‘s anthology. Prynne, J. H. Poems (2nd edn 1999, or 3nd edn. 2005). We will concentrate on the volumes from 1968-1974, i.e. Kitchen Poems, The White Stones, Brass, and Wound Response (1974). Tarlo, Harriet, ed. The Ground Aslant: An Anthology of Radical Landscape Poetry (Exeter: Shearsman, 2011) Primary Reading: Prose Allen, Donald, and Warren Tallman, eds. Poetics of the New American Poetry (New York: Grove, 1973). If obtainable, a valuable collection. Creeley, Robert. Collected Essays (1989). Especially ‗Introduction to New Writing in the USA‘ (1967) and ‗Introduction to Penguin Selected Whitman‘ (1973). Crozier, Andrew. An Andrew Crozier Reader, ed. Ian Brinton (2012). Duncan, Robert. A Selected Prose (1995). Levertov, Denise. The Poet in the World (1973). Olson, Charles. Human Universe (1960), or Collected Prose, ed. Donald Allen and Benjamin Friedlander (1997). Prioritise ‗Projective Verse‘ (which is also in The New American Poetry, ed. Donald Allen), and ‗Human Universe‘. Secondary Reading Altieri, Charles. ‗Olson's Poetics and the Tradition.‘ boundary 2, 2, No. 1/2, (Charles Olson: Essays, Reminiscences, Reviews) (Autumn, 1973-Winter, 1974), 173-188. [JSTOR] Burt, Stephen, and Jennifer Lewin. ‗Poetry and the New Criticism.‘ A Companion to TwentiethCentury Poetry, ed. Neil Roberts (2001).

147

Crozier, Andrew. ‗Thrills and Frills: Poetry as Figures of Empirical Lyricism.‘ Society and Literature, 1945-1970, ed. Alan Sinfield (New York: Holmes & Meier, 1983). Culler, Jonathan. ‗Apostrophe.‘ Diacritics, 7 no.4 (1977), 59-69. [JSTOR] Davidson, Ian. Ideas of Space in Contemporary Poetry (2007), esp. chapter 3. Kern, Robert. ‗Composition as Recognition: Robert Creeley and Postmodern Poetics.‘ boundary 2, 6, no. 3 (Robert Creeley: A Gathering) (1978), 211-32. [JSTOR] Osborne, John. ‗Black Mountain and Projective Verse.‘ A Companion to Twentieth-Century Poetry, ed. Neil Roberts (2001). Perloff, Marjorie. ‗Pound/Stevens: Whose Era?‘ New Literary History, 13, no. 3 (1982), 485-514. [Doesn‘t directly discuss the poets on this course, but important re: the Pound/Williams tradition.] [JSTOR] Reeve, N.H., and Richard Kerridge. Nearly Too Much: The Poetry of J. H. Prynne (1995). Whitworth, Michael H., ed. Modernism (2006)

LITERATURE AND PSYCHOANALYSIS Dr Ankhi Mukherjee ([email protected]) Psychoanalysis (in the academy, at least) seems to have completed a circle of sorts, from its origins in the materiality of medical necessity, through a postmodern linguisterie and back to a newly insistent materialism. This course travels along this trajectory, beginning with Freud‗s contribution, in his words, ―to the science of psychology and to the world of literature and life in general,‖ moving on to Lacan‗s use of the Freudian legacy to read the unconscious ―like a language‖ and finally, to a socialised, politicised psychoanalysis. While the course will serve as an introduction to psychoanalytic theory, we will also read about its cultural and trans-cultural reception, and the contexts in which it can be effectively used to interpret social texts, intervene in political injustice, and participate in civic democracy. Our objective in this course is to bring together select literary and psychoanalytic texts to examine the literary in psychoanalysis, and also literature‘s endless fascination with psychic malady, its interpretation and cure. Our approach would be literary-critical as well as cultural: students are encouraged to read psychoanalysis both for its aesthetics, or what Mary Jacobus calls its ‗poetics,‘ and for the insights it offers into politics and conflict. Anxiety Freud, ‗On the Mechanism of Paranoia‘ Lacan, Seminar X: Anxiety (Cormac Gallagher translation, Karnac Books, 2002 – this book is not widely available, so do not leave it till the last minute to procure it) Ellison, The Invisible man Secondary Readings Roberto Harari, Lacan‟s Seminar On “Anxiety”: An Introduction Kalpana Sheshadri-Crooks, Desiring Whiteness: A Lacanian Analysis of Race

148

Copjec, Joan. ‗Vampires, Breast-Feeding and Anxiety.‘ October 58 (1991): 25-43. Richard Boothby, Death and Desire: Psychoanalytic Theory in Lacan‟s Return to Freud Narrative Freud, ‗Dora‘ In Dora‟s Case, ed. Charles Bernheimer and Claire Kahane Jacqueline Rose, Sexuality in the Field of Vision (chapter 1) Secondary Readings Jacqueline Rose, ―Dora,‖ Sexuality in the Field of Vision John Forrester, The Seductions of Psychoanalysis: Freud, Lacan, and Derrida Leo Bersani, The Freudian Body: Psychoanalysis and Art Peter Brooks, Reading for the Plot: Design and Intention in Narrative --. Psychoanalysis and Storytelling Literature and Psychoanalysis: The Question of Reading: Otherwise ed. Shoshana Felman Rachel Bowlby, Shopping with Freud The Purloined Poe: Lacan, Derrida, and Psychoanalytic Reading ed. John P. Muller and William J. Richardson [this includes Lacan‘s essay on ―The Purloined Letter‖] Sexuality James, The Turn of the Screw Freud, Three Essays on the Theory of Sexuality Secondary Readings: Diana Fuss, Identification Papers Kaja Silverman, Male Subjectivity at the MarginsFeminine Sexuality: Jacques Lacan and the école freudienne, ed. Juliet Mitchell and Jacqueline Rose Jacques Lacan, ―Desire and the Interpretation of Desire in Hamlet,‖ in Literature and Psychoanalysis ed. Shoshana Felman Joan Copjec, Imagine There‟s No Woman: Ethics and Sublimation Fink, Bruce. The Lacanian Subject: Between Language and Jouissance. The Clinic of the Real Freud, ―The Uncanny‖ Hoffmann, ―The Sandman,‖ Tales of E. T. A. Hoffmann Lacan, ―The Unconscious and Repetition,‖ Four Fundamental Concepts of Psychoanalysis

149

Zizek, ―Welcome to the Desert of the Real‖ Secondary Readings On the Uncanny Philip Armstrong, ‗Uncanny Spectacles: Psychoanalysis and the Texts of King Lear.‘ Textual Practice 8:2 (1994): 414-34 Harold Bloom, ‗Freud and the Sublime: A Catastrophe Theory of Creativity.‘ Agon: Towards a Theory of Revisionism Elizabeth Bronfen, Over her Dead Body: Death, Femininity and the Aesthetic Hélène Cixous, ―Fiction and Its Phantoms: A Reading of Freud‘s ‗Das Unheimliche.‘‖ New Literary History 7 (1976): 525-48. Mladen Dolar, ―‗I Shall Be with You on Your Wedding-Night‘: Lacan and the Uncanny.‖ October 58 (1991): 5-23. Jacques Derrida, Specters of Marx: The State of the Debt, the Work of Mourning, and the New International. Trans. Peggy Kamuf Marjorie Garber, Shakespeare‟s Ghost Writers: Literature as Uncanny Causality Neil Hertz, ‗Freud and the Sandman.‘ The End of the Line: Essays on Psychoanalysis and the Sublime. New York: Columbia UP, 1985. Robin Lydenberg, ‗Freud‘s Uncanny Narratives,‘ PMLA 112 (1997): 1072-86. David Punter, ‗Shape and Shadow: On Poetry and the Uncanny,‘ A Companion to the Gothic ed. David Punter Nicholas Royle, The Uncanny Samuel Weber, ―The Sideshow: or, Remarks on a Canny Moment.‖ Modern Language Notes 88 (1973): 1102-33. Linda Ruth Williams, ‗Home is Where the Uncanny Is.‘ Critical Desire: Psycho-Analysis and the Literary Subject Julian Wolfreys, Victorian Hauntings: Spectrality, Gothic, the Uncanny and Literature On the Real Parveen Adams, Rendering the Real. A Special Issue. October 58 (1991). Mark Bracher and Ellie Ragland-Sullivan. Lacan and the Subject of Language Copjec, Joan. Read My Desire: Lacan against the Historicists Dolar, Mladen. ―I Shall Be with You on Your Wedding-Night‘: Lacan and the Uncanny.‖ Rendering the Real. A Special Issue. Ed. Parveen Adams. October 58 (Fall): 5-23. Jean-Michel Rabaté, Jacques Lacan: Psychoanalysis and the Subject of Literature Slavoj Žižek, Looking Awry: An Introduction to Jacques Lacan through Popular Culture 150

Why War? Freud, ‗Introduction to Psycho-Analysis and the War Neuroses‘ --, Beyond the Pleasure Principle (selections) Rose, Why War? Mohsin Hamid, The Reluctant Fundamentalist Memory Sebald, Austerlitz Trauma: Explorations in Memory ed. Cathy Caruth (selections) Secondary Readings Cathy Caruth, ed., Trauma: Explorations in Memory --, Unclaimed Experience: Trauma, Narrative, and Theory Ruth Leys, Trauma: A Genealogy Jacqueline Rose, Why War? ---Psychoanalysis, Politics, and the Return to Melanie Klein --. On Not Being Able to Sleep: Psychoanalysis and the Modern World Carol Jacobs, Telling Time: Lévi Strauss, Ford, Lessing, Benjamin, de Man, Wordsworth, Rilke Judith Herman, Trauma and Recovery Fredric Jameson, The Political Unconscious Slavoj Žižek, The Sublime Object of Ideology Background reading Peter Brooks, Psychoanalysis and Storytelling Patrick Mahoney, Freud as a Writer Jane Gallop, Reading Lacan Maud Ellmann, Psychoanalytic Literary Criticism John Forrester, The Seductions of Psychoanalysis: Freud, Lacan, Derrida --, Truth Games. Lies, Money, and Psychoanalysis Graham Frankland, Freud‟s Literary Culture Sander L. Gilman, The Case of Sigmund Freud. Medicine and Identity at the Fin de Siècle Elizabeth Roudinesco, Jacques Lacan and Co.: A History of Psychoanalysis in France, 1925-1985. Translated by Jeffrey Mehlman Mary Jacobus, Psychoanalyis and the Scene of Reading

151

--. The Poetics of Psychoanalysis Jean Laplanche and J.B. Pontalis, The Language of Psychoanalysis Laura Marcus, ed., Sigmund Freud‟s The Interpretation of Dreams. New Interdisciplinary Essays Nicholas Rand and Maria Torok, Questions for Freud. The Secret History of Psychoanalysis Paul Ricoeur, Freud and Philsophy: An Essay in Interpretation Kaja Silverman, The Acoustic Mirror: The Female Voice in Psychoanalysis and Cinema Frank J. Sulloway, Freud. Biologist of the Mind

English and American Hilary Term

AMERICAN LITERARY STUDIES NOW (AMERICAN CORE COURSE) Dr Lloyd Pratt ([email protected]) This is the compulsory course for the MSt English and American students; it is not open to students from other strands. This seminar asks students to assess the current state of American literary and cultural studies through focused attention to the most influential methodological positions in the field. We will attend to the after effects of the ―spatial turn,‖ the resurgent interest in histories of the book, new developments in literature and the law, and the field‘s shifting relationship to the past and future as horizons of possibility. Students will be encouraged to articulate a fully formed and rigorous critique of the field‘s current structure by measuring the success or failure of its reigning methodologies vis-à‐vis major texts in American and African American literary studies. Through a comparative approach to the field‘s internal debates, we will pursue questions of methodological blindness and insight: what does the spatial turn reveal that the history of the book occludes? Can we talk about ―optimism‖ without talking about the past? Have American Studies and American literary studies really moved beyond the nation? Or does ―America‖ still function as a covert unit of analysis? In addition to the seminar meetings listed below, students in the English and American Studies strand are expected to attend the conference ―Alain Locke in the 21st Century,‖ which will be held October 12-13 in Michaelmas Term. Students should register for the conference by emailing [email protected]. A tentative schedule of the conference is available at http://alainlocke21.webs.com/. When sending the registration email, please indicate that you are a student in the MSt in English and American Studies. We are also scheduling a special seminar for the English and American Studies strand with Professor Kenneth Warren (University of Chicago) on the afternoon of October 11. Additional details and readings for both the conference and the special seminar will be forthcoming. These two events are part of the larger range of conference, seminar, and lecture offerings pertinent to English and American Studies. These offerings include the American Literature Research Seminar and the American Literature Graduate Seminar, both of which meet two to three times a term at the Rothermere American Institute; special lectures by visiting scholars and writers; and the period and strand research seminars and colloquia. Students in English and American Studies are expected to be active participants in these events. Consult the English Faculty Lecture List, the RAI Term Card, and the ―What‘s on this Week‖ email from the English Faculty for a full listing of available options. 152

Students are also encouraged to attend the undergraduate lectures being offered in fields pertinent to their chosen area of study. For those new to Oxford, it is useful to know that there is no need to register for lectures. You may attend all of the lectures in a series, or you may elect to attend the lectures most pertinent to your areas of interest. These lectures often provide essential coverage in the field, as well as providing crucial historical and literary critical context. Consult the English Faculty Lecture list for a full account of the lectures on offer. Week 1 After the Spatial Turn: The Transnational, the Hemispheric, the Oceanic Melville, Moby-Dick Edwards, Brent. The Practice of Diaspora pp. 1‐118 Giles, Paul. Virtual Americas: Transnational Fictions and the Transatlantic Imaginary pp. 1-21; 47‐87 Gilroy, Paul. The Black Atlantic pp. ix‐110 Week 2 The New South (Again) Faulkner, Absalom, Absalom! Greeson, Jennifer. Our South: Geographic Fantasy and the Rise of National Literature pp. 1‐114 Gruesz, Kirsten Silva. Ambassadors of Culture: The Transamerican Origins of Latino Writing pp. 1‐29; 108‐160 O‘Brien, Michael. Intellectual Life and the American South, 1810-1860 pp. 395‐593 Week 3 Histories of the Book in America Dickinson, Final Harvest Hawthorne, The House of the Seven Gables Paine, Common Sense Jackson, Virginia. Dickinson‟s Misery: A Theory of Lyric Reading pp. 1‐117 Loughran, Trish. The Republic in Print: Print Culture in the Age of U.S. Nation Building, 1770-1870 pp. xiii‐160 McGill, Meredith. American Literature and the Culture of Reprinting, 1834- 1853 pp. 1‐108 Week 4 Literature and the Law Melville, Billy Budd and Benito Cereno Emerson, ―Self--‐Reliance‖ Agamben, Giorgio. State of Exception pp. 1‐118 Dayan, Colin. The Law Is a White Dog: How Legal Rituals Make and Unmake Persons pp. 11‐70 DeLombard, Jeannine. Slavery on Trial: Law, Abolitionism, and Print Culture pp. 1-124 Smith, Caleb. The Prison and the American Imagination pp. 1‐140

153

Week 5 Optimism and the Futures of the Past Whitman, Leaves of Grass Jones, The Known World Ahmed, Sara. The Promise of Happiness pp. 1-87 Edelman, Lee. No Future: Queer Theory and the Death Drive pp. 1‐66 Ernest, John. Liberation Historiography pp. 1‐154 Love, Heather. Feeling Backward: Loss and the Politics of Queer History pp. 1‐52 Week 6 TBD

English Language Hilary Term

ENGLISH AND THE EIGHTEENTH CENTURY Professor Lynda Mugglestone ([email protected]) The eighteenth century is a period which is often seen through a narrow set of prototypical images – often focused on ideas of correctness, rigidity, and a marked concern for fixing the language. The aim in this course is to investigate the realities – and complexity -- of eighteenth-century discourse, across a range of text-types and users, with an emphasis on variability and change, on the nature of linguistic representation, and on spoken and written language, ‗standard‘ and otherwise. Week 1: 1700-1800: The Identity of Eighteenth-Century English The opening week of this course examines common stereotypes of eighteenth-century English (correctness, prescriptivism, the drive for fixity, not least in academy discourses such as those exemplified by Swift‘s 1712 Proposal) alongside evidence of its changing composition across the century. A range of texts and text-types will be used to examine changing patterns of grammar and syntax, of orthographical representation in print and print conventions, as well as models of standard English usage. [* = core reading] Primary Oldmixon, J. (1712) Reflections on Dr Swift‟s Letter to the Earl of Oxford about the English Tongue. London. Swift, J. (1712) Proposal for Correcting, Improving and Ascertaining the English Tongue. London: Tooke Secondary *Tieken Boon von Ostade, I (2009). An Introduction to Late Modern English. Edinburgh University Press. *Beal, J C. (2004). English in Modern Times 1700-1945. London: Arnold *Gorlach, M (2001). Eighteenth-Century English (Cambridge; Cambridge University Press) *Hickey, R (2010) (ed.) Eighteenth-Century English Ideology and Change. Cambridge University Press.

154

McIntosh, C (2010). ‗British English in the Long Eighteenth Century‘ in H. Momma and M. Matto, A Companion to the History of the English Language (Blackwell, 2010) D. Stein and Tieken, I. (1994). Towards a Standard English, 1600-1800. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, 1-18. Tieken-Boon van Ostade, Ingrid (Ed.) (2008). Grammars, Grammarians and Grammar-Writing in Eighteenth-century England. Berlin/New York: Mouton de Gruyter. ----. (2011) The Bishop‟s Grammar. Robert Lowth and the Rise of Prescriptivism. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Week 2: Language, Nation, History Language and nationhood were markedly topical issues in the eighteenth century, manifested in a variety of ways, whether in initial attempts to write a history of English, or in responses to lexical change and issues of purism and naturalisation, or in the arguments about linguistic homogenization and Scottish or the use of English in Ireland. This week‘s work will explore these and related issues, using a range of contemporary writings. Sorensen, J. (2000) The Grammar of Empire in Eighteenth-Century British Writing. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. *Bailey, R (2010). ‗Variation and change in eighteenth-century English‘. In Hickey, EighteenthCentury English, 182-199 Beal, J (2012). ‗À la mode de Paris‖: Linguistic Patriotism and Francophobia in Eighteenthcentury Britain. In Percy, C. and Davidsen, M. The Languages of Nation. Attitudes and Norms *Colley, L (1992). Britons: Forging the Nation, 1707-1837, London: Yale University Press. Hickey, R (2010). ‗English in eighteenth-century Ireland‘. In Hickey, Eighteenth-century English, . 235-68. Hughes, G. (2000). A History of English Words. Oxford: Blackwell. Tucker, S. Protean Shape. A Study in Eighteenth-Century Vocabulary and Usage Jones, C. (2010). ‗Nationality and standardization in eighteenth-century Scotland‘. In Hickey, Eighteenth-Century English, 221-34. Cohen, M. (1996) Fashioning Masculinity: National Identity and Language in the Eighteenth Century. London: Routledge *Crowley, T. (1996). Language in history: Theories and Texts. London: Routledge. Chapter 3: ‗Wars of Words. The roles of language in eighteenth-century Britain‘ Week 3: Language in Use - The Epistolary as Evidence Private correspondence in the eighteenth century offers an abundance of information on the reality of informal language use, between correspondents of both sexes, of different ages, and of different social (and regional) identities. Enabling linguistic scrutiny to move outside the domain of print, the value of this type of evidence has rightly been stressed in recent years. Using a range of sources from across the century, work will focus on the insights which epistolary correspondence can provide on ordinary discourse, as well as on changes in progress, and the realities of unmonitored usage in the eighteenth century. 155

*Anderson, H, P B. Daghlian and I. Ehrenpreis (eds.) (1966). The Familiar Letter in the Eighteenth Century. Lawrence: University of Kansas Press * Austin, F (1994). ‗The effect of exposure to Standard English: The language of William Clift‘. In Dieter Stein and Ingrid Tieken-Boon van Ostade (eds.). (1994). Towards a Standard English (Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter), 285-313. * Brownlees, N, Del Lungo, G, Denton, J (Eds.), The Language of Public and Private Communication in a Historical Perspective, 24-45. Newcastle upon Tyne: Cambridge Scholars Publishing * Dossena, M & Tieken-Boon van Ostade, I (2008). Studies in Late Modern English Correspondence: Methodology and Data (Bern: Peter Lang). * Osselton, N. (1963)) Formal and informal spelling systems in the Eighteenth Century: Errour, honour, and related words‘. English Studies 44: 267-75 Sairio, A. (2009). Language and Letters of the Bluestocking Network: Sociolinguistic Issues in Eighteenth-century Epistolary English. (Mémoires de la Société Néophilologique de Helsinki 75). Helsinki: Société Néophilologique *Tieken-Boon van Ostade, I.M. (2006) ‗Eighteenth-century English letters: In search of the vernacular. Linguistica e Filologia, 21, 113-46. Week 4: The ‗Age of Dictionaries‘ Johnson‘s words to Samuel Richardson, in a letter sent after the publication of his own dictionary, usefully focus interest on the range of lexicographical enterprises which are in evidence across the eighteenth century, whether in new generic modes (the pronouncing dictionary, the pocket dictionary), as well as dictionaries aimed at wide-ranging general use. Using evidence from a range of primary sources (a wide variety of eighteenth-century dictionaries are available on ECCO), as well as electronic editions of Johnson‘s dictionary (McDermott ***), this week‘s work will probe the aims, data, and methodologies which are variously in evidence in eighteenth-century lexicography. Bejoint, H (2010), The Lexicography of English. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Coleman, J. (2004). History of Cant and Slang Dictionaries. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Vol.I I: 1567-1784 Oxford: Oxford University Press. Cowie, A. (2009). The Oxford History of Lexicography. Oxford: Oxford University Press. *Gurr, A (ed). (1998). Eighteenth-Century Lexis and Lexicography. Yearbook of English Studies (28). Lynch, J. and McDermott, A. (eds), (2005). Anniversary Essays on Johnson‟s Dictionary, Cambridge University Press *Mugglestone, L. (2010). ‗‗Registering the language - dictionaries, diction, and the art of elocution‘. In Raymond Hickey (ed.) Eighteenth-Century English: Ideology and Change. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 309-338. *Reddick, A. The Making of Johnson‟s Dictionary (this is essential reading for Johnson). * Stein, G. (ed.) (1991). The English Dictionary from Cawdrey to Johnson. Amsterdam

156

Week 5: Talking Proper – The Eighteenth Century and Orthoepy The spoken language is an area of particular salience in eighteenth-century language history. A wide range of writers, particularly in the second half of the century, came to document in increasing detail not merely changes in progress (via a series of idiosyncratic transcription systems), but also the drive towards a supra-regional mode of articulation. As writers such as Thomas Sheridan and John Walker stressed, an increasingly standardized orthography ought to be accompanied by an invariant (and national) pronunciation. This week looks in detail at the shifts – in both ideology and language practice – which make the eighteenth century a critical juncture in the history of modern Received Pronunciation. Primary (all available on ECCO) Walker, J. (1791) A Critical Pronouncing Dictionary and Expositor of the English Language. London: G.G.J. and J. Robinson, T. Cadell Sheridan, T. (1762) A Course of Lectures on Elocution. London: for A. Millar, R. and J. Dodsley, T. Davies, C. Hender, J. Wilkie, E. Dilly Sheridan, T. (1780) A General Dictionary of the English Language. 2 vols. London: J. Dodsley, C. Dilly, J. Wilkie Secondary *Beal, J C. (1999) English Pronunciation in the Eighteenth Century: Thomas Spence's Grand Repository of the English Language. Oxford, New York: Clarendon Press, Oxford University Press -------. (2004). ‗Marks of disgrace: Attitudes to non-standard pronunciation in 18th-century English pronouncing dictionaries. In M. Dossena and R. Lass (eds) Methods and Data in English Historical Dialectology. Bern: Peter Lang, 329–349 *Jones, C. (2006). English Pronunciation in the Eighteenth and Nineteenth Centuries. London: Palgrave Macmillan MacMahon, M.K.C. (1998). ‗Phonology‘. In S. Romaine (ed.) The Cambridge History of the English Language. Vol. 4, 1776–1997 (pp. 373–535). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Milroy, J (1994). ‗The notion of ‗standard language‘ and its applicability to the study of Early Modern English pronunciation‘. In Stein, Dieter and Tiken, Ingrid, Towards a Standard English 1600-1800, 19-30 *Mugglestone, L. (2007). Talking Proper. The Rise of Accent as Social Symbol (OUP, 2nd rev. edn, 2007) Sturiale, M. (2006) William Perry‘s The Royal Standard English Dictionary (1775): A provincial‘s attempt to ascertain and fix a standard to the pronunciation of the English tongue. Historiographia Linguistica 33 (1/2), 139–168 Week 6: Writers and Writing This week will look at how individual writers negotiated and used the resources of eighteenthcentury English. A range of pathways is available, from detailed scrutiny of the writing of one individual writer, to looking at change, innovation and documentation on different levels of linguistic organisation in different writers, or the examination of how different writers made use of social and/ or geographical varieties. 157

Blake N.F. (1981). Non-Standard Language in English Literature (London: Andrew Deutsch) Fitzmaurice, S (2000). Rhetoric, Language and Literature: new perspectives on English in the eighteenth century. (Special Issue of Language Sciences 22(3)) Amsterdam: Elsevier Science Publishers. McIntosh, C (1994). ‗Prestige norms in Stage Plays‘. In Dieter Stein and Tieken, Ingrid, Towards a Standard English 1600-1800 (Berlin), 63-80. Page, N. (1988). Speech in the English Novel (London: Longman) Richetti, J (1987). ‗Representing and Underclass: Servants and proletarians in Fielding and Smollett‘. In F. Nussbaum and L. Brown (ed.) The New Eighteenth Century. (New York: Methuen), 84-98. Speck, W. (1984). Society and Literature in England, 1700-60. (New Jersey: Humanities Press). *Hickey, R (ed.) (2010). Varieties of English in Writing. The Written Word as Linguistic Evidence. John Benjamins Kortmann, B and Wagner, S (2010). ‗Changes and continuities in dialect grammar‘, in Hickey, Eighteenth-Century English, 269-91.

SOCIOLINGUISTICS Professor Deborah Cameron ([email protected]) Dr Rosalind Temple ([email protected]) Sociolinguistics is the subfield of linguistics which seeks to describe and explain patterned variation in linguistic behaviour, and the language-change to which variation can lead. Sociolinguists are particularly interested in the influence of social factors on language-use: among the phenomena they study are the linguistic correlates of major social divisions such as class, ethnicity and gender, the impact of ideologies (e.g. nationalism or notions of ‗correctness‘) and social upheavals (e.g. migration and colonization), and the local effects of speakers‘ social networks and the subcultural practices through which they express their identities. In this series of seminars we will explore these areas of interest by focusing on a number of key issues in contemporary sociolinguistics. Particular though not exclusive reference will be made to variation and change in English-speaking communities (including those where English is used alongside one or more other languages). Where readings are not ordered alphabetically by author, you are advised to read them in the order they are listed in. Readings marked ‗additional‘ are not required, but responsibility for reading and reporting on some of them may be shared among participants. Fuller reading lists will also be provided during the term. Preparatory reading Two texts will be used particularly frequently in this option, so we recommend acquiring them in advance and starting to read the relevant parts of them: Chambers, J.K., P. Trudgill & N.Schilling-Estes (eds) The Handbook of Language Variation and Change (Blackwell 2002) Meyerhoff, M. & E. Schleef (eds) The Routledge Sociolinguistics Reader (Routledge 2010).

158

If you have not already done so for the A course, you are also advised to read Milroy, J and L Milroy, Authority in Language (Routledge 2012) Week 1: Ideologies, norms and standards In this seminar we will consider the way languages are represented and regulated, focusing particularly on the ‗standard language ideology‘ which underlies the common-sense view of languages as discrete entities with clear boundaries and fixed rules. In this ideological frame, writing is elevated over speech, dialectal variation is seen as ‗incorrect‘, and change is deplored as decline or ‗corruption‘. We will consider the social and political consequences of this ideology and look at some of the efforts sociolinguists have made to counter it. Read the references marked * and at least two of the others *Milroy, J. and L. Milroy, Authority in Language (Routledge Classics in Linguistics, 2012) *Woolard, K. ‗Language ideology as a field of inquiry‘, in Language Ideologies: Practice and Theory, ed. B. Schieffelin, K. Woolard and S. Kroskrity (OUP, 1998) Labov, W, ‗The logic of nonstandard English‘, in Language in the Inner City (U. Penn Press 1972) Cameron, D. Verbal Hygiene, chs. 1-3 (Routledge Classics in Linguistics, 2012) Chand, V. 2009. [v]at is going on? Local and global ideologies about Indian English. Language in Society, 38(4):393-419 Ferguson, G, Language education policy and the medium of instruction issue in post-colonial Africa, in Meyerhoff and Schleef. Heller, M, et al. Sociolinguistics and public debate, Journal of Sociolinguistics 3, 1999, 260-88 Preston, D, Language with an attitude, in Meyerhoff and Schleef. Additional reading Lippi-Green, R. English with an Accent (Routledge, 2006) Practical task: find an example in the media (old or new) of ideological discourse on any aspect of English, and be prepared to discuss it with the group in the light of what you have read. Week 2: Language variation and change (1) understanding sound change in speech communities The great insight of variationist sociolinguistics was that the mechanisms of language change were observable in patterns of structured variability across speech communities. This has been found to be true at different levels of linguistics structure (sounds, syntax, discourse markers, lexicon), but most of the foundational work, and much contemporary work, has focused on sound change. This session examines the social constructs said to structure patterns of variation and how they might explain processes of change. Read the overview articles in the Handbook of Language Variation and Change, then the suggested chapters from the classic studies by Labov, Trudgill and Milroy

159

Ash, S. Social class; Chambers, J.K., Patterns of variation including change; Milroy, L., Social networks, all in JK Chambers, P Trudgill & N Schilling-Estes (eds.), Handbook of Language Variation and Change (Blackwell 2002). Labov, W. The social motivation of a sound change. In Sociolinguistic Patterns. (U of Penn Press, 1972). Also reprinted in Meyerhoff & Schleef Trudgill, P. The Social Differentiation of English in Norwich. (Cambridge University Press 1974). Read Chapters 1 – 3 and 7 Milroy, L. Language and Social Networks. 2nd edn. (Blackwell 1987 (1st edn. 1980)). Read Chapters 1, 4, 5 and 7 Additional reading Labov, W. (2001) Principles of Linguistic Change II. Social Factors. (Blackwell 2001). [NB this can be hard work in places; do not allow yourself to get too bogged down in the detailed statistics] Sankoff, D. & S. Laberge. The linguistic market and the statistical explanation of variability. In D Sankoff (ed.) Linguistic Variation: Models and Methods (Academic Press 1978) Sankoff, G. & H. Blondeau. Language change across the lifespan: /r/ in Montreal French. Language 83, 2007: 560-588, and reprinted in Meyerhoff & Schleef. Trudgill, Norwich revisited, in Meyerhoff & Schleef. Task: study and be prepared to explain the significance of at least two tables and two graphs from Labov (1972) and / or Trudgill (1974) and/or Milroy (1980). Week 3: Language variation and change (2) dialect contact and ‗supralocal‘ change The major variationist studies of urban communities have generally concentrated on the diffusion of change within the community, but it has always been implicit that there is a geographical dimension to at least some of the changes, for example, when incoming features from a prestige, standard variety begin to displace local variants. In recent decades more explicit attention has been paid to the geographical dimension. For example, how and why do sound changes spread across geographical space? Does this happen in a smooth fashion, or do changes leap from one major urban area to another? What happens when speakers of different dialects come together in new, expanded urban communities? Do they all converge on the features of one particular variety or does a new variety emerge? Read the papers listed below and try to do some of the additional reading if you can Britain, D. Space and spatial diffusion; Kerswill, P., Koineization and accommodation; both in J. K. Chambers, P. Trudgill & N. Schilling-Estes (eds), Handbook of Language Variation and Change (Blackwell 2002). Kerswill, P. Dialect levelling and geographical diffusion in British English. In D. Britain and J. Cheshire (eds). Social Dialectology. In Honour of Peter Trudgill. (Benjamins 2003). Kerswill, P. & A. Williams Creating a new town koine: children and language change in Milton Keynes. Language in Society 29, 2000: 65-115. Britain, D. Innovation diffusion, ‗Estuary English‘ and local dialect differentiation: the survival of Fenland Englishes. Linguistics 43, 2005: 995-1022.

160

Milroy, L., Milroy, J., Hartley, S. & D. Walshaw. Glottal stops and Tyneside glottalization: competing patterns of variation and change in British English. Language Variation & Change 6, 1994: 327-357. Additional reading Trudgill, P. Dialects in Contact. (Blackwell 1986). Chambers, J. K. & P. Trudgill (1998). Dialectology. 2nd edn. Cambridge: CUP. Chapters by Britain, Meyerhoff & Niedzielski, Kerswill & Williams, in Meyerhoff & Schleef Week 4: Acts of identity (1) linguistic styles and socially constructed selves Stylistic variation can be defined in general terms as patterned variation in the speech of one social group or one individual speaking in different situations; but the underlying motivation for this kind of variation has prompted considerable debate among sociolinguists. Does it reflect the amount of attention paid to speech in more and less formal contexts, the influence of the audience for which a speaker designs their speech, or the speaker‘s exploitation of linguistic resources to design a distinctive personal or subcultural style? Read the first four references below and at least one of the others *Schilling-Estes, Natalie, Investigating stylistic variation, in JK Chambers, P Trudgill & N Schilling-Estes (eds.), Handbook of Language Variation and Change (Blackwell 2002). *Labov, W. ‗The isolation of contextual styles‘, in Sociolinguistic Patterns (U Penn Press, 1972) *Bell, A, Back in style: reworking audience design, in Meyerhoff and Schleef [note: the original formulation of this model is Bell, A. Language style as audience design, in N. Coupland and A. Jaworski (eds) Sociolinguistics: A Reader, 240-50. (St. Martin‘s Press, 1997)]. *Eckert, P. Variation and the Indexical Field, Journal of Sociolinguistics 12/4, 2008: 453–476 Ochs, E. Indexing gender, reprinted in Meyerhoff and Schleef. Cameron, D. Styling the worker, Journal of Sociolinguistics 4.3: 323-47, 2000, and repr. in The Discourse Reader, ed. A, Jaworski & N. Coupland (Routledge, 2006). Eckert, P. Vowels and nail-polish, reprinted in Meyerhoff and Schleef Moore, E & R. Podesva, Style, indexicality and the social meaning of tag questions. Language in Society 38 , 2009, 447–85. Podesva, R., Phonation type as a stylistic variable: The use of falsetto in constructing a persona. Journal of Sociolinguistics 11/4, 2007: 478–504. Additional reading Chapters by Hay et al. and Zhang in Meyerhoff & Schleef Eckert, P. Variation as Social Practice (Blackwell, 2000) Eckert, P. and J. Rickford (eds.) Style and Sociolinguistic Variation (Cambridge UP, 2001) see esp. chapters by Bell, Labov, Biber & Finegan Finegan, Edward and Douglas Biber, Register and social dialect variation: An integrated approach, in Biber and Finegan, eds. 1994.

161

Rickford, J. & F. McNair-Knox, Addressee- and topic-influenced style shift, in Biber, D. and E. Finegan (eds). 1994. Sociolinguistic Perspectives on Register (OUP 1994). Week 5: Acts of identity (2) drawing on multilingual repertoires Some of the same principles that have been applied to stylistic variation in a single language can also be applied to code-choice and code-switching in communities whose repertoire includes two or more different languages. In this seminar we will examine how this works and how it has been analysed. We will also consider the ideological/political dimension of language-choice and the position of linguistic minorities. (Some of the additional readings below may become required, but the exact list of readings for this seminar will be determined later, since they will depend on which multilingual settings and practices participants are particularly interested in). Read chapters by Blom and Gumperz, Choi, Heller, Rampton in Meyerhoff & Schleef Additional reading Chand, V. Elite positionings towards Hindi: Language policies, political stances and language competence in India. Journal of Sociolinguistics, 15(1), 2011: 6-35. Heller, M. Linguistic Minorities and Modernity: A Sociolinguistic Ethnography (Continuum, 2007) Joseph, J. Language and Identity: National, Ethnic, Religious (Edinburgh UP, 2006) Myers-Scotton, C. Social Motivations for Code Switching: Evidence from Africa (OUP, 1995) Rampton, B. Crossing (Longman, 1995) Week 6: The future of diversity: language shift, endangerment & death One of the most important debates in all linguistics today concerns the reduction in global linguistic diversity that results from widespread and rapid language shift/death. In this seminar we look at sociolinguistic accounts of language shift in particular contexts, and also at theoretical debates among sociolinguistics on the significance of language death and the role played in that process by the spread of English as a global language. Craig, C. Language contact and language degeneration, in F. Coulmas (ed.), The Handbook of Sociolinguistics (Blackwell 1997) Coupland, N. (ed) The Handbook of Language and Globalization (Blackwell, 2010), chs. 1, 4, 5 Duchêne, A. and M. Heller (eds) Discourses of Endangerment (Continuum, 2007), ch.1 and one other case-study chapter of your choice. Kulick, D and C Stroud, Code-switching in Gapun: linguistic and social aspects of language use in a language shifting community, in Meyerhoff & Schleef. Additional reading Brenzinger, M. (ed). Language Diversity Endangered (Mouton 2007) Dorian, N. Language Death: The Life Cycle of a Scottish Gaelic Dialect (U. Penn Press, 1981) Dorian, N. Investigating Obsolescence (CUP 1989) Gal, S. Language Shift (Academic Press, 1979) Kulick, D. Language Shift and Cultural Reproduction (CUP, 1992)

162

Nettle, D and S. Romaine, Vanishing Voices (OUP, 2000). Wolfram, W and N Schilling-Estes, Moribund dialects and the endangerment canon: the case of the Ocracoke brogue, Language 71(4), 1995.

LANGUAGE AND GENDER Professor Deborah Cameron ([email protected]) The relationship of language to gender has been a recurring theme in folklinguistic discourse for hundreds of years, and a topic taken up sporadically by anthropologists and linguists since the early 20th century. But the emergence of a subfield devoted to the serious study of language and gender is more recent, dating back to the early 1970s. In this series of seminars we will trace the development of this field of inquiry, and explore some of the key questions which continue to be debated today. General/introductory reading It is recommended that you should read one or two of these references before the teaching begins Baker, P. Sexed Texts (Equinox, 2008) Cameron, D. The Myth of Mars and Venus (OUP, 2007) Eckert, P and S McConnell-Ginet, Language and Gender (CUP, 2003) Harrington, K., Litosseliti, L., Sauntson, H. & Sunderland, J. (eds.) Gender and Language Research Methodologies (Palgrave Macmillan, 2008) Week 1: Ideologies of language and gender Most if not all cultures in all historical periods have held strong beliefs about how and why the sexes differ in their ways of using language. However, these ideological representations vary widely in space and over time. In this seminar we will examine examples which illustrate continuity and variation in ideologies of language and gender, including some from non-Englishspeaking contexts; we will also consider how these representations may influence both the actual behaviour of speakers and the more ‗scientific‘ study of language and gender. Read the first three references below and at least two of the others *Cameron, D., Gender and language ideologies, in The Handbook of Language and Gender (Blackwell, 2012) *Jespersen, O, The woman (1922), reprinted in D. Cameron, The Feminist Critique of Language (Routledge 1998) *Lakoff, R., Language and Woman‟s Place (Harper & Row 1975) Bean, J.M., Gaining a public voice: a historical perspective on American women‘s public speaking, in J. Baxter (ed) Speaking Out: The Female Voice in Public Contexts (Palgrave, 2006). Chamberlain, A., Women‘s languages, American Anthropologist 14 (1912): 579-81. Hall, K., Lip-service on the fantasy lines, in K. Hall and M. Bucholtz (eds) Gender Articulated (Routledge 1995)

163

Jones, A. R. Nets and bridles, in N. Armstrong and L. Tennenhouse (eds), The Ideology of Conduct (Routledge, 1987) Kulick, D. Speaking as a woman: structure and gender in domestic arguments in a New Guinean village, Cultural Anthropology 8.4 (1993): 522. Nakamura, M., Creating indexicality: schoolgirl speech in Meiji Japan, in D. Cameron & D. Kulick (eds), The Language and Sexuality Reader (Routledge, 2006). Participants will also be asked to look for examples of their own, e.g. recent self-help and popular science writing on male-female communication. Week 2: Investigating gendered talk in theory: dominance, difference, diversity The classic question for early researchers in the field of language and gender was whether, how and why men‘s and women‘s habitual ways of using language differed. Numerous generalizations were proposed about the nature of male and female language-use, and researchers approached the ‗why‘ question from the perspectives of ‗dominance‘ (relating gendered speech-styles to men‘s power and women‘s powerlessness) and ‗difference‘ (relating the differences to participation in genderspecific subcultures). However, these approaches presupposed a binary opposition between the two genders which was called into question at the beginning of the 1990s. Today most researchers follow the injunction to ‗look locally‘ at gendered linguistic behaviour and focus on differences among men and women as well as differences between the two groups. In this seminar we will review the debate on gendered talk, focusing on some key contributions to theoretical debate. Read the first two texts listed below and at least two of the others. *Lakoff, R., ‗Language and Woman‘s Place‘, and McConnell-Ginet, S. ‗Positioning ideas and gendered subjects: ―Women‘s language‖ revisited‘, both in R. Lakoff/ed. M. Bucholtz, Language and Woman‟s Place: Texts and Commentaries (OUP, 2004) [you may also find the introductory material and some of the other commentaries of interest] *Cameron, D. Language, gender and sexuality: current issues and new directions. Applied Linguistics, 26 (4): 482-502, 2005. Eckert, P and S. McConnell-Ginet, Communities of practice: where language, gender, and power all live, in Coates and Pichler, Language and Gender: A Reader (Blackwell 2011). Goodwin, M.H., The Hidden Lives of Girls: Games of Stance, Status and Exclusion (Blackwell, 2006), introduction Ochs, E. Indexing gender, in A. Duranti and C. Goodwin (eds) Rethinking Context (CUP, 1992) Uchida, A, When difference is dominance, in D. Cameron (ed) The Feminist Critique of Language (Routledge 1998). Week 3: Investigating gendered talk in practice: current issues This seminar will build on the previous week‘s discussion by looking at recent empirical research on gendered talk, especially in areas where the question of male/female differences and their relationship to power or culture continues to prompt debate and disagreement. These areas include linguistic politeness, the discourse of the ‗public‘ sphere (e.g. workplace and professional talk, political, religious and media discourse), computer-mediated communication, storytelling and gossip. Participants will be invited to select a subset of these topics to focus on in this week‘s

164

seminar; relevant readings will be taken from the list below, which also serves as a list of additional readings on gendered talk. Baxter, J. (ed.) Speaking Out: The Female Voice in Public Contexts (Palgrave, 2006) Coates, J. Women Talk: Conversation Between Women Friends (Blackwell, 1996). Coates, J. Men Talk: Stories in the Making of Masculinities (Blackwell, 2003). Coates, J. & P. Pichler (eds) Language and Gender: A Reader, 2nd edn (Blackwell 2011) Eckert, P. Cooperative competition in adolescent ‗girl talk‘, in D Tannen (ed) Gender and Conversational Interaction (OUP, 1993) Eppler, E & P. Pichler (eds) Gender and Spoken Interaction (Palgrave Macmillan, 2009) Goodwin, M.H. The Hidden Lives of Girls: Games of Stance, Status and Exclusion (Blackwell, 2006) Hall, K and M. Bucholtz (eds.) Gender Articulated (Routledge, 1995) Holmes, J. Women, Men and Politeness (Longman, 1995) Holmes, J. Gendered Talk at Work (Blackwell, 2006) Johnson, S and U Meinhof (eds) Language and Masculinity (Blackwell, 1997) Lakoff, R, ed. M. Bucholtz, Language and Woman‟s Place: Texts and Commentaries (OUP, 2004)—see especially Parts IV and V Meyerhoff, M and S Ehrlich (eds) The Handbook of Language and Gender (Blackwell, 2012) Mills, S. Gender and Politeness (CUP, 2003) Shaw, S, Language, gender and floor apportionment in political debates. Discourse & Society 11.3 (2001): 401-18. See also ‗Governed by the Rules? The Female Voice in Parliamentary Debates‘, in Baxter 2006 and repr. in Coates and Pichler 2011 Walsh, C. Gender and Discourse: Language and Power in Politics, the Church and Organizations (Longman, 2001). Week 4: Gender and sexual identity The relation between gender and sexual identity is particularly close, and in recent years more attention has been focused on the extent to which gendered language can serve to index sexual identities, while at the same time it is itself shaped by the assumptions of heteronormativity. This seminar considers some recent work on the speech styles associated with both minority and normative sexual identities. Leap, W. & H. Motschenbacher, Editorial statement, Journal of Language and Sexuality, 1, 2012. Cameron, D. and D. Kulick, Language and Sexuality (CUP, 2003), chs. 3, 4 Eckert, P., Vowels and nail polish, in D. Cameron and D. Kulick (eds.) The Language and Sexuality Reader (Routledge, 2006) Kitzinger, C., Speaking as a heterosexual, in Cameron and Kulick 2006. 165

Podesva, R., Phonation type as a stylistic variable: The use of falsetto in constructing a persona. Journal of Sociolinguistics 11/4, 2007: 478–504. Additional reading Baker, P. Sexed Texts (Equinox, 2008), chs 5-7 Cameron, D and D Kulick (eds) The Language and Sexuality Reader (Routledge, 2006) Hall, K. & A. Livia (eds) Queerly Phrased: Language, Gender and Sexuality (OUP, 1997) Leap, W. Word‟s Out: Gay Men‟s English (U Minnesota Press, 1996) Leap, W. & T. Boellstorff (eds) Speaking in Queer Tongues: Globalization and Gay Language (U Illinois Press, 2003) Week 5: The debate on sexist language This week‘s seminar will look at the debate which has been going on since the 1970s (and in some guises, even longer) regarding the sexism or male bias of conventional English usage, and particularly English grammar (though for comparison purposes some consideration will also be given to other languages with more extensive grammatical gender marking, or none). We will also examine some reform efforts and proposals and attempt to assess their impact over time. Cameron, D. The Feminist Critique of Language (Routledge, 1998), chs. by Hofstadter, Doyle, Cameron, Ehrlich and King, McConnell-Ginet. Mills, S., Language and Sexism (CUP, 2008), chs 1, 3 and 5 Additional reading Baron, D. Grammar and Gender (Yale UP, 1980) Hellinger, M and H Bussmann (eds), Gender Across Languages (3 Vols., Benjamins, 2001-3) Hughes, G., Political Correctness (Blackwell, 2010) Paterson, L., Epicene pronouns in UK National Newspapers: A Diachronic Study, ICAME Journal 35:171-184, 2011. Pauwels, A., Women Changing Language (Longman, 1998) Week 6: Discourse and the representation of gender Sexism in language is not just a question of isolated words and grammatical rules, but is also more subtly present in the patterns of gendered representation which are found in spoken and written discourse. In this seminar we will consider some examples, drawing on work in critical discourse analysis, corpus linguistics and pragmatics, and participants will also be asked to find their own examples to discuss. Baker P., Sexed Texts (Equinox, 2008), ch.3 Cameron, D, ‗Language, sexism and advertising standards‘, in On Language and Sexual Politics (Routledge 2006)

166

Lazar, M., ‗Gender, discourse and semiotics: the politics of parenthood representations‘, Discourse & Society 11: 373-400, 2000. available online at http://das.sagepub.com/content/11/3/373.full.pdf+html Additional reading Benwell, B, (ed.), Masculinity and Men‟s Lifestyle Magazines (Blackwell, 2003) Caldas-Coulthard, C, ‗Man in the news‘, in S Mills, ed. Language and Gender: Interdisciplinary Perspectives (Longman 1995) Clark, K. ‗The linguistics of blame‘, in D Cameron, The Feminist Critique of Language. (Routledge 1998) Crowther, B and D Leith, ‗Feminism, language and the rhetoric of television wildlife programmes‘, in S Mills (ed.) Language and Gender: Interdisciplinary Perspectives (Longman 1995) Koller, V, ‗Businesswomen and war metaphors: possessive, jealous and pugnacious?‘ Journal of Sociolinguistics 8.1, 2004

167